Pro Engineer 3.20 Tutorial

PTC Global Services
Fundamentals of Design
Release 2001
T781-320-04
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Copyright
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
This Fundamentals of Design Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to any
form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means,
electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance.
User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of
such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this
documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license
agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and
any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or
reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the
prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND
CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS,
CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN,
Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,
Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec,
CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS,
DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,
Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK,
NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,
Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST,
Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY,
Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK,
Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER,
Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT,
Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,
Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator,
PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment,
Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and
ICEM logo.

Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc.
Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a
registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of
Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX
is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3
are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc.
Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software
of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is
copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.
HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other
brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to
FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited
commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the
Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA
© 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United
States.
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T781-320-01 06/26/01 Initial Printing of Fundamentals of Design for Release 2001
T781-320-02 08/22/01 Revisions to Fundamentals of Design for Release 2001
Order Number DT-781-320-EN

Printed in U.S.A

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
Education Services Registration in North America

Tel: (888) 782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5553
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5650
License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5795
Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site
contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training
facilities, and course descriptions. You can also find general information about
PTC, Pro/ENGINEER, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and
Pro/PARTNERS.

Precision Learning
THE PRECISION LEARNING METHODOLOGY
PTC Global Services is dedicated to continually providing the student with an effective,
comprehensive learning experience. Toward this goal, PTC developed Precision Learning,
which matches the right training to the right people at the right time using the right method.
Precision Learning is based on a three stage Learn—Assess—Improve methodology.
Stage 1: LEARN
The student attends a PTC training course, including any:
• Instructor-led training course at a PTC training center.
• On-site training course.
• Customized training course.
• Web-based training (WBT) course.
Stage 2: ASSESS
The impact of a training course is assessed using the Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator.7KH
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVDZHEEDVHGVNLOOVDVVHVVPHQWDQGGHYHORSPHQWSODQQLQJWRRO,WLV
GHVLJQHGWRGHOLYHULQIRUPDWLRQWKDWZLOOKHOSLPSURYHWKHVNLOOVDQGSURGXFWLYLW\RIWKHVWXGHQW

Precision Learning
Stage 3: IMPROVE
The Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator findings enable customers to identify areas for improvement.
The training wizard will direct customers to the appropriate class based on their job
responsibilities.
Customers have access to a range of resources that include:
• Internal and external user groups

• PTC technical support resources
• Web-based courses and lessons
CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT
The Precision Learning methodology provides a continuous cycle of knowledge expansion and
improvement.

Precision Learning
PRECISION LEARNING IN THE CLASSROOM
The Learn—Assess—Improve Precision Learning methodology is also implemented in selected PTC
instructor-led courses. Throughout the class, students will take Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator assessments to evaluate
their own comprehension. The group results are also used to identify areas for the instructor to review with the
class as a whole. At the end of the class, each student will complete an Education Circuit form. This Education
Circuit is the student’s action plan, identifying topics for improvement, as well as the steps to take in order to
enhance the skills in those areas.
The following pages provide a sample Education Circuit action plan, and a blank action plan.
Instructions for using the Education Circuit action plan will be discussed in the course.

Precision Learning
EDUCATION CIRCUIT EXAMPLE
The following is an example of a student’s Education Circuit at the end of the Introduction to
Pro/ENGINEER training class.
Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator Exam Results

After reviewing the results of the Evaluator exams for this course, the following lists the
questions I answered incorrectly and need to research further:
Question Improve Action
Weak and strong dimensions Practice creating simple features with the desired
dimensioning scheme.
Web Lesson Dimensioning Scheme
Draft Features See colleague at work for advice and product examples.
Configuration file options Consult company user group for guidelines.
Class Evaluation Form Topics

After reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation form, the following lists the topics I
need to research further:
Objective Improve Action
Setting up the default view of a part Practice on simple parts using different sketching planes
and reference planes.
Creating sweeps Web Lesson Swept Forms
Resolve Mode Create some simple models and make them fail.
Resolve Mode Web lesson Resolve Mode
Future Courses
After reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the following lists the courses
recommended to improve my skills and enhance my job performance:
Next Courses Next Courses
Designing with Surfaces

Precision Learning
Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator Exam Results
After reviewing the results of the Evaluator exams for this course, the following lists the
questions I answered incorrectly and need to research further:
Question Improve Action
Class Evaluation Form Topics

After reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation form, the following lists the topics I
need to research further:
Objective Improve Action
Future Courses
After reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the following lists the courses
recommended to improve my skills and enhance my job performance:
Next Courses Next Courses

Training Agenda
Day 1
Advanced Sketching and Geometry
Drafts and Rounds
Creating Advanced Geometry
Surface Creation and Style Features
Day 2
Family Tables and Inheritance
Advanced Part Tools and Patterns
Local Groups and User-Defined Features
Advanced Assembly Tools
Day 3
Simplified Representations and Shrinkwrap
Top-Down Design and Layouts
Designing with Skeletons
Skeletons with Mapped Geometry
Day 4
Managing References
Project Part I: Design Intent
Project Part II: Skeleton Design
Project Part III: Creating Final Assembly
Day 5
Project Part IV: Completing Final Assembly
Resolving Failures
Pro/PROGRAM
Mechanism and Design Animation
Creating Photorealistic Images

Table of Contents
Advanced Sketching and Geometry 1-1

DEFINING ADVANCED GEOMETRY SKETCHING ...................................................1-2
Creating an Axis Normal to the Sketching Plane............................................................... 1-2
Sketching Conic Entities.................................................................................................... 1-2
Creating Elliptical Fillets ................................................................................................... 1-5
Creating Splines ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Replacing Sketched Entities............................................................................................... 1-7
Replacing Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-8
Inserting and Modifying Sketcher Text ............................................................................. 1-8
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................1-10
EXERCISE 1: Working with Splines............................................................................... 1-11
EXERCISE 2: Advanced Sketch and Text Functionality ................................................ 1-17
EXERCISE 3: Creating the Go Cart Mirror Housing ...................................................... 1-24
OPTIONAL EXERCISE ..................................................................................................1-31
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Importing External Spline Data........................................... 1-31
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................1-35
Drafts and Rounds 2-1

CREATING DRAFTS........................................................................................................2-2
Guidelines for Using Drafts ............................................................................................... 2-2
Defining a Draft Feature .................................................................................................... 2-3
Creating Neutral Plane Drafts ............................................................................................ 2-4
Creating Neutral Curve Drafts ........................................................................................... 2-5
CREATING ROUNDS.......................................................................................................2-6
Defining Simple Rounds.................................................................................................... 2-6
Selecting Round Feature References.................................................................................. 2-7
Creating Advanced Rounds................................................................................................ 2-9
Creating Round Sets......................................................................................................... 2-10
DEVELOPING GEOMETRY WITH ROUNDS .............................................................2-12
EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Plane Drafts.................................................................. 2-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Rounds ..................................................................... 2-21

EXERCISE 3: Creating Intent Chains..............................................................................2-32
OPTIONAL EXERCISES................................................................................................ 2-39
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Curve Drafts ............................................2-39
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Drafts ...................................................2-44
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating Simple and Advanced Rounds ..............................2-49
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 2-54
Creating Advanced Geometry 3-1

CREATING SWEPT BLENDS ......................................................................................... 3-2
Creating Spines...................................................................................................................3-2
Using Swept Blends ...........................................................................................................3-3
CREATING VARIABLE SECTION SWEEPS ................................................................ 3-3
Creating Normal-to-Original Spines ..................................................................................3-3
Defining Shapes with Additional Trajectories ...................................................................3-4
Using Variable Section Sweeps..........................................................................................3-7
Orienting Cross-Sections....................................................................................................3-8
CREATING HELICAL SWEEPS ..................................................................................... 3-9
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 3-13
EXERCISE 1: Using Swept Blends .................................................................................3-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating Variable Section Sweep Reference Curves................................3-22
OPTIONAL EXERCISE.................................................................................................. 3-30
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Controlling Cuts with Datum Graph Features .....................3-30
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-31
Surface Creation and Style Feature 4-1

USING SURFACES IN MODEL DESIGN ...................................................................... 4-2
Advantages of Using Surfaces............................................................................................4-2
DEFINING SURFACE OPTIONS .................................................................................... 4-2
Working in Part Mode........................................................................................................4-2
Open Ends versus Capped Ends .........................................................................................4-4
Creating Merged Surfaces ..................................................................................................4-4
CREATING SOLID FEATURES...................................................................................... 4-5
DEFINING ISDX............................................................................................................... 4-5
Using the Style Feature ......................................................................................................4-6
Parallel Modeling ...............................................................................................................4-7
USING ISDX ..................................................................................................................... 4-8
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves.............................................................................................4-8
Creating Curves on Surfaces ..............................................................................................4-9
Creating Styling Models...................................................................................................4-10
Creating Freeform Surfaces..............................................................................................4-10
Creating Blends and Transitions ...................................................................................... 4-11
Using Style Surfaces in Engineering Models................................................................... 4-12
EXERCISE 1: Creating Cuts Using Surfaces .................................................................. 4-14
EXERCISE 2: Applying Variable Section Sweeps.......................................................... 4-21
EXERCISE 3: Creating Style Surfaces............................................................................ 4-30
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Flashlight ................................................... 4-39
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................4-45
Family Tables and Inheritance Features 5-1

USING FAMILY TABLES................................................................................................5-2
Family Table Structure....................................................................................................... 5-3
CREATING FAMILY TABLES........................................................................................5-4
Creating the Generic Model ............................................................................................... 5-4
Creating the Table.............................................................................................................. 5-5
MODIFYING FAMILY TABLES .....................................................................................5-8
DEFINING FAMILY TABLE OPTIONS........................................................................5-12
DEFINING INHERITANCE FEATURES.......................................................................5-12
Using Inheritance Features............................................................................................... 5-13
Capabilities ...................................................................................................................... 5-13
Creating Inheritance Features .......................................................................................... 5-13
EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Family Tables .................................................................... 5-17
EXERCISE 2: Using Inheritance Features....................................................................... 5-24
EXERCISE 3: Inheritance Feature in New Models ......................................................... 5-27
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Family Tables ...................................... 5-29
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-34
Advanced Part Tools and Patterns 6-1

ADVANCED COMPONENT OPERATIONS ..................................................................6-2
Creating Part Intersections ................................................................................................. 6-2
Merging and Cutting Out Parts .......................................................................................... 6-2
Creating Mirrored Parts ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Creating Assembly-Level Features .................................................................................... 6-4
USING PATTERNING ......................................................................................................6-6
Creating Dimension Patterns.............................................................................................. 6-7
Creating Pattern Tables...................................................................................................... 6-7
Creating Patterns in Assembly Mode............................................................................... 6-11
EXERCISE 1: Mirroring the Knuckle Part ......................................................................6-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating Assembly Features.....................................................................6-16
EXERCISE 3: Creating Pattern Tables ............................................................................6-19
EXERCISE 4: Patterning Components in Assembly Mode .............................................6-22
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 6-25
Local Groups and User-Defined Features 7-1

LOCAL GROUPS.............................................................................................................. 7-2
Manipulating Groups..........................................................................................................7-2
USER-DEFINED FEATURES .......................................................................................... 7-5
Creating UDFs....................................................................................................................7-5
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 7-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating Local Groups .............................................................................7-10
EXERCISE 2: Using Group Options................................................................................7-13
EXERCISE 3: Creating UDFs..........................................................................................7-23
EXERCISE 4: Placing UDFs ...........................................................................................7-26
OPTIONAL EXCERCISE ............................................................................................... 7-30
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Adding the Splined UDF to the Hub ..................................7-30
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 7-34
Advanced Assembly Tools 8-1

MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES............................................................................................ 8-2
Modifying Subassemblies ..................................................................................................8-2
Repositioning Components ................................................................................................8-3
Replacing Components.......................................................................................................8-4
Repeating Component Placement.......................................................................................8-7
Creating Exploded Views...................................................................................................8-7
EXERCISE 1: Restructuring the Carburetor ....................................................................8-10
EXERCISE 2: Replacing the Brake Hub Assembly Components....................................8-16
EXERCISE 3: Repeating Components.............................................................................8-23
OPTIONAL EXERCISE.................................................................................................. 8-27
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Exploded Views and Dynamic Repositioning ......8-27
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-38
Simplified Representations & Shrinkwrap 9-1

SIMPLIFIED REPRESENTATIONS................................................................................ 9-2
Simplified Representation Types........................................................................................9-2
CREATING SIMPLIFIED REPS ...................................................................................... 9-5

Creating Customized Representations ............................................................................... 9-5
Specifying the Default Rule ............................................................................................... 9-5
Defining Action for Components....................................................................................... 9-6
Selecting Components........................................................................................................ 9-6
Creating Rules.................................................................................................................... 9-7
Selection Rules................................................................................................................... 9-8
SUBSTITUTING COMPONENTS....................................................................................9-9
Selecting Components for Substitution.............................................................................. 9-9
Substitution using Envelopes ............................................................................................. 9-9
Envelope Methods............................................................................................................ 9-10
Other Substitution Options............................................................................................... 9-13
SHRINKWRAP ................................................................................................................9-16
Shrinkwrap Capabilities................................................................................................... 9-16
SHRINKWRAP TYPES...................................................................................................9-17
Exported Shrinkwrap Models .......................................................................................... 9-17
Associative Shrinkwrap Features..................................................................................... 9-22
EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Simplified Reps ........................................................ 9-24
EXERCISE 2: Using Shrinkwrap and Substitution in Simplified Reps........................... 9-33
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Level Simplified Reps................................... 9-41
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................9-46
Top-Down Design and Layouts 10-1

DEFINING TOP-DOWN DESIGN TECHNIQUES........................................................10-2
Identifying Design Intent ................................................................................................. 10-2
Using Assembly Structures .............................................................................................. 10-2
Using Assembly Skeletons............................................................................................... 10-5
Copying Reference Geometry between Models............................................................... 10-5
USING PRO/ENGINEER LAYOUT ...............................................................................10-6
Capturing the Design Process .......................................................................................... 10-7
Creating Engineering Notebooks ..................................................................................... 10-7
Sketching Designs............................................................................................................ 10-7
Controlling Designs with Global Information.................................................................. 10-8
Linking Parts to Layouts ................................................................................................ 10-11
Using Global Dimensions .............................................................................................. 10-11
Capturing Design Intent ................................................................................................. 10-12
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................10-13
EXERCISE 1: Using Layouts ........................................................................................ 10-13
EXERCISE 2: Developing Layouts ............................................................................... 10-18

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 10-30
Designing with Skeletons 11-1

USING SKELETON PARTS........................................................................................... 11-2
Creating the Skeleton .......................................................................................................11-4
Relating Assembly Components to Skeletons ..................................................................11-4
Using Skeleton Geometry for Modeling...........................................................................11-5
EXERCISE 1: Building the Motor Skeleton ....................................................................11-8
EXERCISE 2: Creating the Crank Model ......................................................................11-14
EXERCISE 3: Using the Skeleton to Complete the Assembly ......................................11-20
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 11-23
Skeletons with Mapped Geometry 12-1

USING SKELETONS WITH MAPPED GEOMETRY .................................................. 12-2
Constructing Mapped Skeletons.......................................................................................12-2
Using Model Geometry ....................................................................................................12-3
Using the Mapped Skeleton at the Subassembly Level ....................................................12-5
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Map Skeleton ..........................................................................12-6
EXERCISE 2: Mapping the Exhaust..............................................................................12-11
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 12-15
Managing References 13-1

DEFINING THE PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIP................................................... 13-2
Benefits of Designing with External References..............................................................13-2
Creating Dependencies.....................................................................................................13-2
INTERROGATING EXISTING OBJECTS .................................................................... 13-4
Info Pull-Down Menu.......................................................................................................13-4
Model Tree Tool...............................................................................................................13-4
Global Reference Viewer .................................................................................................13-5
CONTROLLING INTERDEPENDENCIES ................................................................... 13-6
Setting Object-Specific Reference Control ......................................................................13-6
Reference Control Settings...............................................................................................13-7
EXERCISE 1: Modifying the Piston ................................................................................13-9
EXERCISE 2: Breaking External References ................................................................13-14
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Suspension Assembly .................................................13-20
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-23

Project Part 1: Design Intent 14-1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS .....................................................14-2
Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 14-2
Design Requirements ....................................................................................................... 14-5
EXERCISE 1: Capturing Initial Design Intent................................................................. 14-6
EXERCISE 2: Developing Initial Product Structure ..................................................... 14-12
Project Part II: Skeleton Design 15-1

EXERCISE 1: Creating the Basic Skeleton ..................................................................... 15-2
EXERCISE 2: Creating Skeleton Features for Motion .................................................... 15-6
EXERCISE 3: Creating Skeleton Features for Space Claims ........................................ 15-13
EXERCISE 4: Creating Skeleton Features for Interfaces .............................................. 15-17
Project Part III: Creating Components 16-1

EXERCISE 1: Communicating Layout Information to the Skeleton............................... 16-2
EXERCISE 2: Creating Features in the Main Base Part.................................................. 16-3
EXERCISE 3: Creating Features in the Support_Arm Part ............................................. 16-8
EXERCISE 4: Creating Features in the Link Part ......................................................... 16-12
EXERCISE 5: Creating Features in the Drive_Arm Part............................................... 16-15
Project Part IV: Completing the Assembly 17-1

EXERCISE 1: Creating Features in the Housing_Rear Part ............................................ 17-2
EXERCISE 2: Completing the Assembly Population...................................................... 17-5
OPTIONAL EXERCISES ..............................................................................................17-10
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Blades ...................................................... 17-10
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Using Behavioral Modeling .............................................. 17-14
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating a Pedestal Part .................................................... 17-17
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: Finishing a Model ............................................................. 17-18
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 5: Creating Exploded States .................................................. 17-20
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 6: Testing Size Requirements................................................ 17-21
Resolving Failures 18-1

DEFINING REGENERATION FAILURE......................................................................18-2
USING THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................18-2
Examples of Regeneration Problems ............................................................................... 18-4
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failures ................................................................................... 18-8
EXERCISE 2: Resolving Assembly Failures................................................................. 18-16

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-22
Pro/PROGRAM 19-1
USING PRO/PROGRAM ................................................................................................ 19-2
Defining the Program Structure........................................................................................19-2
Automating the Part Design Process ................................................................................19-2
Automating the Assembly Design Process.......................................................................19-6
Incorporating Changes into the Program..........................................................................19-8
Running the Program........................................................................................................19-9
Editing the Program..........................................................................................................19-9
Manipulating Features Using Pro/PROGRAM ..............................................................19-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 19-11
EXERCISE 1: Automating Part Design .........................................................................19-11
OPTIONAL EXERCISE................................................................................................ 19-20
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Automating Assembly Design...........................................19-20
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-26
Mechanism & Design Animation 20-1

DEFINING MECHANISM ANIMATION...................................................................... 20-2
CREATING MECHANISM ASSEMBLIES................................................................... 20-3
Comparing Connections to Constraints ............................................................................20-3
Selecting a Connection Type............................................................................................20-3
SIMULATING MOTION ................................................................................................ 20-4
Dragging Assembly Components.....................................................................................20-4
Drivers and Motion...........................................................................................................20-4
Selecting a Driver .............................................................................................................20-5
IMPLEMENTING MECHANISM .................................................................................. 20-6
Mechanism Design without Cam and Slot Connections...................................................20-6
Mechanism Design with Cam and Slot Connections........................................................20-8
DEFINING DESIGN ANIMATION ............................................................................... 20-9
DESIGN ANIMATION CAPABILITIES ..................................................................... 20-10
Integrated and associative...............................................................................................20-10
Key frame sequences......................................................................................................20-10
Animation Tools.............................................................................................................20-11
Animation Manager........................................................................................................20-12
Mechanism Re-use .........................................................................................................20-12
LABORATORY EXERCISES ...................................................................................... 20-13
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Basic Mechanism ..................................................................20-14
OPTIONAL EXERCISES.............................................................................................. 20-22
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Fan Mechanism........................................20-22
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating an Animation ...................................................... 20-26
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................20-43
Creating Photorealistic Images 21-1

CREATING PHOTOREALISTIC IMAGES ...................................................................21-2
PhotoRender Interface...................................................................................................... 21-2
SETTING UP A SCENE ..................................................................................................21-2
Setting up Views and Room............................................................................................. 21-3
Defining and Setting Appearances................................................................................... 21-5
Setting up Lights .............................................................................................................. 21-6
RENDERING A SCENE..................................................................................................21-7
EXERCISE 1: Using PhotoRender ................................................................................ 21-10
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................21-17
Using PTC Help A-1

PTC HELP OVERVIEW...................................................................................................A-2
PTC Help Features ............................................................................................................ A-2
USING PRO/ENGINEER HELP ......................................................................................A-2
Launching Help: Four Methods ........................................................................................ A-2
There are four procedures for launching the help system. ................................................ A-2
PTC HELP MODULES.....................................................................................................A-7
PTC Global Services: Technical Support B-1

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE...................................................B-2
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS ..................................................................B-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail.................................................................... B-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone.............................................................. B-3
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web ................................................................. B-3
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support.................................................................. B-3
Routing Your Technical Support Calls ............................................................................. B-4
Technical Support Call Priorities ...................................................................................... B-5
Software Performance Report Priorities ........................................................................... B-5
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT.....................................................................B-5
ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................B-6
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ...................................................B-6
Terminology used by Technical Support .......................................................................... B-7
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION ....................................................................B-8
CONTACT INFORMATION............................................................................................B-9

PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services................................................... B-9
Telephone ........................................................................................................................ B-10
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ B-14
Using the Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator C-1

TECHNOLOGY-BASED LEARNING @ PTC............................................................... C-2
PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR ...................................................................................... C-2
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA .............................................................................................. C-3
EXERCISE 1: Completing Evaluator Assessments .......................................................... C-4
MODULE SUMMARY .................................................................................................... C-7
INDEX……………………………………………………………………………………I-1

Module
Advanced Sketching and Geometry

In this module you learn how to create and modify advanced
geometric entities.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create ellipses, conics, axis points, and fillets.

• Sketch and dimension splines.
• Modify splines, while defining tangency conditions.
• Use the Replace and Text options.

Page 1-1
NOTES
DEFINING ADVANCED GEOMETRY SKETCHING

For most common sketching purposes, simple sketched entities such as
arcs, lines, and circles are sufficient. To create complex shapes, you need
advanced geometry sketching options.
Advanced sketching options include:
• Axes that are normal to the sketching plane through a particular point
• Conics for constructing elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic sections
• Elliptic fillets (a fillet between two sketched entities)
• Splines
Creating an Axis Normal to the Sketching Plane

Using the Axis Point option, you can create an axis that is normal to the
sketching plane through a particular point. This type of axis is not a datum
axis feature; it is an axis within the sketched feature. It is similar to the
type of axis that the system creates automatically when you extrude
cylinders.
Sketching Conic Entities

Using the Conic option, you can create conic sketched entities to construct
elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic sections. To construct a conic, select
one endpoint, select another endpoint, and then select a third intermediate
point, as you would do to construct a 3-point arc.
Entering Parameter Values

To define the shape of a conic, you can specify a value for the parameter
“Rho,” which is the ratio of BE/DE, where segments AE = EC, as shown
in the following figure.

Pag e 1- 2 Fundament als of Des ign
NOTES
A E C
Figure 1: Definition of RHO
You can use values for the conic parameter between .05 and .95. The
following values have specific significance.
• .05 to <.5:Elliptical round

• ¥1RUPDOTXDGUDQWHOOLSWLFDOURXQG
• .5: Parabolic round
• >.5 to .95: Hyperbolic round
Constraining Conic Sections

To constrain the conic section, you can use the following three constraints:
• The positions of the two endpoints determined by dimensions or

assumptions of coincidence with adjacent entity vertices.
• A rho parameter—created in the same manner as a radius dimension.
• The slope of the conic at each endpoint, determined by angular
dimensions or assumptions of tangency to adjacent entities or
centerlines.

Adva nced Sket ching and G eom et ry Pag e 1- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Using a Rho Value
Using Sketcher Points

You can constrain a conic by locating two endpoints and providing a third,
intermediate known point through which the conic must pass. The known
point can be, for example, a sketched point, datum point, or part vertex.
Pro/ENGINEER internally defines the value of “rho.”
The following figure illustrates the required dimensioning scheme.
Figure 3: Using a Sketcher Point

NOTES
Creating Elliptical Fillets

Using the Elliptic Fillet option, you can sketch a fillet between two
sketched entities. You use the same method that you would used to create
a radius fillet. You must locate the endpoints of the elliptic section by
using linear dimensions or x and y radius values.
Figure 4: Dimensioning Schemes of Elliptic Fillets

NOTES
Creating Splines
Splines are curves that pass smoothly through any number of intermediate
points. You can create them by using the Spline option.
To control the shape of the spline, you can dimension any of the internal
points, as well as the tangency angle and radius of curvature at the spline
ends.
Sketching Splines
To create a spline, you can:
• Sketch points.
• Select existing Sketcher points.
• Select a chain of previously sketched entities.
Using Control Polygons

You can also use the Control Poly option to generate a control polygon,
as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5: Spline with Control Polygon

NOTES
Note:
When you use Select Points to create a spline by selecting
existing Sketcher points, there is no further link between the
points and the spline.
If you do not delete the sketched or imported points at the

system prompt, then you must dimension the individual
Sketcher points.
Modifying Splines
The modification options available for sketched splines are different from
the options available for other sketched features. You can drag the
sketcher points; or you can modify the internal control polygon.
Figure 6: Modify Spline Dialog Box
Replacing Sketched Entities

If you attempt to delete a sketched entity with child references when
redefining a sketched feature, a warning message displays cautioning
against the deletion of a parent entity.
Alternatively, to avoid feature failure, the geometry can be replaced by a

newly sketched entity.

NOTES
When an entity is redefined, one part of it retains the old entity identifier,
and the other part gets a new identifier. To retain the children, you can use
this new entity to replace the old one.
Replacing Dimensions
Dimensions to the old entity can usually de deleted without consequence.
However, you can also replace a dimension.
When you delete a dimension and create a new one to redefine the
dimensioning scheme, the system changes the symbol names (that is, SD#
in Sketcher mode and D# in PART mode).
Note:
To determine the dimension of an existing feature, you can
create a Known dimension in Sketcher. The system assigns it
a symbolic name in the form KD#. You can use it to create
section relations, but keep in mind that a known dimension
creates a parent/child relationship to the geometry that you
select to create it.
Inserting and Modifying Sketcher Text

You can use the TEXT dialog box to insert text onto sketched entities, and
to modify text styles as well.
Figure 7: Text Dialog Box

NOTES
The TEXT dialog box has the following fields:
• Font – The standard fonts are cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d,
isofont, leroy, and norm_font.
Note:
To make additional, third-party fonts available for selection,
set the pro_font_dir configuration option by specifying the full
path to the font directory.
• Aspect Ratio – Enter the new aspect ratio factor or use the slider to
modify the value.
• Slant Angle – This option affects how the text is slanted with respect
to the sides of the rectangle that contains it.
• Place Along Curve – Select the check box to add or remove text from
a curve. Use the Flip option to determine the orientation of the text
along a curve.

NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
In this laboratory you learn additional methods for creating sketched
entities.
Method
In Exercise 1, you work with splines to create a model using various
sketching tools.
In Exercise 2, you work with elliptic fillets and sketched text. You also
replace sketched entities.
In Exercise 3, you demonstrate the procedure for creating and

dimensioning a conic by saving the conic as a section and then creating
solid geometry from the section.
Tools
Table 1: Advanced Sketching Icons
Icons Description
Create a spline curve through several points
Create reference coordinate system
Insert collinear constraint

Insert constraints
Sketch datum curve
Toggle datum plane
Toggle dimensions
Dynamic trim
Make two entities tangent
Select primary items
Sketch circular fillet

Sketch elliptical fillet

NOTES
Icons Description
Toggle datum axes
Select geometry
Sketch a conic
Sketch text
Sketch ellipse
Divide section
Symmetry constraint
Mirror geometry
EXERCISE 1: Working with Splines

Task 1. Sketch a spline.
1. Set your working directory to the folder that corresponds to the

name of the current module.
2. Create a new part called SPLINE using the default template.
3. Select the FRONT Datum. Click [Insert sketched datum curve].
4. Close the REFERENCES dialog box. Toggle off .
5. Sketch two circles and a rectangle, as shown in the following

figure.

NOTES
Figure 8: Sketching Two Circles and a Rectangle
6. Click [Toggle dimensions].
7. Click [Dynamic trim] and trim all but the following:
Figure 9: Trimming Geometric Entities
8. Click to sketch the spline. Select the points shown in the

previous figure.
9. Constrain the left side tangent using [Tangential constraint].

NOTES
Figure 10: Adding Constraints
10. Select the spline. Click > Modify .
11. Click Add . Select a few points on the spline.
12. Click Move . Move the points around approximately, as shown in

the following figure.
Figure 11: Moving Sketch Points
13. Click Create Control Poly .
Note:
This polygon or the original spline points could be
dimensioned.

NOTES
14. Click Delete Control Poly .
15. Click Display Curvature . Move few points to see the effect on
curvature.
Figure 12: Moving Points
16. Clear Display Curvature . Click from the MOD SPLINE dialog
box.
17. Click to display dimensions. Complete the dimension scheme

as shown in the following figure.
Note:
Not all spline points need to be dimensioned.

NOTES
Figure 13: Displaying Dimensions
Task 2. Create a tangency angle dimension on the right tip of the spline.
1. Click . Select the spline, the vertical line and then select the
right tip of the spline.
2. Click to place the angle dimension.
3. Select the angle dimension. Click . Increase the sensitivity

slider to ¾. Use the wheel button to dynamically modify the angle.
4. Type [180] for the angle. Click .
5. Sketch a vertical centerline, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 14: Sketching a Vertical Centerline
6. Click to complete the feature.
7. Click [Select primary items]. Select the datum curve.
8. Click Insert > Protrusion > Revolve .
9. Drag the curve to desired angle. Click on the background to

regenerate.
10. Optional: Shell the model and color the inside surfaces as shown in
Figure 15: Final Model
11. Save the model and close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Advanced Sketch and Text

Functionality
Task 1. Create a new part called ADV_SKETCH.PRT using the default
template.
1. Select the TOP datum plane.
2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude .
3. Sketch as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16: Sketching Straight Lines
4. Add circular and elliptic fillets as shown in the following figure

using and respectively.

NOTES
Figure 17: Adding Fillets
5. Referring to the following figure, change the dimension scheme for

the elliptic fillet.
6. Click . Select the elliptic fillet. Click . In the ELLIPSE

dialog box, click X-Radius , then click Accept . In the RESOLVE
SKETCH dialog box, delete the horizontal 1.50 dimension.
7. Repeat the previous step for the Y-radius. Delete the vertical 1.0
dimension.
Figure 18: Deleting Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions
8. Exit sketcher. Click OK .

NOTES
9. Using Dynamic Modify, drag the depth of the protrusion to be a

value between .75 and 1.0. Click Regenerate .
10. Toggle on . Notice no axes were created.
Task 2. Create axis points.
1. Click [Select primary items]. Select the protrusion just created.
2. Click > Redefine .
3. Redefine the sketch. Insert three axis points using Sketch > Axis
Point as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19: Inserting Three Axis Points
4. Complete the feature. Notice the axes created.
Task 3. Use the replace function.
1. Click [Select geometry].
2. Press <SHIFT>and select the three edges as shown in the following

figure.

NOTES
Figure 20: Selecting Edges to Round
3. Click > Round Edges . Use the Dynamic Modify function to

create a radius between 0.125 and 0.15. Notice the round follows
a tangent chain.
4. Select the protrusion. Click to redefine the sketch.
5. Select the 45° line, and attempt to delete it. Read the warning
message. Click No.
6. Sketch a conic with both ends tangent using .
7. Modify the Rho value to 0.20.
Figure 21: Sketching a Conic

NOTES
Task 4. Replace references used by the 45° line with the conic.
1. Delete the conic’s centerline.
2. Select the conic, then click Edit > Replace .
3. Read the message window. Select the 45° line.
4. Click Yes to delete dimensions associated with the line.
5. Modify dimensions as shown in the following figure and complete

the feature.
Figure 22: Dimensioning
Task 5. Create sketched text.
1. Return the model to the default view and click . Select the top
surface.
2. Click to begin a sketched datum curve
3. Click and sketch a spline as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 23: Sketching a Spline
4. Exit sketcher and complete the spline datum curve.
5. Begin the creation of another curve as before.
6. Click [Sketch text]. Sketch a line using the start of the datum
curve as a reference, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 24: Sketching a Line as Reference
7. Type [ProE] in the TEXT dialog box. Set the font to CG Times.
8. Click Place Along Curve . Select the spline, and flip if necessary.
NOTES
9. Click to exit the TEXT dialog box.
10. Drag the the text definition line to dynamically modify.
Figure 25: Dynamic Modification
11. Complete the text datum curve feature.
12. Click . Select the text datum curve.
13. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude . Drag to approximately

0.25.
14. Regenerate and shade the model.
Figure 26: Extruded and Shaded Model
15. Select the text protrusion. Click > Suppress .
16. Select the text datum curve. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude . Drag to
desired depth.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating the Go Cart Mirror Housing

Task 1. Open the model.
1. Open the MIRROR_MOUNT.PRT.
Figure 27: The Mirror Mount Model
Task 2. Start the definition of the protrusion using a smooth general

blend.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend > General > Done > Smooth
> Done .
2. Select the top surface of the mirror mount base as shown in the
previous figure.
3. Click to accept the default direction. Click Bottom . Select

DTM3.
Task 3. Sketch a coordinate system for the first section.
1. Toggle off .
2. Sketch a coordinate system using at the intersection of the

references.

NOTES
Task 4. Define an ellipse using the default-dimensioning scheme.
1. Use [Ellipse] to sketch an ellipse at the intersection of the

references.
Figure 28: Sketching the Ellipse
2. Modify the dimensions: Ry = 70 and Rx = 50.
Task 5. Divide the ellipse into four sections so that it can blend to the
final section consisting of four conic sections.
1. Click [Divide section] and select the ellipse at the 4

intersections of the references.
2. Add centerlines to the section along DTM1 and DTM3.
3. Click [Symmetry constraint] and assign symmetry about both

centerlines.

NOTES
Figure 29: Creating Centerlines
4. Save this section to be used for the next sub-section. Click File >
Save A Copy . Type [ellipse] and click OK.
5. Click the icon.
6. Type [45] [0] [0] for the rotations of the second section.
Task 6. Create the second section.
1. Click Sketch > Data from File . Select ELLIPSE.SEC from the
dialog box. Click Open.
2. Click and create horizontal and vertical dimensions. If

presented with conflicts, delete the Rx and Ry dimensions.
Re-establish symmetry if necessary.
3. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 30: Horizontal and Vertical Dimensioning
4. Click > Yes to create a third section.
5. Type [45] [0] [0] for the rotations of the third section.
Task 7. Sketch the third section using parabolic conic sections.
1. Define a sketcher coordinate system.
2. Sketch a horizontal and vertical centerline through the coordinate

system.
3. Sketch a [Conic] in the upper left quadrant.
Figure 31: Sketching the Conic

NOTES
4. Delete the angled centerline.
5. Locate the left endpoint relative to the centerline using a diameter

dimension. Click . Select the left most endpoint, the centerline,
and the left most endpoint again, then click to place the
dimension.
6. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure.
Figure 32: Modifying Dimensions
7. Select the conic section. Click [Mirror geometry]. Select the

vertical centerline.
8. Repeat to mirror the two conic sections about the horizontal

centerline.
9. Complete the sketch, as shown in the following figure. Remove the

symmetric constraint about the horizontal centerline and add
tangency constraints.

NOTES
Figure 33: Completing and Constraining Sketch
10. Select the right-most vertex between the upper and lower conics.
Click > Start Point .
11. Click . Click No when prompted, if you wish to continue to the

next section.
12. Type a depth of [100] for the second section.
13. Type a depth of [200] for the third section.
14. Preview and shade the model.
Tips and Techniques:

You have the ability to define tangency conditions at the first
and last section of the general blend.
15. Define the first section of the general blend to be tangent to the
base of the mirror mount. Double-click the Tangency element.
16. Click Yes when prompted to define tangency for the first end.

NOTES
17. Select the top surface for all four references to be tangent to as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 34: Selecting References
18. Do not define tangency for the second end. When prompted,
select No .
19. Build the feature. Click OK to create the feature.
Figure 35: The Completed Model
21. Erase all the objects from memory. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed . Click OK .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
The following exercise provides supplementary tools and techniques
related to this module’s goal.
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Importing External Spline

Data
Task 1. Create a spline and use it to create a blended wing section.
1. Click File > New > Sketch . Type [WING] for the name.
2. Sketch a horizontal and a vertical centerline.
Task 2. Sketch a spline.
1. Click [Create spline through several points].
2. Sketch a spline with three points, and click to complete the

spline.
3. Dimension as shown in the following figure.
Figure 36: Sketching a 3-Point Spline

NOTES
Task 3. Read in external data to drive the shape of the spline by

dimensioning the section to a local coordinate system.
1. Click [Create coordinate system]. Place the coordinate system

at the intersection of the two centerlines.
2. Select the spline, then click > Modify .
3. In the MOD SPLINE dialog box click the Coordinates tab. Select
the coordinate system that you defined, then click Read . Select
WING.PTS. Click Open .
4. Read the prompt. Click Yes to insert points on the spline.
5. Define the bottom of the foil section. Sketch a horizontal line from
left to right that is coincident with the endpoints of the wing
section.
Figure 37: Horizontal Line Coincident with Wing Endpoints
6. Save the section, then click from the Intent Manager.
Task 4. Create a protrusion using the section that you just created.
1. Create a new part called WING.PRT.
2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend > General > Done > Smooth
> Done .
3. Specify FRONT as the sketching plane. Click to accept the

default direction. Select TOP as the top reference. Close the
REFERENCES dialog box.
4. Click Sketch > Data from File . Select WING.SEC from the dialog
box. Click Open .

NOTES
5. Click . Drag the section approximately to the intersection of the

datum planes.
6. Type [20.0] as the scaling factor, then click .
7. Cancel the DATUM display, and zoom in on the section. Click

> to align each centerline with the corresponding reference
line.
Figure 38: Aligning the Section
8. Click to toggle to the next section.
9. Type [0.0], [0.0], [5.0] as the X,Y,Z rotations.
Task 5. Begin sketching the next section in the new sketcher that
appears.
1. Using Data from File , get WING.SEC.
2. Modify the section length to [15.0].
Figure 39: Placing the Section
3. Click to toggle to the next section. When the system asks you
if you want to proceed to the next section, click NO.

NOTES
4. Type [18.0] as the depth of the section. The resulting wing should
resemble the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 40: Resulting Wing
5. Select the protrusion. Click > Modify > All . Modify all three
angle values to 15° and regenerate the model.
7. Erase all the objects from memory. Click File > Erase > Not
Displayed . Click OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you learned how to:
• Manipulate entities within the new sketcher environment.

• Define and modify splines and read in point data from an external file.
• Create and save sections in sketcher to be used at a later date.
• Create ellipses and define different dimension schemes based on
design intent.
• Create a conic section when the section is not a simple ellipse.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Module
Drafts and Rounds

In this module you learn how use drafts and rounds to finish your
part designs. You also learn to create transitions between round sets
for more complex geometry.
Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
• Prepare models for casting or molding by adding draft features.

• Add advanced drafts to your models.
• Create rounds with single and multiple references.
• Create edge-to-surface and surface-to-surface rounds.
• Create intent-chain rounds.
Page 2-1
NOTES
CREATING DRAFTS
The Draft feature adds a draft angle to individual surfaces or to a series of
selected planar, cylindrical or other ruled surfaces. You can create a draft
feature to add an angle (+/- 30 degrees) to existing surfaces of a molded or
cast part. A draft can add and remove material from the model.
Figure 1: Draft for Molding
Guidelines for Using Drafts

Consider the following when creating drafts:
• You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylinders
or planes.
• The draft direction must be normal to the neutral plane if a draft
surface is cylindrical.
• You cannot draft surfaces with fillets around the edge boundary.
However, you can draft the surfaces first and then fillet the edges.
• To incorporate a draft into a model that has rounds, you should add the
draft before rounding the edges.
• When you add a draft to a shelled part before adding the shell feature,
the system will maintain a constant wall thickness.

NOTES
Defining a Draft Feature

The following figure illustrates the process of defining a draft feature on a
model. You can apply a draft feature to a planar, cylindrical, and splined
surface.
Neutral Plane
remains
constant size
Draft
Surface +10°
-10°
Neutral Plane remains

constant size
Figure 2: Draft Definitions

D rafts and Ro u nds Pag e 2- 3
NOTES
Draft Types
The following figure illustrates all the variations of the draft feature
available in Pro/ENGINEER.
Figure 3: Variations of the Draft Feature
Creating Neutral Plane Drafts

To create a neutral plane draft, you can select whether or not to split the
surfaces at a plane or sketch.
If the parting line for the mold is located in the middle of the draft surface,
you can split the surfaces, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Split at Plane
Sketch
No Split
Split at Sketch
Figure 4: Neutral Plane Drafts
Creating Neutral Curve Drafts

Use a neutral curve draft when the perimeter that has to remain fixed and
it is not planar.
To create a neutral curve draft, you can select whether or not to split the
surfaces at a curve or surface. If the parting line for the mold is located in
the middle of the draft surface, you can split the surfaces.
Neutral curve
Figure 5: No Split Neutral Curve Draft

NOTES
Split surface
Neutral
curves
Figure 6: Split at Surface Draft
Neutral and split curve

(mid-plane remains
constant size)
Figure 7: Split at Curve Draft
CREATING ROUNDS
A Round is a Pro/ENGINEER feature that can add or remove material
from a model. The geometry must be tangent to adjacent geometry at all
points along the round’s edge.
Defining Simple Rounds

Simple rounds are composed of a single set of references, whereas
advanced rounds can contain multiple sets of references along with
various transition options where the sets merge together.

NOTES
Round Set 1
Transition
Round Set 2
Simple Round Advanced Round
Figure 8: Simple versus Advanced Rounds
To define a simple round, you can use various methods. Regardless of the
method that you select, you must define elements to determine the shape,
radius, and location of the feature.
Selecting Round Feature References

You should select references for round features carefully for two reasons:
• If you remove a single reference for the round, the system must
resolve the entire round feature.
• The type of reference that you select influences the round shape and
extent. You should experiment with these selection options to fully
develop the round geometry:
One-by-one Tangent Chain Surface Chain
Edge-Surf Surf-Surf Full Round
Figure 9: Selecting Surfaces Rounds

NOTES
When you select surfaces for round set geometry, Pro/ENGINEER tries to
define the round set tangent to the selected surface. If adjacent surfaces are
tangent to the selected surface or surfaces, the system automatically tries
to continue the round geometry along these tangent surfaces. However,
you can prevent the round from continuing onto adjacent surfaces.
Setting Round Extents

In some cases, you may want to continue the round feature or stop it at
some point along the selected references that the system develops
automatically.
Note:
The additional selected references create parent/child
references in the round feature.
Terminating
Surface
Auto Blend
Auto
Figure 10: Round Extent Options
Defining Radius Values

After you define the references, you must specify the round radius.
• Constant radius
• Variable radius
• Through a curve
• Full round
NOTES
Figure 11: Constant and Variable Radius Options
Using Points or Vertexes

You can select a datum point, vertex, curve, or edge end through which
the round should pass. The selected entity must be on an adjacent surface
to the geometry. The system does not assign a radius dimension to the
round. The radius is a direct result of the position of the other geometry.
Note:
Using a point or vertex to define the round size creates a
parent/child relationship between the round feature and the
selected point.
Creating Advanced Rounds

Advanced rounds give you more flexibility in creating robust geometry.
One of the major advantages of the advanced round feature is that it gives
you the ability to create transitions between round sets. A round set is a set
of references with attributes and radius values, created with the same
options and attributes as a simple round. Using round sets, you can
combine surface-to-surface rounds with edge rounds or define rounds that
have multiple radii.
Using Transitions
By creating transitions between round sets, you can use a greater variety
of geometry shapes at the intersection of round sets without compromising
the flexibility of the model. The transition element also enables you to
specify how Pro/ENGINEER should handle the intersection of round sets
with model geometry.

NOTES
Figure 12: Blend Surfs and Continue Transitions
Setting the Default Transition
You can set up a transition between round sets to customize the shape of
the round geometry in the following ways:
Corner Sphere Corner Sweep Corner Patch
Figure 13: Corner Transitions
Creating Round Sets

You can create a round set by making a rolling ball or a round surface
normal to a spine.
• The rolling ball shape looks as if you rolled a ball between the two
references.
• The normal-to-spine shape looks as if you created the round surface by
sweeping an arc normal to the selected spine.
Setting Round Shape Cross-Sections

By default, the system creates a circular cross-section of the round defined
with a true radius, but you can drive the cross-section to use a conic
section. A round with a conic section uses two values to drive its shape: a
radius value and a conic parameter (rho) value.

NOTES
• The radius value determines the point of tangency on the model. The
value of Rho determines the shape of the conic itself as seen in the
following figure. Rho is the ratio of BE/DE where segments AE = EC.
You can use values of the conic parameter between .95 and .05. Some
of these values have specific significance:
½ .05 to <.5: elliptical round
½ √2 –1: normal quadrant elliptical round
½ .5: parabolic round
½ > .5 to .95: hyperbolic round
• Using a [true ellipse] value for the conic parameter creates a circular
shape on the round feature.
Figure 14: “Rho”
Figure 15: Round Shape

NOTES
DEVELOPING GEOMETRY WITH ROUNDS

As you create simple or advanced rounds, you can use surface techniques
to develop specific geometry. Instead of creating the round geometry
using surface features entirely, you can actually use a round feature to
generate surfaces. When you create a round, you must choose one of these
options:
Make Solid Make Surface
Figure 16: Developing Needed Geometry
Tips for Creating Rounds

If you are having difficulty creating a particular round feature, you should
break it up into separate round features, or change to an advanced round
and add a transition. If those methods do not resolve the problem, try any
of the following:
• Type a different radius.

• Use a different round option (Surf-Surf , Edge-Surf , etc).
• Create the round as a surface. Using surfacing techniques, you can fix
the problem areas manually.
• Create swept or extruded protrusions, cuts, etc.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory, you learn how to apply draft and round features as
finishing features.
Method
In Exercises 1,you learn how to insert neutral plane drafts.
In Exercise 2, you learn advanced round techniques.
In Exercise 3, you experiment with various intent chain rounds.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Advanced Geometry Creation
Icons Description
Saved view list
Use edge
EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Plane Drafts

Task 1. Open a sample model and insert a simple draft.

2. Open DRAFT_PLANE.PRT, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17: Draft Plane Part

NOTES
3. Click Insert > Draft .
4. Click to accept the default selection Neutral Pln .
5. Click once again to accept Tweak , No Split , Constant .
6. Select the two surfaces, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18: Selecting Draft Surfaces
7. Click > , and select the surface as the neutral plane, as

shown in the following figure .
Figure 19: Selecting Neutral Plane
8. Click Use Neut Pln to automatically use the neutral plane as the
reference plane.

NOTES
9. Observe the direction of the circular arrow. Type [- 10] as the draft
angle.
10. Click Preview , and notice that the base of the cylinder increased in
size.
11. Click to complete the draft.
Figure 20: Completed Neutral Draft Feature
Task 2. Create another draft with variable angles.
1. Click Insert > Draft > .
2. Click Variable > Done .
3. Click Intent Surfs and select the surface shown in the following
figure. The system automatically selects all side edges of the
protrusion.

NOTES
Figure 21: Selecting Intent Surface
4. Click , and select the datum TOP from the Model Tree as the
neutral plane.
5. Select the surface as the reference plane, as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 22: Selecting a Reference Plane
6. Click > , and type [+ 10] as the draft angles of for the left
side and [- 10] for the right side.
7. Click to complete the feature.

NOTES
Figure 23: Completed Model with Variable Angles
8. Switch to a front view of the model. Notice how material was

removed from the top of the part and added to the bottom. The
‘waistline’ remained neutral.
9. Modify the two right-side angles to [- 20] and regenerate.
Figure 24: Regenerated Model with Variable Angles

NOTES
Task 3. Create a draft using split at plane.
2. Click Split at Pln > .
3. Click Intent Surfs and select the surface shown in the following
figure.
Figure 25: Selecting an Intent Surface
4. Click , and select the datum Top from the Model Tree as the
neutral plane.
5. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the reference

plane.
Figure 26: Selecting a Reference Plane

NOTES
6. Type [+ 13] as the draft angle and click to complete the

feature.
Figure 27: Completing the Draft Feature
Task 4. Investigate the robustness of the intent chain based draft.
1. Select HEX from the Model Tree and > Redefine .
2. Enter the sketch and delete the six lines, leaving the construction
circle.
3. Sketch a spline similar to the one in the following figure.
Figure 28: Sketching a Spline
4. Complete the redefinition and observe how the draft adapts to the
new geometry.
NOTES
Figure 29: Redefined Draft Feature

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Rounds

Task 1. Use the round functionality.
1. Open the MULTI_ROUND.PRT
Figure 30: Multi-Round Part
2. Orient to a saved view. Click > Quick _Round .
3. Insert a full round. Click Insert > Round > Simple . Use the
attributes for Full Round > Edge Pair .
4. Select the edges shown in the following figure. Click OK .

NOTES
Figure 31: Selecting Edges
5. Click to select the edge, as shown in the following figure.
Click > Round Edges .
Figure 32: Selecting Edge to Round
6. Drag the radius to a reasonable value, and on the background.

NOTES
Figure 33: Dragging Radius
Hint:
The round may be dynamically edited whenever needed by
using > Dynamic Modify .
Task 2. Experiment with round transitions.
1. Orient to a saved view. Click > Mult_Trans.
Figure 34: Multiple Transitions

NOTES
2. Insert an advanced round. Click Insert > Round > Advanced

>Done .
3. Define the first round set’s attributes. Click Variable > Edge
Chain > Done and select the tangent chain, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 35: Defining First Round Set Attributes
4. Click Done > Done . Type [0.0] and [2.50] as the radius values.
5. Click OK > Add to begin the definition of round set 2.
6. Click Constant > Edge Chain > Done . Select the edge shown in
the following figure and click Done .
Figure 36: Selecting Edge
7. Type [1. 50] as the radius. Click OK > Done sets to complete
Round Set 2.

NOTES
8. Click Transitions > Define > Add by Select , select the left green
edge of Round Set 2, and > .
9. Click Stop at Pnt > Done and select the datum point named
STOP . Click > .
Figure 37: Clicking Datum Point Stop
10. Begin definition of round set 3. Click Round Sets > Define >
Add .
11. Click Constant > Edge ChainDone > Tangent Chain and select
the edge shown in the following figure.
Figure 38: Setting Edge Attributes
12. Type [1.50] as the radius and click OK > Done Sets .
13. Click Transitions > Define > Add By Select . Select the three
edges (green), as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 39: Selecting Edges for Transitions
14. Click and drag over the menu options for Intersect , Corner
Sphere , Corner Sweep , and Patch .
15. Click Corner Sphere > > Done Trans > Preview .
16. Alternate between and . The corner sphere is shown in

Figure 40: Solid Model

NOTES
Figure 41: Wireframe Display
17. Click Transitions > Define > Transition 2. Select Corner Sweep
transition type and complete the round feature. The Corner Sweep
is shown in the following figure.
Figure 42: Corner Sweep
Figure 43: Wireframe Display

NOTES
18. Repeat the redefine process for the other two transition types.
Task 3. Utilize the other round transition types.
1. Click to orient to the saved view Blend_Cont
2. Insert a round using Advanced, Constant and Surf-Surf . Select

the two surfaces shown in the following figure.
Figure 44: Selecting Surfaces
3. Type [5. 25] as the radius and click .
4. Click OK > Done Sets . Notice the round does fit all the way
around.
Tip:
Use the CNTR datum point to reposition your spin center for
easier manipulation.
5. Complete Round Set 1, click Transitions > Define > Add by

Select and select the two edges (green), as shown in the following
figure and .

NOTES
6. Click Blend Surfs and > > > Preview .
7. Shade and spin to observe the transition. Do not click OK .
8. The round looks smooth and continuous to the eye, however, a

curvature plot will show otherwise.
9. Click Analysis > Surface Analysis . Select all round surface
patches and . Notice the curvature plot is discontinuous.

NOTES
Figure 46: Curvature Plot Shows Discontinuities
10. Close the SURFACE ANALYSIS dialog box.
11. Redefine the transition. Click Transitions > Define > Redfine >
Transitions 1 > Continue > Done > Done Trans.
12. Rerun the Surface Analysis , and notice that the curvature is
continuous.
Figure 47: Continuous Curvature

NOTES
13. To complete the feature, click OK .
Task 4. Insert a round through a datum curve
1. Click to orient to the saved view Thru_Curve .
2. Click Insert > Round Simple > Done > Thru Curve > Edge Chain>
Tangent chain , select the edge shown in the following figure.
Figure 48: Selecting Tangent Chain
3. Click Done Sel > Done .
4. Use Curve Chain and Select All to select the entire datum curve.
5. To complete the feature, click Done > OK .
6. Click the Rnd_Curve from the Model Tree, and click > Hide .
Notice how the round follows the curve contour.
Figure 49: Round Follows Curve Contour
7. Optional: Modify the sketch of the Spline (within reason) and

Regenerate the round.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Intent Chains

Task 1. Experiment with Intent Chains
1. Click > Intent Chain .
2. Click Insert > Round > > > Intent Chain , and Query
Select on the vertex shown in the following figure.
Figure 50: Selecting a Vertex
3. There should be three possible options for feature 51 (the barbell

shaped protrusion) as seen in the message window:
½ Intent Chain (F51 X PART)
½ Intent Chain (SIDE SRFS F51 X START SRFS F37)
½ Intent Chain (SIDE EDGES) created by feature 51
4. Accept the third option listed, click Done , type a radius of [1.0],
and click OK .
Task 2. Completely redefine the sketch and observe the impact on the
round.
1. In Model Tree, select PROT_F51 and redefine the sketch.
2. Delete all sketched entities, leaving the reference intact.

NOTES
3. Sketch a rectangle as shown in the following figure.
Figure 51: Sketching a Rectangle
4. Complete the feature and notice the adaptability of the ‘Side

Edges’ Intent Chain driven round.
Figure 52: Adaptability of Side Edges
5. Redefine PROT_F51 to be Both Sides with a blind depth of [24.0].
6. Reorient to the saved view Intent _Bot . Then click View >
Previous .
7. Select PROT_F51 and > Suppress . Allow its associated round

to also be suppressed.

NOTES
Task 3. Create other Intent Chain round
1. Repeat the above procedure to insert another Intent Chain Round

from PROT_F50 . Query Sel the edge shown in the following
figure and Accept the (F50 X PART) Intent Chain.
Figure 53: Inserting Another Intent Chain
2. Type a radius of [1.0] and complete the feature.
3. Repeat for PROT_F49, except use the (SIDE SRFS F49 X START
SRFS F37) Intent Chain.
Note:
Both rounds will be visually identical at this point.
4. Orient to the saved view INTENT_TOP, select PROT_F50and

> Modify .
5. Click the vertical [10.0] dimension, modify to [2. 5], and

Regenerate.
6. Orient the model suitably and notice the changes.

NOTES
Figure 54: Selecting the Vertical Dimension
7. Orient to the saved view INTENT_TOP, select PROT_F50 and

> Modify .
8. Click on the vertex shown in the following figure, drag the

section approximately as shown in the following figure and
regenerate.
Figure 55: Regenerating Model
9. Notice the robustness of the round.

NOTES
Figure 56: A Robust Round Feature
10. Repeat the drag procedure for Prot_F49. Notice the difference in
the round feature- it only interacts with its intent chain (SIDE
SRFS F49 X START SRFS F37).
Figure 57: Round Feature Interacts only with its Intent Chain
11. Repeat the drag procedure again on PROT_F50 as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 58: Repeating Drag Procedure
12. Redefine both PROT_F49 and PROT_F50 from One Side to Both
Sides, using a depth of [24.0]
13. Orient to the saved view INTENT_BOT.
Figure 59: Differing Intent Chains
14. Notice how the two intent chains above are different, and click
View > Previous .

NOTES
15. Create a final round using the Intent Chain “(END EDGES)
created by feature 49” as shown. Use a radius of [0. 50]
Figure 60: Creating a Final Round
16. Redefine the Sketch for Prot_F49. Delete all geometry, and sketch
a 2.5 radius circle. Complete the feature and notice how the round
adapts.
Figure 61: Round Adapts to New Criteria
17. Save the model, close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISES
The following exercises provide supplementary tools and techniques
related to this module’s goal. You may work on these as time allows.
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Curve

Drafts
Task 1. Open the model and insert a split at surface draft on the upper
model.
1. Open DRAFT_CURVE.PRT
Figure 62: Neutral Curve Draft Feature
2. Click Insert > Draft > Neutral Curve > Done .
3. Click Tweak > Split at Srf > Both Sides > Dependent >
Constant > Done.
4. Click Indiv Surfs and select the surfaces shown in the following
figure.

NOTES
Figure 63: Selecting Individual Surfaces
5. Click Intent Surfs . Select the round shown in the following figure.
Click Done to continue.
Figure 64: Selecting Round Surface
6. This type of draft requires two neutral curves (or sets of edges).
For the first curve, use Tangent Chain to select the upper set of
edges, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 65: Selecting Upper Set of Edges
7. Click Done > Tangent Chain to select the lower set of edges, as
Figure 66: Selecting Lower Set of Edges
8. Click Done . Select the parting quilt.
9. To select the pull direction plane, click Sel By Menu > Top >
Select .
10. Note the direction of the green draft arrow, type [10.0°], and click
OK .

NOTES
Task 2. Insert a split at curve draft on the lower model
1. Insert another neutral curve draft. Use the attributes Tweak > Split
at Crv > Both Sides > Dependent > Constant .
2. Use the previous techniques to select the surfaces from the lower
model, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 67: Selecting Surfaces from Lower Model
3. To select the neutral curve, click Curve Chain . Select the datum
curve. Then click Select All > Done .
4. Select the OFFSET plane as the reference plane.
5. Note the direction of the green draft arrow, type [10°], and click
OK .
6. Select the OFFSET plane and use > Modify to change the
offset dimension to [2. 0].
7. Click > Front and zoom, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 68: Front View
8. Notice that the upper model increased in size, while the lower
model decreased.
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Drafts

Task 1. Open DRAFT_SKETCH.PRT and create a draft on the
rectangular protrusion on the top of the part, using non-parallel neutral and
reference planes.
1. Open DRAFT_SKETCH.PRT.
Figure 69: Draft Example Part
2. Click Insert > Draft > > .
3. Select the surfaces to be drafted, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 70: Selecting Draft Surfaces
4. Select the neutral plane, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 71: Selecting the Neutral Plane
5. Select the Top datum plane from the Model Tree as a reference
plane for angle measurement.
6. Type [-5.0] as the draft angle, and complete the feature.
7. Click > Front , and investigate the draft angles created.
Figure 72: Investigating Draft Angles
Task 2. Insert a split at sketch draft.
1. Click > Sketch .

NOTES
Figure 73: Inserting a Split at Sketch
3. Click Split at Skt > .
4. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the draft

surface.
Figure 74: Selecting Draft Surface
5. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the neutral

plane.

NOTES
Figure 75: Selecting a Neutral Plane
6. When prompted for a sketching plane, select the draft surface.
7. Select the TOP datum as the top reference plane.
8. To close the REFERENCES dialog box, click Close > Yes .
9. Click , and select the five datum curve segments, as shown in

Figure 76: Selecting Datum Curve Segments
10. Complete the sketch, type [-7.0] and [7.0] as the draft angles,
and complete the feature.

NOTES
Figure 77: Completed Model
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating Simple and

Advanced Rounds
Task 1. Insert an edge-to-surface round to make a smooth transition
where the knuckle tapers to connect to the suspension link.
1. Open RR_KNUCKLE.PRT.
Figure 78: RR Knuckle Part
2. Click Insert > Round > Simple > Done .
3. Specify the round attributes. Click Constant > Edge-Surf > Done .
4. Select the edge and the cylindrical surface, as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 79: Selecting Edge and Cylindrical Surface
5. Type [1.0] as the radius and click OK to create the round.
6. Repeat the round for the other side of the part.
Figure 80: Repeating Round Feature
Task 2. Insert a round between the main body of the part and the lower
cylinder that connects to the suspension.
1. Click Insert > Round > Simple > Done .
2. Specify the round attributes. Click Constant > Surf-Surf > Done .
NOTES
3. Select the two surfaces shown in the following figure.
4. Type [0.5] as the radius, and click OK to create the feature.
Figure 82: Model after Feature Creation
5. Click Insert > Round > Advanced > Done .
6. Specify the attributes for the set. Click Constant > Surf-Surf >
Done .
7. Select the two reference surfaces as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 83: Selecting References
8. Type [0.2] as the radius. Click OK to accept the round set.
9. Click Done Sets > Preview , to view the geometry. Notice the
lower round edge is straight.
Figure 84: Previewing Geometry
Task 3. Add a transition to the round.
1. Click Transitions > Define .

NOTES
2. Specify the edges to create the transition. Select the two inside
green edges. Click Done Sel > Done > Done Trans .
3. Notice the system automatically adds a blend transition.
Figure 85: Automatic Blend Transition
4. Click OK to create the round.
Displayed .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned how to:
• Prepare a model for casting or molding by adding draft features.

• Use advanced types of drafts for more complex applications.
• Insert rounds with single and multiple sets of references.
• Define radius values for rounds.
• Create transitions between round sets for more complex geometry.
• Utilize various intent chain rounds.

Creating Advanced Geometry

In this module, you learn how to use advanced techniques to create
and manipulate construction features that would otherwise require
multiple steps to create.
Objectives
• Create swept blends.

• Create variable section sweeps.
• Define the types of variable section sweeps and their purpose.
• Define the purpose of using helical sweeps.
Page 3-1
NOTES
CREATING SWEPT BLENDS

The swept blend and variable section sweep features enable you to capture
the design intent of your model by:
• Following a specified path that you can control parametrically.

• Varying the cross-section of the feature along the specified path.
Creating Spines
To create a swept blend feature, you blend several cross-sections along a
single trajectory, defined as the spine.
Spine
Cross-sections
Figure 1: Swept Blend
• You define the cross-sections by sketching or selecting them at

specified segment vertices or datum points located on the curve. You
can sketch the spine trajectory as an open or closed loop.
• You define additional elements when creating a swept blend feature
using Blend Control and Tangency .

NOTES
Using Swept Blends

• To create a swept blend, all sections must intersect the trajectory.
• To use a closed trajectory, you must create two sections: one sketched
at the start point, the other sketched at any other location.
• To use an open trajectory, you create use a section at the start points
and end points.
• To define sections of a swept blend, you use the underlying curve
segments or edges from which you constructed the composite curve.
CREATING VARIABLE SECTION SWEEPS

To create a variable section sweep (VSS) feature, you sweep a single
variable section along one or more trajectories.
Creating Normal-to-Original Spines

The following points have to be kept in mind when creating normal-to-
original spines:
• You must define at least one additional trajectory, called the x-vector
or horizontal vector trajectory.
• The system uses this trajectory to orient the section during the sweep.
• The section plane is always normal to the spine at their intersection as

Adva nced Ge omet ry C r eation Pag e 3- 3
NOTES
Spine trajectory x-vector

trajectory
x-vector
trajectory sets up
horizontal for
Sketcher
Resulting feature twists

due to change in
horizontal determined by
x-vector
Figure 1: Result of X-Vector
Defining Shapes with Additional Trajectories

Once you have defined the spine and x-vector, you can select or sketch
additional trajectories to define the shape of the swept section.
Known vertex for

automatic Spine
alignment
Additional
trajectories

NOTES
Figure 2: Using Multiple Trajectories
Note:
You do not have to add explicit alignments to a known vertex.
If possible, you should avoid making unnecessary alignments
in the section of a variable section sweep.
Using the Trajectory Parameter

When the system regenerates a variable section sweep, it automatically
evaluates an internal parameter called a trajpar (trajectory parameter). It is
a normalized value between 0 and 1, representing the percentage length of
the swept feature at every point along the spine trajectory.
At the beginning of the sweep, the value of trajpar is 0; at the end, it is 1.

You can use this value to your advantage by writing relations to control
the section.

NOTES
Sketcher dimension
No relations
Added relation
sd4 = trajpar + 1 Added relation
sd4 = sin ( trajpar *360 ) + 1.5
Figure 3: Using Trajpar to Drive the Section
You can use the trajpar parameter to drive surfaces to zero anywhere along
the trajectory by using complex relations to drive the section, or by
evaluating a Datum Graph feature (evalgraph).
Before trajpar relation After trajpar relation
Figure 4: Driving a Surface to Zero

NOTES
Figure 5: Using a Datum Graph Feature
Using Variable Section Sweeps

The following points have to be kept in mind when using variable section
sweeps:
• A variable section sweep cannot be the first feature in a model, so you

must use default datums first.
• The spine curve must consist of only tangent entities, unless the Pivot
Dir option is used.
• The x-vector trajectory cannot cross the spine. However, either

endpoint may intersect the spine.
• All additional trajectories must intersect the sweep’s sketching plane,
but they do not have to be the same length as the spine trajectory.
• The sweep feature’s sketching plane may intersect any trajectory only
once at any given location along the sweep.
• If the sweep feature’s sketching plane cannot intersect all trajectories
at the sweep’s start point, you can use a datum point (on the spine) to
define the start point.

NOTES
Internal sketch
plane defined at
Spine trajectory point
Figure 6: Using a Datum Point to Define a Sketching Plane
Orienting Cross-Sections
Both the swept blend and the variable section sweep enable you to control
how the system sweeps the cross-section with respect to the spine
trajectory.
The following options provide flexibility in defining a feature by allowing

you to specify the orientation of its cross-section.
• Normal to the original trajectory
Other trajectory
Spine
Figure 7: Normal to the Original Trajectory

NOTES
• Normal to trajectory
Figure 8: Normal to Selected Trajectory
• Pivot direction
Normal to DTM2
Figure 9: Normal to Pivot Plane
CREATING HELICAL SWEEPS

To create a helical sweep feature, you sweep a single section along a
helical path that is defined by a profile and a pitch value.
You must first specify a sweep profile using a sketch. The following
figures illustrate a straight profile section and a resulting ‘spring’ feature.

NOTES
Figure 6: Straight Profile Section and Spring Feature
Variations of the profile can easily be created. The following profile has
three line segments. After specifying a profile, you specify a pitch value to
be used and sketch a cross section. The section was simply a circle,
centered on the provided crosshairs.
Figure 7: Profile variation with Three Line Segments

NOTES
Helical Sweep Options

• Right or Left Handed
Figure 8: Right and Left Handed Helical Sweeps
• Thru Axis or Normal to Traj
Figure 9: Thru Axis and Norm to Traj Sweeps
• Constant or Variable Pitch
Figure 10: Constant and Variable Sweeps

NOTES
You can control the pitch with sketcher points and a graph using variable
pitch. The sketcher points are located on the original profile, as shown in
the following figure. Once sketcher points are added, they can be added to
a pitch graph, and the pitch values for each point are entered.
Figure 11: Sketcher Points on the Original Profile
Figure 12: Pitch Values at Various Points

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory, you practice the techniques used to create swept
blends and variable section sweeps.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a swept blend including all the steps it takes to
create an intake port for a go-cart.
In Exercise 2, you create a variable section sweep using a graph.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Advanced Geometry Creation
Icons Description
Saved views list
Use Edge
Offset Edge
Select Geometry
Collinear Constraint
EXERCISE 1: Using Swept Blends

Task 1. Open the models and configure the display.

2. Open ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
3. Click > Intake .

NOTES
Figure 13: Intake View of Engine Block Model
4. View the geometry making up the intake ports on the engine block,
and then close the window.
5. Open CARB_INTAKE_PORT.PRT.
Figure 14: Carb_Intake_Port Model
6. Notice the surface quilts. These are Copy Geometry features that
are ‘mapped’ geometry transferred from the engine block viewed
previously.

NOTES
Task 2. Use the copied geometry and supplied datum curves to create a
mating intake manifold part that ‘fits perfectly’, and maintains tangency
on inner surfaces. Begin by defining a trajectory.
1. Select the first Copy Geometry feature from the Model Tree and
click > Hide.
2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Swept Blend.
3. Click Select Sec > NrmToOriginTraj > Done.
4. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain , and select the datum curve
Figure 15: Selecting Datum Curve
5. Click Select All > Done .
Task 3. Define the cross sections for the swept blend.
1. Using Select Curve, select the eight datum curve segments that
form the loop shown in the following figure. Note the location of
your start point. (Using a different start point is acceptable.)

NOTES
Figure 16: Selecting Datum Curve Segments
Tip
Using the option for Sel Chain is an easy way to select
multiple continuous curve segments.
2. Click Done . Use the same technique to select the eight curve
segments for the second section, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17: Selecting Curve
3. Check that the start points of the two sections line up. If
necessary, click Start Point , and select a new location.
4. Click Done > No > OK to complete the feature.

NOTES
Figure 18: Completed Feature
Task 4. Using the capabilities of a swept blend, create a cut to hollow-

out the protrusion while maintaining tangency with the copied geometry.
1. Click Insert > Cut > Swept Blend > Done.
2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain .
3. Select the same curve that you used as the trajectory for the
protrusion. Click Select All . Use the same start point as the
protrusion. Click Done .
4. Click Automatic > Done to automatically orient the sketching

plane.
5. Click Next to skip definition of intermediate sections.
6. Type [0.0] for the Z-axis rotation.
7. Click > Chain and select the two edges of the copy geometry

NOTES
8. Click Accept to select the entire loop. Note the location of the
Start Point.
9. Click > Automatic > Done .
10. Type [0.0] for the Z-axis rotation.
11. Click > Loop , and select the surface shown in the following
figure.
Figure 20: Selecting Surface
12. Type [-.125] for the offset.
13. Ensure that the start point lines up with the start point of the first
section. If necessary, select the proper location and click >

StartPoint .
14. Click . Verify the material removal arrow faces the inside of the
section and click Okay .
15. Click Preview . Notice that there is currently a sharp transition

between the cut and the copy geometry surfaces. (The surfaces in
the following figure are shown using a Gaussian Curvature Surface
Analysis)

NOTES
Figure 21: Gaussian Curvature Surface Analysis
Task 5. Eliminate the ‘sharp’ by defining Tangency.
1. Click Tangency > Define .
2. Click Yes to define the blend tangent at the first end.
3. The system now highlights the section in blue and the edge shown
in red.
Figure 22: System Highlights Edge
4. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the tangent

reference for the highlighted edge.

NOTES
Figure 23: Standard Surface Reference for Edge
5. Continue to select tangent surfaces for each highlighted red edge in

sequence.
Tips & Techniques:

Use Query Sel when defining tangency on a blend. You
cannot change one of the edges on the fly. If you inadvertently
select the wrong reference, you must repeat the whole process.
6. Click No to skip tangency definition at the other end.
7. Click Preview . Notice that the cut is tangent to the surfaces of the
engine intake. (The surfaces in the following figure are shown
using a Gaussian Curvature Surface Analysis)
8. Click OK .
Figure 24: Cut is Tangent to Surfaces of Engine Intake

NOTES
9. Hide the remaining Copy Geometry feature.
Figure 25: Model after Hiding Features
Task 6. [Optional] Create mounting tabs at each end of the port to

complete the part, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 26: Model with Mounting Tabs
1. Save the part and close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Variable Section Sweep

Reference Curves
Task 1. Utilize datum curves as variable section sweep trajectories.
1. Open the BOTTLE.PRT
Figure 27: Start Model
Task 2. Create a variable section sweep for the body of the bottle.
Begin by defining trajectories
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Variable Section Sweep >

NrmToOriginTraj > Done .
2. Click Select Traj and select the datum curve shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
3. Click , and verify that the start point is at the bottom of the
curve. (If necessary, click Start Point and modify.)
4. Click > Select Traj > Curve Chain to define the

X-vector.
5. Select the rightmost curve. Click Select All > .
6. Continue using Select Traj > Curve Chain, and Select All >
to select the remaining curves in any order.
7. Click .
Task 3. Define the cross-section.
1. Sketch a rectangle with all four sides snapping to the provided

sketcher points. Sketch fillets and then dimension/constrain, as

NOTES
Figure 29: Sketching Fillets and Constraining
2. Click > OK .
3. Hide all datum curves using the Model Tree. Notice the top of the
bottle is not cylindrical, and the radius on the corners is constant.
Figure 30: Analyzing the Bottle Model

NOTES
Task 4. Create a datum graph that will control the radius on the corners
of the bottle.
1. Click Insert > Datum > Graph .
2. Type [radius].
3. To save time, insert a saved sketch. Click Sketch >

Data From File > Radius.sec > Open .
Figure 31: Inserting a Saved Sketch
4. Observe the following:

½ The Graph is 140 units in ‘X’, which is the height of the spine
trajectory curve.
½ It has horizontal segments at ‘Y’ values of 115 and 50.
Dividing each by 5 yields 23 and 10, which relate to the
dimensions of the original curves.
5. Click .
6. In order to control the variable section sweep with the radius

graph, reorder it before the variable section sweep by dragging in
the Model Tree.

NOTES
Task 5. Redefine the variable section sweep and link it to the graph.
1. Select the protrusion with the Model Tree, and click >
Redefine > Section > Sketch .
2. Click Sketch > Relations > Add .
3. Observe your dimension number for the radius,

(SD9 in this example).
Figure 32: Dimension Number sd9
4. Using your dimension number, type

[SD9=EVALGRAPH(“RADIUS”,TRAJPAR*140)/5].
(Notice the 140 and 5 are the X and Y graph scales respectively.)
5. Click > OK .
Figure 33: Changing Radius on Bottle
6. Notice the changing radius forms a cylindrical surface near the top
and at the ‘squeezed’ mid portion.

NOTES
Task 6. Add a few finishing touches.
1. Set allow_anatomic_features option to Yes .
2. Click Insert > Advanced> Radius Dome .
3. Select the bottom surface, as shown in the following figure, then

select the FRONT datum plane.
Figure 34: Selecting Bottom Surface
4. Type [- 25. 0] as radius of the dome and click .
5. Click and select the edge shown in the following figure.
Figure 35: Selecting Bottom Edge
6. Click > Round Edges , and drag the radius to a value

between 4. 5 and 5. 0.

NOTES
Figure 36: Rounding Edges
7. Click Insert > Shell and select the surface shown in the following
figure. Click > .
Figure 37: Selecting Surface for Shell Feature
8. Type [1. 0] and click . Click OK to complete the feature.

NOTES
Figure 38: Completed Model
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
related to this module’s goal. .
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Controlling Cuts with

Datum Graph Features
Figure 39: The Finished Cam Drawing
Task 1. Create a revolved protrusion as the foundation for the cam and
use a datum graph to control the height of the variable section sweep cut.
Tips & Techniques:

It may be easier to scale the Y values when creating the graph
feature. Remember to factor out the scaling value when writing
the relation.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned that:
• The swept blend and variable section sweep features allow the creation
of designs that follow a specified path controlled parametrically.
• To create a swept blend feature, you blend several cross-sections along
a single trajectory.
• When the system regenerates a variable section sweep, it automatically
evaluates an internal parameter called a trajpar.
• To create a helical sweep feature, you sweep a single section along a
helical path, which is defined by a profile and a pitch value.

Surface Creation and Style Feature

In this module you learn to create solid geometry using surface
creation techniques and the Style feature. These features are part of
the Interactive Surface Design Extension (ISDX).
Objectives
• Use surfaces to improve model design.

• Create surfaces and manipulate surface displays.
• Utilize ISDX capabilities.
• Apply the Parallel Modeling paradigm.
• Use single-view and four-view window layouts.
• Create 2-D and 3-D freeform curves.
• Create freeform surfaces using boundary curves.
Page 4-1
NOTES
USING SURFACES IN MODEL DESIGN

Surfaces can be used in model design to:
• Define an entire model with surface features.

• Create geometry on an existing solid model.
• Reference and generate additional geometry.
• Reference parts in Assembly mode.
Advantages of Using Surfaces

Using surfaces to design your models enables you to:
• Create robust complex geometry.

• Increase regeneration speed.
• Represent the master model without affecting mass properties.
• Reduce the number of features.
• Reduce screen clutter by blanking layers.
Manipulating Surface Displays

Pro/ENGINEER distinguishes surfaces from the white and gray hidden
lines of solid geometry by displaying them in yellow, and their silhouette
edges in magenta.
DEFINING SURFACE OPTIONS

Working in Part Mode
Normally, you create surface features using all of the same options that
you would use for a solid feature—such as extrude, revolve, sweep, blend,
swept blend, variable section sweep, and helical sweep.
In addition, you can use some unique surface functionality options in part
mode. They are:
• Flat – Sketches the planar boundaries of a surface

NOTES
Figure 1: A Flat Surface
• By Boundaries – Uses selected curves in one or two directions to

define the outer boundaries of the surface
Figure 2: Surfaces by Boundaries
• Offset – Offsets a new surface feature from an existing surface by a

specified distance
Figure 3: Offset Surface

Su rf a ce C re ation and St yle Fea tu re Pag e 4- 3
NOTES
Open Ends versus Capped Ends

If the cross-section of an extruded, revolved, swept, or blended surface is a
closed loop, you can use the Capped Ends option to automatically create
flat surfaces that close off the ends of the feature.
The system automatically merges two flat surfaces with the other surfaces
to form an enclosed volume. This is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 4: Open vs. Capped Ends
Creating Merged Surfaces

You can combine one or more surface features into a single surface quilt.
When you create a merged surface:
• It consumes the old surfaces and becomes a child.

• Any single-sided edge that becomes a two-sided edge changes from
yellow to magenta.
• If you delete the merge, the old surfaces return.
Use Join for

mating edges or
where one edge
lies on the
other surface.
Join Intersect Resultant merge
Figure 5: Using Merge Join and Merge Intersect

NOTES
CREATING SOLID FEATURES

If a surface extends to or beyond the boundaries of a solid part or defines a
closed volume, you can use it to create new solid or thin features.
You can create different features such as protrusions, slots, or cuts with
the Use Quilt option.
Creating a cut
Creating a thin protrusion
Figure 6: Using Surfaces to Generate Solid Features
DEFINING ISDX
The Interactive Surface Design Extension (ISDX) offers a spline-based
freeform modeler that enables you to create 2-D and 3-D curves and
freeform surfaces. You can use ISDX to create freeform surface models as
part of:
• Conceptual design
• Engineering design
• Reverse styling
ISDX allows you to create Style features. Within the Style feature, you
can create freeform curves and surfaces easily.

NOTES
Figure 7: A Style Feature with Several Curves and Surfaces
Using the Style Feature

A Style feature can contain several curves and surfaces or quilts. It
displays in the MODEL TREE as Style.
Style Feature Concepts

The following are the important concepts of the Style feature:
• 4-view Layout – Allows you to work around the model.

NOTES
Figure 8: Four-View Window Layout
• Soft Point Technology – Allows you to snap a curve on to other

entities with a soft point, which can be interactively located at a
desired location.
• Switching Parent Child Relationships – Style offers a flexible
hierarchy of the curves and surfaces you create. You can alter the
parent child relationships.
Parallel Modeling
Most products are a combination of geometric forms and freeform shapes.
The Style feature enables you to integrate the feature based parametric
modeling of Pro/ENGINEER with freeform unconstrained surfacing.
You can create a total product design in a single modeling environment.

NOTES
USING ISDX
You use ISDX to create curves and freeform surfaces, where geometry is
either not defined or requires great flexibility. Also, you use it when the
design intent is dependent on visual or aesthetic criteria.
Specifically, you can use ISDX to create:

• 2-D or 3-D curves(referenced or unconstrained).
• Curves On Surface (COS).
• Styling design models.
• Blends and transition surfaces.
• Freeform surfaces along with parametric surfaces in engineering
design models.
• Reverse styling surfaces.
Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves

You can use the Style feature as a 2-D (2-dimensional) or 3-D (3-
dimensional) sketcher to create unconstrained or referenced curves. These
curves can be attached to features, such as points, curves, or edges. They
can also be used to create other Pro/ENGINEER features.
Figure 9: Defining Curves in 3-D Space

NOTES
Figure 10: A Blend Surface based on a Freeform 3-D Curve
Figure 11: Surfaces Created from 3-D Curves
Creating Curves on Surfaces

You can create curves on surfaces (COS) by sketching them directly on to
the base surface, or by using the Drop tool. Style allows easy manipulation
or modification of the COS in order to capture the design intent. You can
use COS to build further surfaces or to trim the surfaces.
Figure 12: Using COS for Trimming

NOTES
Creating Styling Models

You can use freeform, intuitive curves and surfaces to conceptualize
products. Integrating parametric surfaces with the freeform surfaces
enables you to complete a product design on a single platform and
database.
You can also model using concept images that can be applied on to base
surfaces, as shown in the following figures.
(A) (B)
(C)
Figure 13: (A) Sketch (B) Sketch Applied on to the Base Surface (C) Model
Developed Using the Sketch
Creating Freeform Surfaces

While designing products, you may need to impose dimensional controls
on freeform surfaces. ISDX allows freeform curves and surfaces to
reference with parametric curves or surfaces, enabling you to control the
freeform surfaces using dimensions.

NOTES
Figure 14: Dimensionally Controlling a Style Model
Creating Blends and Transitions

You can use the Style feature to create quick and high quality spline
blends to improve the aesthetics or smoothness of products. You can
create tangent or curvature-continuous transition surfaces with interactive
control over the tangency.
Figure 15: Typical Transition Surfaces

NOTES
Figure 16: Interactive Manipulation of Tangency
Using Style Surfaces in Engineering Models

You can combine style surfaces with parametric surfaces while creating
high curvature or transition surfaces.
Figure 17: High Curvature Transition Surfaces
Reverse Styling
You can conveniently refer to imported scan curves and faceted or surface
data to build Style curves and surfaces.
Figure 18: Reverse Styling

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory, you learn surface creation techniques using
Pro/SURFACE and ISDX.
Method
In Exercise 1, you merge surfaces into a quilt, and using them to create
solid geometry.
In Exercise 2, you explore the power of the variable section sweep feature
by using trajpar and datum graph features to create geometry.
In Exercise 3, you create a simple surface by combining unconstrained

freeform functionality with parametric modeling.
Tools
Table 1: Surfaces and Style Feature Icons
Icons Description
Wireframe display
Create datum curve
Toggle datum plane
Set active datum plane
Create and edit curves
Display curvature plots
Delete all curvature points
Regenerate all
Create surfaces from boundary curves

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Cuts Using Surfaces

Task 1. Begin a new model and create the first feature.

2. Create a new part, SURF_CUT, using the default template.
3. Select the FRONT datum, then click Insert > Surface > Extrude
and sketch, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19: Sketching to Extrude a Surface
4. Exit Sketcher, orient to the default view, and drag the section to a
depth of approximately [5. 625].

NOTES
Figure 20: Creating Depth Dimension
5. Note that this method results in a surface that is one-sided and

open-ended. Click to verify this (magenta and yellow).
Task 2. Redefine the surface to use the options for Both Sides and
Capped Ends .
1. Select the surface, and click > Redefine .
2. Click Attributes and specify Both Sides and Capped Ends . Then
click four times. Note that this has created a ‘hollow’ surface
(magenta).
Figure 21: Redefining for Capped Ends

NOTES
Task 3. Create a solid from the existing surface.
1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Use Quilt , select the surface, and
click . Note that the model is now solid (white).
Task 4. Create the first of two surfaces that will define a later cut.
1. Click Insert > Surface > Revolve , and use the options for Both
Sides and Open Ends .
2. Select the RIGHT datum as the sketching plane, click Okay , and
select the TOP datum as the reference.
3. Create the sketch using a spline with a total of five points, as

shown in the following figure. Note the use of dimensioned
construction lines. Be sure to specify the horizontal centerline as
the axis of revolution.
Figure 22: Creating Sketch
4. Finish the sketch and revolve the surface by 180°.

NOTES
Figure 23: Sketch after Revolving Surface
3. Complete the feature.
Task 5. Create the second of two surfaces that will define a later cut.
1. Click Insert > Surface > Extrude . Use the options for One Side
and Open Ends .
2. Select the TOP datum as the sketching plane, click Okay >
Bottom , and select the FRONT datum plane.
3. Sketch the ellipse shown in the following figure.

Hint: Use two centerlines and four sketcher points.

NOTES
Figure 24: Creating a Sketch with Two Centerlines and Four Sketcher Points
4. Complete the sketch and use the base of the block as an Up to

Surface depth.
Figure 25: Using Base of Block as “Up to Surface” Depth
Task 6. Create a surface merge and a cut.
1. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge , and select the two
surface features.

NOTES
2. Toggle through the various Quilt Side options to result in the mesh
Figure 26: Required Quilt Side Option
3. Complete the merge feature, and click Insert > Cut > Use Quilt .
4. Select the surface and specify the removal side to result in the cut
Figure 27: Cut Feature
Task 7. Add finishing rounds to the model.
1. Click and <SHIFT> to select both edges, then round the edges,

NOTES
Figure 28: Rounding Edges of Cut
2. [Optional] Delete the last three features from the Model Tree.
Redefine the second surface depth as UP TO SURFACE , and
QUERY SELECT the entire first surface. Then re-create the merge,
cut, and rounds. What was different about the merge?

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Applying Variable Section Sweeps

Task 1. View the Go-cart. The task is to create a custom exhaust pipe.
1. The go-cart and the engine compartment detail are shown in the
following figure.
Figure 29: Go-Cart and Engine Compartment Detail
2. Open the EXHAUST_PIPE.ASM.
Figure 30: Exhaust Pipe Assembly
3. Notice the following:

½ The cyan blue surfaces are copied from the engine.
½ The Green surface (swept blend) is a portion of the exhaust that

was started for you.

NOTES
½ The orange datum curve is the pre-defined trajectory, created to

avoid the copied brown and white surfaces from the engine
assembly that the exhaust cannot touch.
Task 2. A common technique for creating a second trajectory for a

variable section sweep is to use a surface strip. Create a surface strip that
follows the existing trajectory, and uses trajpar to change orientation. The
edge of this surface strip will form a second trajectory for the final
variable section sweep.
1. Click the EXHAUST_PIPE.PRT in the Model Tree and click >

Open .
Figure 31: Opening the Exhaust Pipe Part through Model Tree
4. Click Insert > Surface > Variable Section Sweep > Pivot Dir >
Done.
2. Select the Top Datum from the Model Tree. Click Okay.
3. Click Select Trajectory > Curve Chain .
4. Select anywhere on the datum curve and click Select All > Done >
Done > Done > Origin Start .

NOTES
Task 3. Sketch the following line.
Figure 32: Sketching Line
1. Click Sketch > Relations > Add .
2. Using your dimension number for the angle dimension

(sd3 in this example), type the following two lines:
/* equation to rotate line 90-0 during length of trajectory
sd3 = 90 – trajpar *90
Notice how the angle changes after regeneration.
3. Click > OK .
Figure 33: Angle Changes after Regeneration

NOTES
Task 4. Create and reorder a graph feature using a saved sketch that will
be used to control the width of the strip.
1. Click Insert > Datum > Graph, and type [Pipe_stretch ].
2. Click Sketch > Data From File > pipe_stretch.sec > Open
Figure 34: Controlling Width of Strip with Graph Feature
3. Click .
4. Use the Model Tree to reorder the graph before the strip surface.
Task 5. Link the graph feature to the variable section sweep so that it
controls the width of the strip surface.
1. Select the strip surface in the Model Tree and click >
Redefine > Section > Define > Sketch .
2. Click Sketch > Relations . Note the dimension number for the
length dimension (ex: sd5) and click Edit Rel .
3. Using your dimension number for the length dimension,

type the following lines under the previous entries:
/*vary width of strip according to graph feature
sd5= (d60/2) + evalgraph ("pipe_stretch", trajpar *100)/10
Note
The diameter dimension at the circular end of the green surface
is known to be d60. The 100 and 10 values are the X and Y
graph scales respectively.

NOTES
4. Save and exit the Notepad.
5. Click > OK .
Figure 35: Length Dimension Variation
Task 6. Use the two edges of the strip surface as trajectories for the final
variable section sweep. The sweep should have a circular cross-section
adjacent to the existing green surface and be elliptical at the other end of
the sweep.
1. Click Insert > Surface > Variable Section Sweep >

NormToOriginTraj > Done .
2. Click Select Traj > Bndry Chain . Select the surface shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
3. Using From-To , select the appropriate edge.
4. Click Done >No Join > Done .
5. Click Select Traj > Tangent Chain , and select the edge of the
surface strip shown in the following figure.
Figure 37: Creating Tangent Chain
6. Click Done > No Join > Done > Done > Open Ends > Done >
Origin Start .

NOTES
Figure 38: Open Ends
5. Click Sketch > Data From File > pipe_ellipse.sec > Open .
Task 7. Drag the center of the imported sketch until it snaps to the
crosshairs, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 39: Imported Sketch Snaps to Crosshairs
1. Edit the scale to [1. 0] and click .

NOTES
2. Click > , and Query Select the two sketcher points shown
Figure 40: Selecting Sketcher Points
3. Notice that the ellipse now conforms to a circle at the beginning of

the trajectory.
4. Click > OK .
Figure 41: Ellipse Conforms to Circle
5. Select the surface strip and the origin curve from the Model Tree
and click Hide .
7. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge and select the two
surfaces shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 42: Merging Surfaces
8. Click .
9. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt .
10. Select anywhere on the exhaust surface, verify the material arrow
points to the outside, type [0. 25] as the thickness and click .
Figure 43: Creating Thin Protrusion by Using Quilts
11. Open the EXHAUST_PIPE.ASM.
Figure 44: Opening Exhaust Pipe Assembly
12. Save the model and erase it from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Style Surfaces

Task 1. Begin a new Style feature for the main flashlight body.
1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.
2. Click Insert > Style .
3. If necessary, click View > Show All to revert to a single pane

view.
4. Click [Set active datum plane] in the side bar. Select the
FRONT datum plane.
Figure 46: Setting Front as the Active Datum Plane

NOTES
Task 2. Create a curve and refine its shape.
1. Create a planar curve. Click [Create and edit curves] > New >
Planar , then click the locations on the active plane, as shown in
Figure 47: Plotting a Curve
2. Click > Front .
3. To display curvature plot, click [Display curvature plots].
4. In the CURVE dialog box, click Edit .
5. Drag the curve points to form the shape of the curve, as shown in
the following figure. Check that the curve is located above the
batteries.
Figure 48: Editing and Adjusting the Curve

NOTES
6. Click OK to finish creating the curve.
Task 3. Create another curve on the lower side.
1. Click > New > Planar and click the locations on the FRONT
plane as shown in the following figure.
Figure 49: Creating the Bottom Curve
2. Refine the shape of the curve using the same techniques as the
previous curve so it appears approximately as shown in the
preceding figure.
3. Click OK .
Task 4. Create the first cross-sectional curve and refine its shape.
1. Click > DEFAULT. Then click [Clear all curvature points]

and turn off .
2. Click > New > Free . Hold <ALT> and click the top-curve,
then click on the lower curve, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 50: Plotting the Back of the Flashlight
3. Click Add, then click on the two locations to add points, as shown
Figure 51: Adding Points
4. Click Edit. Press and hold <SHIFT> and then drag the points, as
Figure 52: Creating a Curve by Manipulating Points

NOTES
Task 5. Make the curve normal to the FRONT plane.
1. Select the upper endpoint of the newest curve. Click Tangent ,

change its type to NORMAL, and select the FRONT plane.
Figure 53: Creating a Tangent to the Front Plane
2. Repeat the above step for the lower end of the same curve.
Task 6. Refine the shape of the curve.
1. Click > RIGHT.
2. Click and modify the shape by manipulating point locations

and tangent lengths.
Figure 54: Modifying Shape by Manipulating Points

NOTES
3. Click OK .
Task 7. Create another cross sectional curve as a planar curve.
1. Click > Default . Then click and select the RIGHT plane.
2. Click > New > Planar . Click Planar to open the drop-down
menu. Type [-75.0] in the OFFSET text box.
3. Click Styling > Snap to turn snap on.
4. Click the top curve, click the next two points on the active plane,
then click the bottom curve, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 55: Creating the Face of the Flashlight
5. Click Styling > Snap to turn snap off.
Task 8. Constrain the endpoint tangents.
1. Click Edit . Click an endpoint and on the TANGENT bar,

select Normal from the shortcut menu, and select the FRONT
plane.
2. Click > Right .
3. Modify the shape of the curve, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 56: Modifying Shape by Manipulating Points
4. In the CURVE dialog box, click OK .
5. Regenerate the model. Click [Regenerate all], if necessary.
Task 9. Create a surface from the Style curves.
1. Click [Create surfaces from boundary curves] and select the

four style curves, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 57: Selecting Boundary Curves

NOTES
2. Click OK .
3. Click to shade the model.
Figure 58: Created Surface
Task 10. Redefine the location of the offset plane.
1. Select the planar, cross-section curve, as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 59: Selecting the Planar Cross-Section Curve
2. Click > Definition .
3. Click Planar to expand the box, type [ – 90], press <ENTER> and
click OK .
4. Click to regenerate the Style feature.

NOTES
Figure 60: Regenerated Style Feature
5. Exit Style.
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Flashlight

Task 1. Redefine the style feature to continue creating handle curves
and surfaces.
1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.
2. Redefine the STYLE feature.
3. Click and select the FRONT datum, then click > Front .
4. Click > New > Planar and create the two curves, as shown in
the following figure. Check that the Planar , Offset is zero.
Figure 61: Creating Two more Curves
5. Click > New > Free and create the first cross section curve, as
shown in the following figure. Press <ALT> to snap to the existing
curves.

NOTES
Figure 62: Creating a Free Curve
6. Click Add and select a location for a midpoint, as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 63: Selecting a Midpoint Location
7. Click Edit , then press <SHIFT> and drag the point perpendicular
from the FRONT plane.
8. Place the endpoint tangents normal to the FRONT datum plane and
shape the curve, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 64: Shaping Curve
9. Using the same techniques, create another new curve and shape, as
Figure 65: Creating and Shaping a Second Curve
10. Click OK to close the CURVE dialog box.
11. Click . Select the four curves that form the handle, and click
OK .
12. Shade the model.
13. Click to exit Style.

NOTES
Figure 66: Creating Surface from Four Style Curves
14. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge .
15. Select the handle surface, then select the body surface.
16. Toggle the mesh for the Quilt Sides, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 67: Quilting Sides
17. Click .
18. Click Feature > Mirror Geom .
19. Select the FRONT plane.

NOTES
Figure 68: Mirroring Geometry
20. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge , select the left and
right halves of the flashlight body, and click .
21. Select the edges shown in the following figure. Click >
Round Edges .
Figure 69: Rounding Rough Edges
22. Dynamically modify the radius to a value of [5].
23. Repeat for the other side of the handle.

NOTES
Figure 70: Rounded Edges
24. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt . Select the surface
quilt.
25. Flip the MATERIAL SIDE arrow to add material to the inside of the
surface.
26. Type [2. 0] as the thickness value and click . (You may wish to
add the Style curves to a layer and blank the layer)
Figure 71: Finished Model
Displayed .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned that:
• Surfaces can be used to create model designs.

• Surfaces can be merged to form quilts. The quilts can form solid
geometry using the Use Quilt and Patch options.
• ISDX integrates freeform surfacing and parametric modeling to
enhance existing surfacing capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER, enabling
you to create product forms that require flexible surfaces.
• Style allows you to create geometry using a single-view layout or
4-view layout.
• A curve can be created as a free 3-D curve or as a planar curve.
• To create a Style surface you need four touching boundary curves.
• To change the shape of a surface, you need to manipulate the shape of
the boundary curves.

Family Tables and Inheritance Features

In this module you learn how to use Family Tables and Inheritance
features to efficiently reuse data. You also learn how to use these
features to create quickly create variations of existing designs.
Objectives
• Create and modify part family tables.

• Create and modify assembly family tables.
• Manage family tables.
• Describe how to use inheritance features.
Page 5-1
NOTES
USING FAMILY TABLES

Family tables are collections of parts (or assemblies or features) that share
similar features. Parts in family tables usually have one or more
dimensional variations.
For example, bolts come in various sizes but they all look alike and
perform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them as a “family”
of parts. In the following figure, the bolt on the left is the “generic” model
and the rest are “instances” of the generic. The generic model is the main
object in the family table. Every family table has one and only one
generic. Every family table has one or more instances. You can make
either part family tables or assembly family tables. A family table would
never consist of both parts and assemblies.
Instances
Generic
Figure 1: Family of Bolts
You can use family tables to:
• Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly.

• Save time and effort by standardizing part generation.
• Generate variations of a part without having to re-create and generate
each one separately.
• Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations.
• Create part lists that can be printed and included in catalogs or other
materials.

NOTES
Family Table Structure

Family tables are displayed as spreadsheets, consisting of columns and
rows. Rows display instances (of parts) and their corresponding feature
values. Columns display feature names.
Figure 2: Family Table for Bolt
Family Tables consist of three components:
1. The generic object on which all family members are based.
2. Dimensions and parameters, feature numbers, user-defined feature

names, and specified assembly member names.
3. The names of all family members (instances) created by the table

and the corresponding values for each of the table-driven items.
Advantages of Using Generics and Instances

There are several advantages to using family tables. For example, you can
increase productivity by:
• Storing multiple similar models within the same file.

• Saving different positions of a moveable assembly.

Famil y Tab les and Inhe ritanc e Pag e 5- 3
NOTES
• Saving different steps to the manufacturing of a model.

• Permanently saving model variations that you created using
Pro/PROGRAM.
CREATING FAMILY TABLES

To create a part family table, you must first model the generic part and
determine the variants before you can create the table and generate
instances.
Creating the Generic Model

The first step in creating a family table is to model the generic part with all
its possible features. The following figure illustrates the generic bolt.
Figure 3: Generic Bolt
After modeling the generic part, you should determine which dimensions,
parameters, and features will change from one instance to the next.

NOTES
Creating the Table

Next, you can add the item columns to be varied (dimensions, parameters,
features) to the family table clicking Family Tab in the menu manager.
Figure 4: New Family Table Dialog Box
Select the appropriate icons to add items to the family table.
Guidelines for Using Family Tables

• The system lists columns in the order in which you add the items;
therefore, add items in a logical order, grouping similar items.
• If you change dimension symbols using Modify > DimCosmetics ,
these symbols appear in the heading for that column.
• If you name features using Setup > Names , the names appear in the
heading for the column.
Creating Instances
After you add items to the table, you can add instance rows to the Family
Table. You can use any of these methods to accomplish this:
• Manually fill out the table by typing in values for the instances.
• Use Edit > Copy with Increments to create several instances by
patterning.

NOTES
• Read in a previously saved table.

• Use a spreadsheet, such as Microsoft Excel, to generate the instances.
Figure 5: Family Table for Bolt
Confirming Instance Validity
As a final step, you should use [Verify icon] to verify that all
instances are valid and can be regenerated prior to saving changes to the
part/assembly. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates each instance in sequence,
and indicates if each instance regenerates successfully.
Note:
Never save a model within a PDM environment without
regenerating or verifying the instances. Review the FAMILY
TREE dialog box to be certain that all the information is
correct prior to saving. If a family table is submitted to either
Pro/PDM or INTRALINK with typographical errors in the
naming of the instances it will typically require an
administrator to resolve the problem. Never rename an
instance in PRO-TABLE if that part has been submitted.

NOTES
Figure 6: Family Tree
Clicking [Preview icon] in the dialog box will preview the selected
instance.
Creating Assembly Family Tables

To create a family table for an assembly, you must model the generic
assembly with all of the components needed for all of the instances, and
then add the items that will vary from one instance to the next.
You can add the following items to an assembly family table:
• Assembly-level dimensions such as mate offsets and align offsets

• Assembly-level features
• Assembly parameters
• Components
Retrieving Instances
You can retrieve the various instances using these three methods:
• Use Family Tab after first highlighting the instance and opening it.
• Retrieve the generic model to obtain a menu listing of the family table.
• Retrieve the instance directly if an instance index file exists.

NOTES
MODIFYING FAMILY TABLES

Once you have set up the family table, you can modify either the generic
model or the instances. Each type of change affects the family table
differently:
• Modifying a table-driven dimension – If the dimension is listed in

the table, it is a variable dimension. Changing this dimension updates
the table.
Figure 7: Modifying Variable Dimension
• Modifying a non table-driven dimension – Dimensions that are not

listed in the table are invariable dimensions. Any change causes all
instances to update, regardless of the location of the change.

NOTES
Hole dimension
changed in all
instances
Figure 8: Modifying Invariable Dimension
• Adding a feature to the generic – Adding a feature to the generic

causes it to appear in all of the instances.
Round added
to generic is
automatically
added to
instance
Figure 9: Feature Added to Generic
• Adding a feature to an instance – The system adds a column for the

feature to the family table and enters a Y for that instance, an N for the
generic, and an * (same as generic) for all other instances.

NOTES
Added column
Hole added to
an instance
Figure 10: Adding Feature to Instance
• Deleting a feature from the generic – The system removes the

feature from all instances. If it has a column in the family table, it
removes that column as well.
Chamfer deleted
from generic
automatically
deletes it from
instances
Figure 11: Deleting Feature from Generic

NOTES
• Deleting a feature from the instance – The system places an N in

the column for that feature. If a column does not exist, it creates one
and enters an N for that instance, a Y for the generic, and an * for all
other instances.
Figure 12: Deleting Feature from Instance
• Renaming Instances with a PDM systems – The procedure for

renaming an instance is dependant upon whether the model has been
verified, saved and submitted:
½ Pro/E model not verified, not saved and not submitted:
Rename the instances within Pro/TABLE. Pro/PDM and Pro/Intralink
are not aware of the existence of the instances yet.
½ Pro/E model is verified or is saved, not submitted: Rename

the instances using Pro/E rename functionality. Do not edit table
instance names directly.
½ Pro/E model is verified or is saved and is submitted: Only

rename within Pro/PDM or Pro/Intralink.

NOTES
DEFINING FAMILY TABLE OPTIONS

Pro/ENGINEER offers several useful tools for effectively managing
family tables. Using File > Instance Operations , you can examine each
instance file of a generic that is currently in session and delete any that are
not current with the generic. In addition, you can also use instance index
files and accelerator files to increase the efficiency of family tables.
Using Instance Index Files

An instance index file contains a list of all instances that exist for all
family tables within a directory. It is specific to a directory and has the
name “directory_name.idx.” If an instance index file exists, the system
lists all instances when you retrieve a model. To decrease regeneration
time when retrieving instances, you can create accelerator files.
Using Accelerator Files

Accelerator files decrease the amount of time that the system requires to
directly retrieve an instance. However, they require more hard drive space
since they are roughly the same size as the part file. The system gives part
accelerator files the .xpr extension and appends .xas to assembly
accelerator files.
Using the configuration file option “save_instance_accelerator,” you can

control when the system creates these accelerator files.
DEFINING INHERITANCE FEATURES

Inheritance features allow a one-way associative merge of geometry and
feature data from one part to another. You can select dimensions and
features in the base model for value changes both at the time of the
Inheritance feature creation and later.
Inheritance features are always created by referencing existing parts. An

inheritance feature begins with all of its geometry and data identical to the
part from which it is derived. Then you can identify the geometry and
feature data that can change on the inherited feature without changing the
original part.

NOTES
Using Inheritance Features

• An inheritance feature is used similarly to a merge feature. More than
one inheritance feature can be used in one part.
• It also can be used for creating design variations without the use of a
family table.
Capabilities
• Access to parameters of inherited models, its features, and their usage
provided the prefix "IID_" is used.
• Access to dimensions in drawing mode as well as part and assembly
mode. Dimensions can be shown in a drawing of the derived object,
which is a limitation if you use a merged part in a drawing.
• Multilevel nesting of inheritance features
• Support of RefPattern
• Special Resolve Mode for inheritance failure cases
• Non-geometry elements are copied in addition to 3D Notes
(GeomTols, Surface Finish, and so forth)
• Parent-child relationship
Creating Inheritance Features

There are a few important steps in the creation of an inheritance feature.
1. You first open the Inheritance dialog box and the LOCATE MDL
menu.
2. With the LOCATE MDL menu open the base model. Initially, all
data from the base model are present in the inheritance feature. The
model opens in a separate window. The LOCATION menu opens.
3. Define the placement of the inheritance feature as Default or

External coordinate system .

NOTES
4. Open the VARIED DIMENSIONS dialog box and select base model
dimensions. You may then change the values.
Figure 13: Varied Dimensions Dialog Box
5. Use the Var Feats element definition to open the VARIED

FEATURES dialog box.
Figure 14: Varied Features Dialog Box
6. Select what you would like to define as variable. Either you

suppress them before creating the inheritance feature or you decide
not to do this and will be allowed to do this later.

NOTES
7. You can make the Inheritance feature dependent or independent of

the base model. In the first case you create a dependency between
the derived object and the base model. Changes made in the base
model will be reflected in the derived object. An independent
inheritance feature will not update when the base model is
modified.
8. Use Copy Notes to define whether 3D notes will be copied to the

inheritance feature. 3D notes can be copied to the derived object,
but they will not be modifiable or erasable in the derived object.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory, you create and manipulate part and assembly family
tables. You also learn how to create an inheritance feature and to
compare this with the use of merge parts and family tables.
Method
In Exercises 1 you open the generic instance and define the family table
based on the generic. You also modify the family table.
In Exercises 2 and 3, you create an inheritance feature with and without

varied dimensions and features. You add a varied dimension later. You
also learn how to create a totally new model and add a group of features to
an existing geometry using inheritance features.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Family Tables and Inheritance Features
Icons Description
Verify
Preview
Add item
Add row

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Family Tables

Task 1. Retrieve the generic tire part and review the family table.

2. Open TIRE.PRT. Notice that there are three instances of the

generic that exist: 12_INCH, 13_INCH, and 14_INCH rim diameters.
3. Click The generic > Open .
Figure 15
Task 2. Create a family table for the 12_INCH instance of the Tire
family table, thus “nesting” an instance.
1. In the PART menu, click Family Tab .
Figure 16: Family Table

NOTES
2. Select the 12_INCH instance name and click . Notice the

instance designation on the screen.
Figure 17
3. Click Family Tab and click to add a column to the family

table.
4. Select the revolved protrusion from the model tree to view its
dimensions.
Figure 18
5. Select the 6.00 dimension. Notice it is added to the Item list as

TIRE_WIDTH.
6. Click Info > Switch Dimensions to view the symbolic names of

the other dimensions.

NOTES
7. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, click Parameter . Select the

SIDEWALL_HEIGHT parameter and click Done Sel >
Done/Return > OK .
8. Click to add a row to the family table.
9. Select the New Instance cell, and type [12X4X1] as the name.
10. Type the values for TIRE_WIDTH and SIDEWALL_HEIGHT as

Figure 19: Adding the First Instance
Task 3. Create the remaining instances by copying the new instance.
1. Select the 12X4X1 cell. Click Edit > Copy with Increments .
2. Select SIDEWALL_HEIGHT from the items list and click .
3. Type [1.0] as the increment.
4. Select 1 from the Quantity column, and type [3]. This will be the
quantity for the pattern in the first direction.
5. Click , select TIRE_WIDTH and click .
6. Type [2] as the increment.
7. Select the Quantity for Direction2 (currently 1 ) and type [3].
8. The dialog box should appear as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 20
9. Click OK to create the patterned instances.
Figure 21
Note:
Every time you use Copy with Increments, the system creates
a duplicate of the original instance with a slightly different
name. (In this case the 12x4x10 instance is the duplicate)
10. Right-click the 12x4x10 cell and select Delete Rows > Yes .
Task 4. Edit the names of the tire instances.
1. Edit the table to modify only the instance names as shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Figure 22: 12_INCH Family Table

You can also edit a Family Table with Microsoft Excel by
clicking File > Edit with Excel . This is useful for larger
tables needing more involved editing.
Task 5. Verify the Family Table to ensure that Pro/ENGINEER can

regenerate all instances.
1. Click > Verify . The system regenerates all instances, placing

an arrow next to the instance being regenerated. The results should
appear as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23

NOTES
Note:
Verify also generates a text file called <modelname>.tst.
The Verify option only confirms if the model regenerates

successfully, it does not verify that the model satisfies the
design criteria of the model.
2. close the Verify window.
Task 6. Save the Pro/TABLE file (.ptd ) so you can import it to another
instance.
1. Click File > Export Table > PRO/TABLE file .
2. Edit the name to [12_INCH_EXPORT] and click Save.
Task 7. Preview other instances
1. Select the 12X4X3 instance and click .
2. Close the Preview window and preview a few other instances.
3. Close any Preview windows, and click Ok from the Family Table
dialog.
4. Click Window > Close to close the 12_INCH instance.
Task 8. Edit the family table data for importing.
1. Click Window > Open System Window.
2. The following step assumes a Windows operating system. If you

are on a UNIX station, use an appropriate editor.
3. Type [Notepad 12_inch_export.ptd] and press <ENTER>.
4. Click Search > Replace . Type [12 ] and [13 ] into the fields and
click Replace All . Close the Replace window.
5. From Notepad, click File > Save As , type

[13_INCH_IMPORT.PTD], and click Save .
6. From the Notepad window, click File > Exit.

NOTES
7. Type [Exit] in the DOS window to return to Pro/E.
Task 9. Create the instances for the 13_INCH tire.
1. Click Window > Activate to activate the generic TIRE instance.
2. Click Family Tab , select the 13_INCH instance, and click
3. Click , and select the revolved protrusion from the model tree
to display dimensions.
4. Select the TIRE_WIDTH dimension.
5. Click Parameter , and select SIDEWALL_HEIGHT. Click Done Sel

> Done /Return > OK .
6. Click File > Import Table . Select 13_INCH_IMPORT.PTD and

Click File Open .
Figure 24: 13_Inch Instances
7. Click > Verify . All instances should be successful.
8. Click Close > OK.
9. Save the generic model and close any open windows.
Note:
The 14_INCH tire instances have already been created for you.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Inheritance Features

Task 1. Retrieve the ABSORBER_BAR.PRT and determine where its
coordinate system was created.
1. Open IF_ABSORBER_BAR.PRT.
Figure 25
2. Zoom as shown in the following figure, and notice where the

coordinate system is located.
Figure 26
Task 2. Create an inheritance feature.
1. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open .
2. Select IF_ABSORBER_FASTENER.PRT > Open .

NOTES
3. Note the location of the Csys in the subwindow model.
4. Click Default > OK .
Figure 27: Added Group of Inheritance Feature
Task 3. Modify the value of the hole dimension.
1. Expand the Model Tree to view the entry for the Inheritance
feature. Notice it indicates which model was used as the source for
the inheritance, and also listed the inherited features.
Figure 28

NOTES
2. Right-click Hole id 68 and select Modify.
3. Select the 0.38 dimension. Confirm adding this dimension to the

Inherited Var Dim Table by clicking Yes.
5. Type [0.2] and click Regenerate .
6. Right-click the Inheritance feature from the MODEL TREE and

select Redefine > Var Dims > Define. Notice the modified
dimension was added to the table.
Figure 29
7. Click Cancel > Cancel > Yes.
Task 4. Modify a feature in the Base model.
1. Right-click the Inheritance feature from the MODEL TREE and

select Open Base .
2. Click Regenerate from the IF_ABSORBER_FASTENER

window. Notice the model is unaffected by the diameter change.
3. Modify Round id 70 from [0.1] to [0.25] and click Regenerate .
4. Close the window and activate the IF_ABSORBER_BAR window.
5. Click Regenerate . Notice the round has updated.
6. Save the model, close the window, and click Erase > Not
Displayed.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Inheritance Feature in New Models

Task 1. Create a new part named HEX_BOLT and an Inheritance
Feature. You will see a warning by using two different unit systems.
1. Create a new part called [HEX_BOLT] using the default template.
2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open .
3. Select IF_BOLT.PRT and click Open > Default .
4. Click Var Dims > Define . Select the protrusion shown in the
following figure.
Figure 30
5. Select the 3.00 and 0.95 dimensions. Modify the New Value of d1
to [5.0] as shown in the following figure.
Figure 31: Varied Dimensions Dialog Box

NOTES
6. Click OK .
7. Click Var Feats > Define and select the Hole.
8. Select the Hole entry and click Suppress . Refer to the following
figure.
Figure 32: Varied Features Dialog Box
9. Click Ok > Ok.
Figure 33
10. Save the model, close the window, and click Erase > Not
Displayed.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly

Family Tables
Figure 34: Variations on Wheel Assembly
Task 1. Add the components of the wheel assembly to the family table
and regenerate the rim.
1. Open WHEEL.ASM.
Figure 35
2. Notice that the Assembly was created with an ‘extra’ interfering

component in the center. Some versions of the assembly will use
this component.
NOTES
3. The differences in the styles of rims are based upon family table
instances of the rim component itself. Right-click RIM.PRT and
select Open from the popup menu. Select The generic and click
Open .
4. Click Family Tab and use to preview and examine a few

instances.
5. Click Cancel and Window > Close.
6. If necessary, Activate the WHEEL.ASM window.
7. Click Family Tab > > Component .
8. Select the RIM, TIRE, and SPINDLE_BUSHING from the Model

Tree. Click Done Sel > OK .
Task 2. Create a family table of the assembly by manually editing.
1. Click four times.
2. Edit the instance names as shown in the following figure.
Figure 36: Wheel Family Table
Task 3. Add the rim instance names using the assembly instance names.
Highlight the four instance names, as shown in the following figure.
1. Enter instance names into the RIM column so that the RIM
instances are used in the assembly Family Table. Refer to the
following figure. Hint: Highlight the desired portion of the
neighboring cell and use Copy and Paste.

NOTES
Figure 37: Adding the Rim Instances
2. Type names for the TIRE instances as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 38: Adding the Tire Instance Names
Task 4. Instances with the “SP” designation require a spindle bushing,

while those designated with the “4N” designation do not. Use the Family
Table to remove the spindle from the assembly when lug nuts will be used.
1. Use the Yes/No option in the Spindle Bushing column as shown in

Figure 39: Adding the Spindle Bushing
2. Click > Verify . All instances should be successful.

NOTES
3. Click Close > OK.
4. Save the assembly and close the window.
Task 5. Replace the wheel on a higher level assembly with one of the
instances.
1. Open FT_FRT_SUSP.ASM.
Figure 40
Task 6. Use family tables to replace a Wheel assembly.
1. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace . Use Query Sel to
select the first WHEEL assembly listed in the model tree.
2. Click By Family Table Member > Browse .

NOTES
3. Select the W_12x6-BR-SP instance that you created. Click OK >

Apply > Done . Notice the Hub in the center of the Rim, instead of
the four lugnut holes.
Figure 41: First Wheel Assembly: Replaced with W_12x6-BR-SP
4. Repeat the process to replace the other wheel assembly with an

instance of your choice.
Figure 42: Second Wheel Assembly: Replaced with W_12x6-AR-4N
5. Save the model, close the window, and click File > Erase > Not
Displayed.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you learned that:
• You can rapidly create parts and assemblies using a Family Table.
• Family Tables are invaluable when parts are similar in nature and need
to be controlled with one file.
• Family Tables reduce the number of files that exist on your system
thus making possible the optimal use of system memory.
• The instances of a Family Table are associative.
• Family Tables are useful in replacing components and exploring
design alternatives.
• You can create inheritance features and parts with the capability to
include varied dimensions and features.
• Inheritance features can be used in many cases to avoid the use of a
family table and also for copying from a different model.

Advanced Part Tools and Patterns

In this module you learn how to create geometry in models at the
assembly level utilizing the top-down design functionality in
Pro/ENGINEER.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to
• Create part intersections and bulk items.

• Mirror geometry.
• Create independent features in components and assembly level
features.
• Use relations to control geometry.
• Create assembly-level features.
• Use style surfaces to define solid geometry.
• Create derivative assembly parts from a single part model.
• Create dimension and reference patterns.
• Manipulate existing patterns.
• Maintain patterns from one component to another.
Page 6-1
NOTES
ADVANCED COMPONENT OPERATIONS

Creating Part Intersections
Using the intersection between two components, you can define a new
component.
The Intersect option in the MODIFY PART menu, enables you to trim an
existing part to the volume defined by the intersection with another part.
When you trim a part, the part becomes dependent on the assembly for the
intersect feature.
Figure 1: Intersection Part from Two Tubes
Merging and Cutting Out Parts

You can merge the existing material of one part into another part by
copying the geometry into the model or by always maintaining a
reference. If you copy the geometry, the model is independent of the
reference part.
Using the cutout technique, you can also remove material from one
component, based on the intersecting material of another component. You
can either copy or reference the geometry, creating dependence or
independence. The following figure illustrates the merge and cutout
techniques.

Pag e 6- 2 Fundament al of D esi gn
NOTES
Base component Second component Assembly
Resulting merge Resulting cutout
Figure 2: Using Merge and Cutout
Creating Mirrored Parts

When creating a component at the assembly level, you can use Part >
Mirror to mirror a new component from an original component. You can
mirror a part using either the Reference option or the Copy option.

Adva nced Pa rt Too ls and Patte rn s Pag e 6- 3
NOTES
Original part Temporary assembly
Mirrored component
Figure 3: Mirrored Parts
Creating Assembly-Level Features

In the manufacturing process, some features are not added to the assembly
until the parts are actually assembled. Using Assembly features, you can:
• Model holes, cuts, and slots machined at the time of component

assembly by making them visible only at the assembly level.
• Create datum and surface features to reference when assembling
components and creating part features.
• Define machining operations in assembled weldments.
• Create matching holes/cuts in multiple parts by making the features
visible at the part level as well.
• Create cutaways in the assembly to look behind certain components.

NOTES
Using Assembly Features to Define Part Features

You can create independent part features at the part level instead of the
assembly level.
Visibility Level
By default, Pro/ENGINEER displays a subtractive assembly solid feature

(such as a hole, or cut) in the assembly only, but not in the part or any
subassembly. By specifying the appropriate visibility level, you can view
assembly-level features in the parts themselves or in the subassemblies.
Specifying Models to Intersect
If you use the Add Model and Auto Sel options, the feature cuts material
from all the parts in the specified path, from the sketching plane out to the
specified depth.
If you select Add Model and Manual Sel , you can specify the parts in the
path that the feature should cut.
To redefine the visibility level of an assembly feature or change the

models that it intersects, you can use the Redefine option and select the
INTSCT PARTS element from the dialog box.
Auto Selection Manual Selection of Bottom and Top

Components
Figure 4: Intersection of Assembly Cut

NOTES
Note:
Assembly-level features automatically create family table
instances in the components that you select for intersection.
USING PATTERNING
Using patterning, you create multiple instances of the lead feature. You
manipulate the instances as a single feature. To control the size and
position of pattern instances, you use dimensions or reference an existing
pattern.
Patterning enables you to:
• Increase your productivity by quickly and easily reproducing a feature

multiple times.
• Perform operations on the entire pattern, rather than individual
features.
• Control a pattern parametrically by changing pattern parameters.
• Increase your efficiency by modifying a pattern rather than changing
many individual features.
Pattern Types
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can create two types of patterns to define the
location of instances:
• Dimension Patterns – Uses dimensions to control the position of the

instances.
• Reference Patterns – References an existing pattern.

NOTES
Creating Dimension Patterns

The default method for creating a dimension pattern is to increment the
driving dimensions of the lead feature.
Increment
Number of
Dimensions
instances
Lead feature
Figure 5: Incremental-Driven Pattern
Creating Pattern Tables

With a pattern table, you control the location of the instances by creating
an absolute dimension to the same reference as the leader. You enter each
dimension in tabular format and edit each dimension independently.
Using this technique, you can create complex configurations, such as

unequal spacing or irregular sizes, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Pattern Table Examples
You use a table-driven pattern when a pattern is too complex or irregular

to control using incremental dimensions, for example:

NOTES
• Different variations of the model require multiple pattern

configurations.
• The design intent requires you to locate each instance from the same
references, rather than incrementally from the previous instance.
• Multiple models must share the same pattern.
Table 1: Pattern Table
Table Name: HOLES_1
idx d5 (1.00) d6 (2.00)
1 5.00 2.00
2 5.00 4.00
3 1.00 6.00
4 1.00 8.00
5 5.00 8.00
Redefining Pattern Tables

To create a pattern table, you use an existing pattern to define
incrementally.
To redefine an instance, you use the To Table option to convert the

existing incremental pattern.
To create the pattern shown in the following figure, you convert the
incremental pattern to a table, and then delete two instances.
Figure 7: Converting an Incremental Pattern to a Pattern Table
Note:
Once you have converted a pattern to a table, you cannot
convert it back to its original form.

NOTES
Editing Pattern Tables

When modifying a pattern table, it is important to be able to distinguish
between variable and invariable dimensions.
• Variable dimensions are listed in the pattern table and can vary from
one instance to another.
• All other dimensions for the patterned feature are invariable, so all
instances must share the same value.
• Any change that you make to a variable dimension affects only the
instance that you modify, and the table updates.
• When you change an invariable dimension, it affects all instances.
Table 2: Pattern Table
Table Name: HOLES_2.
!idx d5 (1.00) d6 (2.00)
1 4.00 2.00
2 1.00 5.00
3 4.00 5.00
4 1.00 8.00
5 3.00 6.00
6 5.00 8.00
Modifying radius
affects all
instances.
Figure 8: Modifying Table-Driven Dimensions

NOTES
Modifying radius
affects all
instances.
Figure 9: Modifying Dimensions That Are Not Table-Driven
Editing Features in Patterns

Using Modify > Pattern Table , you can select a feature in the pattern and
make the following modifications:
• Add a new pattern table to a feature, delete an existing table pattern,

and modify instances.
• Add a new pattern table to the feature.
• Delete an existing pattern table.
• Assign a new name to an existing pattern table.
• Change which pattern table to use for the feature upon regeneration.
• Save a pattern table to the hard drive using the name
PATT_TABLE_NAME.PTB.
• Read in a pattern table from the hard drive.
Creating Design Variations in Patterns

By adding multiple pattern tables to a single feature, you can create
different variations within the design, enabling change from one to the
other using the Switch functionality.
Figure 10: Using a Pattern Table for Design Variations

NOTES
Using Patterns on Multiple Models

You can save a pattern table in a file, and then use it to drive another
pattern by reading the file into another model. This technique ensures that
pattern tables have the same configuration on different models, and saves
time.
Figure 11: Using a Pattern Table to Maintain a Relation Between Two Parts
Creating Patterns in Assembly Mode

You can pattern components in Assembly mode the same way that you
pattern features in Part mode, using both dimension and reference patterns.
In the following figure, the first bolt references the lead hole.
Figure 12: Patterning Components in an Assembly
• You can use a reference pattern to assemble a component to each

instance of another patterned component in the assembly. You can also
reference a patterned feature, such as a hole in a part.
• For a dimension pattern, you can use a constraint, such as Mate

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create patterns, part, and features within the
context of the assembly.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create the left knuckle part for the go-cart by mirroring
in a temporary assembly. The left knuckle is a mirror image of the right
knuckle that already exists.
In Exercise 2, you create the steering wheel and airbag cover parts from
the steering wheel master model.
In Exercise 3, you create a simple identical pattern of a hole incrementally

on a brake disk. Then you convert the pattern into a table to gain more
control over the location of the holes.
In Exercise 4, you assemble the lug nuts to the wheels by creating a radial
pattern. After assembling the first nut, you assemble the remaining nuts by
following the existing pattern.
Tools
Icons Description
Show
View Repaint
Apply and close

Save
Select All
Insert Datum Plane

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Mirroring the Knuckle Part

Task 1. Create an empty assembly and assemble the right knuckle as the
first component. Create a datum plane in the part about which to mirror
the part.

2. To create a new assembly, click File > New . In the NEW dialog
box, click Assembly. Clear the Use Default Template check box.
Type [mirror_knuckle] and click OK . In the NEW FILE
OPTIONS dialog box, select Empty and click OK .
Note:
Do not create default datums in this assembly since you only
want to reference the two components to each other.
3. To assemble the first component, click Component > Assemble .

Select RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT and click Open > Done/Return .
Notice that the system places the component in its default
orientation.
Figure 13: RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT
4. Click Modify > Mod Part . Select the part.
5. Click View > Layers . Select the DATUMS layer.
6. Click > > Close .

NOTES
7. Click [Insert Datum Plane] > Offset . Select the SIDE datum
plane.
8. Click Enter Value . Type [–5] and click .
9. Click Done until you reach the ASSEMBLY menu.
Figure 14: New Datum Plane for Mirroring
Task 2. Create the new left-knuckle part.
1. Click Component > Create .
2. In the COMPONENT CREATE dialog box, click Part and Mirror .

Type name [left_knuckle]. Click OK .
3. In the MIRROR PART dialog box, click Copy . Select

RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT.
4. Select DTM5 on the RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT. Click OK .
Note:
You do not use an assembly-level datum because this would
create a dependency to the assembly. Since you used a part
datum from the original part, you can now delete the assembly
file.

NOTES
Figure 15: Mirrored Part
5. Save LEFT_KNUCKLE.PRT. Click .

Type [left_knuckle], instead of accepting the assembly name.
6. Do not save the assembly. Erase the assembly from session.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Assembly Features
Figure 16: Completed SHELL.ASM with Spline Cut
Task 1. Open the shell assembly and obtain information about it.
1. Open SHELL.ASM
2. Click Info > Bill of Materials . Select Top Level > OK . The model
consists of three components. Click Close to close the Information
Window.
3. Shade the assembly.
4. Click Info > Feature . Using Query Sel, select the Cut feature
[F8(Cut:Shell)]. In the INFORMATION window, notice that the cut
was made in Assembly mode as an assembly feature. Close the
window.
Task 2. Notice that the assembly feature intersects the outer casing.
Change the intersection of the feature to include the inner casing.
1. Click Feature > Redefine . Select the Cut feature.
2. Click Intsct Parts > Define .
3. Click Sel By Menu . Select SHELL_INNER.PRT.
4. Click Select > Done Sel . Leave the visibility level unchanged.
Click OK > OK to finish.
5. Repaint to view the results. Shade the assembly again and make
sure that the cut goes through both shells.

NOTES
Figure 17: Assembly Feature
Task 3. The assembly cut visibility level is set to the top level. Verify
this by inspecting the parts individually.
1. Open SHELL_OUTER.PRT. Note that the cut is not visible in Part

mode.
2. Close the SHELL_OUTER.PRT window.
3. Click Window > Activate to return to the assembly.
4. While in Assembly mode, try to add a feature to the

SHELL_OUTER.PRT. Click Modify > Mod Part . Select
SHELL_OUTER.PRT. In the MESSAGE AREA, read the message
and click Confirm .
5. Click Done from the MODIFY PART menu. The assembly feature
returns.
Task 4. Make the assembly feature visible at the Part level.
1. Click Feature > Redefine . Select the Cut feature. In the CUT
dialog box, click Intsct Parts > Define and click Remove twice to
remove both models from the list of intersected components.
2. From the LEVEL list, click Part Level .
3. Select SHELL_OUTER.PRT and SHELL_INNER.PRT. Click OK >

OK to complete the feature.
4. Open the SHELL_INNER.PRT. The assembly feature should

appear. Open the SHELL_OUTER.PRT. The assembly feature
should appear here also.

NOTES
5. Close the part windows and reactivate the assembly.
Figure 18: Assembly Feature Example
6. [Optional] Create an assembly cut as shown in the preceding

figure.
7. Save the assembly and erase it from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Pattern Tables

Task 1. Create a dimension pattern of the lead hole using increments to
drive the pattern.
1. Open BRAKE_DISK_VENTED.PRT.
2. Click Feature > Pattern ; select the small hole feature.
3. Click Identical > Done .
4. Select the 20.0 angular dimension. Type [5]. Select the 2.000
radius dimension; type [0.5].
Increment angle
again for second
direction.
Increment these
dimensions in the
first direction.
Figure 19: Hole Pattern Dimensions
5. Click Done ; type [4] as the number of instances.
6. Select the 20.0 angle dimension again; type [30].
7. Click Done ; type [12] as the number of instances.

NOTES
Task 2. Change the hole pattern to a table and edit the table to remove
the extra holes.
Figure 20: Modified Hole Pattern
1. Click Redefine; select one of the holes.
2. In the HOLES dialog box, click the Pattern button. Select To

Table .
3. To specify the pattern name, type [holes1]. The system should

inform you that it has created the pattern table HOLES1.
4. Click Done /Return > .
5. Click Done to return to the PART menu..
6. To edit the pattern table, click Modify > Pattern Table .
7. In the TABLES dialog box, select HOLES1. Click Actions > Edit .
8. To delete the rows in the editor, select the rows beginning from idx
8 to idx 15 as shown in the following figure. Click Edit > Delete .
In the DELETE/ROWS COLUMN dialog box, click Rows > OK .

NOTES
Figure 21
1. Similarly, delete the rows from idx 24 to 31 and from idx 40 to 47.
Tips & Techniques:

You do not have to renumber the idx column to account for the
removed holes. The instance index numbers have to be unique,
but they do not have to be consecutive.
2. Exit the editor. Click OK and Regenerate .
Task 3. Incorporate holes into the solid disk brake. According to the
design intent, it should have the same hole pattern as the vented disk. To
accomplish this, save the pattern table to the hard drive so that the system
can read it into another part.
1. Click Modify > Pattern Table . Select the HOLES1 pattern table.
2. Click Actions > Write . The system saves the pattern table
information for the HOLES1 configuration to the hard drive
(another pattern table called HOLES2 already exists on the hard
drive). Click OK.
3. Save the model.

NOTES
Task 4. A variation on the design requires a different configuration of

holes. Add another pattern table to the hole feature by reading it in to the
vented disk part from the hard drive.
1. Click Modify > Pattern Table . Select HOLES1 in the TABLES

dialog box.
2. Read in the HOLES2.PTB file. Click Actions > Read . Select

HOLES2.PTB. Click Open . The system then informs you that it
created pattern table HOLES2.
3. Switch the pattern to use the table that you read in. Select HOLES2
Click Actions > Activate .
4. Click Ok > Regenerate to view the new hole pattern.
Note:
You may use the icons in the TABLES dialog box to perform
operations such as Activate, Read, Write, etc.
Figure 22: Alternate Hole Pattern
Task 5. Use the pattern tables on another model. Drive an existing hole
on the disk solid part.
1. Open BRAKE_DISK_SOLID.PRT.
2. Click Feature > Pattern . Select the hole. Click Identical > Done .

NOTES
3. Click Table . Select the 20.0 angle dimension; then select the 2.000
placement radius. Click Done .
Note:
It is important to select these dimensions in the correct order
because this determines the order of the columns in the table.
You must follow the order of the columns in the pattern table
that you saved on the hard drive.
4. Click Read . Select HOLES1.PTB and click Open ..
5. Click Read . Select HOLES2.PTB and click Open .
6. You have read the two pattern tables into the part. Click Done >
Done. Notice that the Holes1 pattern appears.
7. Click Modify > Pattern Table and select HOLES2.
8. Click Actions > Activate > Ok > Done .
9. Click Regenerate and the model appears with the Holes2 pattern.
10. Save both models and erase them from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Patterning Components in Assembly

Mode
Task 1. Assemble the first nut to the lead hole; then reference pattern it
to add the other nuts to the assembly.
1. Open the WHEEL.ASM assembly file.
2. Click Component > Assemble . Select LUG_NUT.PRT.
3. Select Mate from the CONSTRAINTS, TYPE list. Mate the tapered
surface on the nut to the tapered surface inside the hole. This fully
defines the placement. Click OK to finish.
Mate the
conic surfaces.
Figure 23: Lug Nut Assembly References
4. Click Pattern from the Component menu . Select the lug nut.
5. Click Ref Pattern > Done .
6. Save the model and erase the entire assembly from memory. Use
to erase all components.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you learned:
• That you need to be concerned about establishing external references

when creating merge parts, features on a part while in the assembly,
mirror parts and assembly level features. Use the Design Manager to
control what references you define.
• How to access the different levels of the assembly. How to create a
style surface.
• That you can create a single part made of surface geometry that
represent the final assembly and use that part to create the individual
components, thus ensuring proper fit.
• The differences among pattern types and when they should be used.
• How to create a simple pattern in two directions.
• How to create a pattern table.
• How to export pattern information and import it into another model to
save time.
• How to pattern components in assembly mode.

Local Groups and User-Defined Features

In this module you learn how to use local groups to organize your
models. You also learn how to create and use libraries of commonly
used geometry by defining user-defined features (UDFs).
Objectives
• Create and manipulate local groups.

• Reuse data.
• Work on multiple features as if they were one feature.
• Break the dependency of features within groups.
• Create and place user-defined features (UDF).
Page 7-1
NOTES
LOCAL GROUPS
A group is a set of features within a part or a set of components in an
assembly that behave as a single entity. A Local Group is a group that you
create within a model.
A Local Group:
• Is particular to the model in which it is created.

• Cannot be transferred to another model.
• Appears in the Model Tree as a single feature with a substructure.
Figure 1: Model Tree Before and After Creating a Local Group
Manipulating Groups
On a local group you can perform various operations such as suppression,
deletion, or reordering and the group still behaves as a single feature.
You can also:
• Pattern and Unpattern the group.

• Ungroup it.
• Break the dependencies that develop between features.
• Redefine the group to add features.
Patterning Features
Grouped features can use the same patterns as other regular features.
When patterning, you can access all dimensions of all features in the
group.

NOTES
Figure 2: Group Patterning
You can create some configurations in local group patterns that you
cannot create in reference patterns, as shown in the following figure.
Cannot reference
pattern the draft, but
you can create a group
pattern.
Figure 3: Reference Patterning
You can break the group pattern by unpatterning it into individual groups
with their own dimensions that you can then modify or delete individually.
Figure 4: Unpatterned Groups

Local G roup s and U se r- Defi ned F eatu re s Pag e 7- 3
NOTES
Ungrouping
You can break a group into individual features so that you can work on
them individually.
Figure 5: Ungrouping of One Group
Breaking Dependencies
When you create a group, the system creates a dependency between the
original group and the copied or patterned group.
When you unpattern or ungroup the group, it still maintains a dependency

at the feature level. Using Modify > Make Indep , you can break this
dependency.
Figure 6: Height of One Group Made Independent

NOTES
USER-DEFINED FEATURES
UDFs are groups of features, references, and dimensions that can be saved
for future use on models. UDFs save time and energy by helping establish
a library of common geometry. The following figure shows a UDF that
can be reused.
1. Cylindrical
protrusion
2. Rib
3. Copy of ribs
4. Coaxial hole
Figure 7: Screw Boss Geometry
Creating UDFs
To create a UDF, model the geometry that you want to save and then
define the UDF by following these steps:
• Beginning the definition and specifying storage.

½ At this stage, specify whether you would like to store the UDF
as a Stand Alone feature or a Subordinate feature.
• Storing reference parts.

½ When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a reference
part to use later. The system creates a copy of the current part and
assigns it the name UDFname_GP.PRT.
½ If you store the UDF as a subordinate feature, the current

model automatically becomes the reference part.

NOTES
• Naming the group.

½ When the system stores the file, it appends the file extension
.gph The UDF should have a valid filename that is unique and
descriptive.
• Selecting features.
½ Use Query Sel or the Model Tree to select the model features
to include in the UDF.
• Creating external reference prompts.
½ These are user-defined prompts that help you to select
corresponding references while placing the UDF in a new model.
Placement Side plane

plane
Front plane
Figure 8: External References for Screw Boss
• Defining variable dimensions and elements.As you select features for

the UDF, you can do the following:
½ Make some or all the driving dimensions variable.
½ Increase the UDFs flexibility by creating variable elements.
½ Define prompts and logic statements.
½ Create predefined variations of the UDF.

NOTES
• Completing the definition.

½ Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can click
OK in the dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the reference
part to the hard drive. The system assigns the UDF the name
UDFname.gph.
Placing UDFs
When you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group within
the new model containing the UDF features.
Figure 9: New Part Needs a Screw Boss
You can place a UDF file, using the following steps:
• Select the driving options to control the geometry. To control the

geometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent or
UDF-driven.
• Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, if necessary.
• Type values for any variable dimensions that you created and select
placement references.

NOTES
Placement plane
Side plane
Front plane
Figure 10: Selecting References for UDF Placement

• Specify the display for invariable dimensions as Normal, Read Only,
or Blank.
Figure 11: Invariable Dimensions Blanked
• Define any optional elements.

• Finish the placement.
Creating Assembly-Level UDFs

By creating user-defined features at the assembly level, you can create
component groupings and place them as a single unit.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create and manipulate a local group. You also
create and utilize common library components known as UDFs.
Method
In Exercise 1, you use local groups to pattern vented disks for the brakes
of a go-cart. You work on multiple features as if they are one feature and
break the dependency of features within a group
In Exercise 2, you first gain mastery over the procedure for creating a
UDF. You then place the UDF in different models.
In Exercise 3, you create a UDF from the end spline of an axle.
In Exercise 4, you place the spline-end UDF on the end of an axle part.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Local Groups and User-Defined Features
Icons Description
Select Geometry
Apply and close
Save

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Local Groups

Task 1. Retrieve a part and resume currently suppressed geometry in it.

2. Open BRAKE_DISK_VENTED.PRT.
Figure 12
3. Click Utilities > Model Player .
Figure 13: MODEL PLAYER Dialog Box
4. Click to ‘rewind’ the model.
5. Click repeatedly to step through each feature in the model.

Notice that a single ‘blade’ is composed of four features.

NOTES
Figure 14: Blade Geometry
6. Click Finish .
Task 2. Create a local group containing the features comprising the

blade.
1. Click Feature > Group > Local Group , and type [blade] as the
name for the group.
2. Press and hold <SHIFT>, then select Protrusion id 50 and

Round id 148 in the MODEL TREE.
3. Click Done Select > Done.
4. Expand the group in the model tree.
Figure 15
Task 3. Pattern the group radially around the disk.
1. Click Pattern from the Group menu.
2. Select the Group BLADE in the MODEL TREE. All of the

dimensions for the group appear.

NOTES
Figure 16
3. Select the 30° angle dimension and type [30] as the increment.
4. Click Done , type [12] as the number of instances, and click Done.
Figure 17: Finished Blade Pattern

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Group Options

Task 1. Open the model and create a group pattern.
1. Open LOCAL_GROUP.PRT.
2. Click Feature > Group > Local Group and type [volcano].
3. Select the protrusion, the draft, and the hole from the Model Tree,
and click > . Notice the group branch in the Model Tree.
Figure 19: Group Branch in Model Tree

NOTES
4. While still in the GROUP menu, click Pattern and select anywhere
on the group.
5. Select the dimension to increment in the first direction, as shown in

Figure 20: Dimension to Increment in First Direction
6. Type [3.0], click Done and type [3].
7. Select the dimension to increment in the second direction, as

Figure 21: Direction to Increment in the Second Direction
8. Type [5.0], click Done and type [2].

NOTES
Figure 22: Created Pattern
Task 2. Create a reference pattern on the group.
1. Using , select the edge and click > Round Edges .
Figure 23: Rounding Edges
2. Drag to a radius of approximately 0.20.
3. Select the round and click > Pattern .
Task 3. Investigate the Unpattern option.
1. Select any group and click > Modify.

NOTES
Figure 24
2. Modify 3 VOLCANOS to [2] and Regenerate .
3. Modify the quantity back to [3] and Regenerate .
4. Modify the draft angle to [13] and Regenerate .
5. Modify the draft angle back to [7] and Regenerate .
6. Modify the dimension as shown in the following figure, to [3] and

Regenerate . (Hint: Query Select the protrusion within the group).
Figure 25: Modified Dimensions
7. Modify the dimension back to [5] and Regenerate .
8. Notice that during the previous modifications, the members of the

group functioned as instances in a pattern.

NOTES
9. Click Feature > Group > Unpattern and select any group. In the
Message Area, read the prompt. Notice that the group can not be
unpatterned due to the reference pattern.
Task 4. To investigate the Group manipulation possibilities, recreate the

model. First delete the patterns, include the round in the group and then
create the group pattern again.
1. Delete the reference pattern. In the Model Tree, select Pattern
(Round) and > Delete Pattern .
Figure 26
2. In the Model Tree, select Pattern (VOLCANO) and > Delete

Pattern .
Figure 27

NOTES
Task 5. Redefine the Group.
1. In the Model Tree, select GROUP (VOLCANO) and >

Redefine.
2. In the FEATURES area of the GROUP HEAD dialog box, click ,

select the ROUND, and click Done Sel > . Notice that the round
is added to the group.
Task 6. Recreate the group pattern using the instructions outlined in the
earlier steps.
1. Pattern the Group. Use a vertical increment of [3.0], and a

horizontal increment of [5.0].
Figure 28: Reconstructing the Model
Task 7. Investigate the Group manipulation possibilities.
1. Click Feature > Group > Unpattern and select any group.
2. Click > and read the prompt.
3. Modify the dimension on the protrusion to [5.0] as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 29: Modifying Dimensions
4. Click Regenerate , and notice now groups can be repositioned

individually.
5. Modify the radius on the round as shown in the following figure,

then Regenerate . Notice that the change affects all groups.
Figure 30: Modifying Radius
6. Click Feature > Delete and select the hole, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 31: Deleting Hole Feature

NOTES
7. Click > . Notice the deletion of the feature forced the

deletion of the group.
8. Delete the group in the upper left corner using the Model Tree.
Task 8. Investigate the UnGroup option.
1. Click Feature > Group > Ungroup . Select the groups, as shown in
the following figure. Click > .
Figure 32: Selecting Groups to Ungroup
2. Delete the holes from the groups just selected. Notice you can now
delete individual features from the groups.
Figure 33: Deleted Holes
3. Modify the radius value as shown in the following figure, then

Regenerate .

NOTES
Figure 34: Modifying Radius Value
4. Notice that the dimension values are still linked after being
unpatterned and ungrouped.
Task 9. Investigate the Make Independent option.
1. Click Modify > Make Indep > Dimension . Select the protrusion
(not the draft), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 35: Selecting Protrusion
2. Select the 2.0 height dimension, and read the prompt.
3. Select the two protrusions without holes and click > >
4. Modify the height of the two protrusions previously selected to

[3.0] and regenerate. Notice now independent feature
modifications are possible.

NOTES
Figure 36: Protrusions with Modified Height

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating UDFs

Task 1. Create a UDF from the end spline of the axle.
1. Open AXEL_END.PRT.
Figure 37
2. Click Feature > UDF Library > Create.
3. Type [SPLINE_END] as the name and click Subordinate > Done .
4. Select the features shown in the following figure.
Figure 38: UDF Features Highlighted in Model Tree

NOTES
5. Click Done > Done /Return .
Task 2. Provide prompts for each reference that was used to create these
features.
1. Read the message in the Message Area. Notice the highlighted

edge in the model. Type [end edge] as the prompt and click .
2. For the axis, click Single > Done/Return , and type [main axis]
and click .
3. For the datum plane, type [datum plane along axis] and
click .
4. For the surface, click Single > Done /Return . Type [end
surface] click .
6. For the next reference. Type [cylindrical surface] and click

.
7. Review your prompts using the Next and Previous options. If

necessary, correct any of the prompts, using Enter Prompt. When
all prompts are correct, click Done/Return .
Task 3. Define the optional elements for the UDF to make it more
flexible for future use. Make the depth of the spline cuts and the hole
depth option variable.
1. Click Var Dims > Define .
Figure 39

NOTES
2. Select the 1.25 dimension defining the length of the cuts. Click
Done/Return > Done/Return .
3. Specify a prompt for this dimension. Type [spline length].
4. Define a variable element. Click Var Elements > Define .
5. Specify the feature for which to define variable elements. Select

the hole and click All > Done.
6. Click Done Sel > OK . The system creates the SPLINE_END.GPH

file on the hard drive.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Placing UDFs

Task 1. Place the SPLINE_END UDF on the ends of the axle part.
1. Open the AXEL.PRT and click The generic > Open .
Figure 40
2. Click Feature > Create > User Defined .
3. Select the SPLINE_END.GPH file and click Open .
4. Notice that the system automatically retrieves the AXLE_END

model in a subwindow.
5. Relocate the AXLE_END window such that you can read the
messages in the main window. Also reposition/reorient the AXLE
part such that you can clearly view all the features.
Note:
According to this design intent scenario, place the UDF so it is
independent from the original.
6. Click Independent > Done > Same Dims > Done .
7. Type [1.00] as the spline length.

NOTES
Note:
According to this design intent scenario, you should not be
able to modify the dimensions easily after placement, but you
should still be able to view them.
8. Click Read Only > Done to make all other dimensions visible but
not modifiable.
Task 2. One by one, specify appropriate references on the axle part
1. Select the End Edge as shown in the following figure.
Figure 41
2. Select the Main Axis as shown in the following figure.
Figure 42
3. Select the Datum Plane Along Axis as shown in the following

figure.

NOTES
Figure 43
4. Select the End Surface as shown in the following figure.
Figure 44
5. Select the Cylindrical Surface as shown in the following figure.
Figure 45
6. Click Ok > Ok to accept the arrow directions.
7. Since you selected the hole to have variable elements, the system
allows you to change it. Select Depth One and change it to
Variable .
8. Type [0.75] as the depth and click > Done .

NOTES
Figure 46: Finished UDF on Axle
Task 3. Attempt to modify the placed UDF.
1. Try to modify the cuts creating the spline end. Notice that all of the
dimensions highlight. Select the dimensions for the width of each
cut. Notice that this is a read-only dimension, so you cannot
modify it.
Task 4. Add another independent UDF to the other end of the axle part,
1. Use the same options as you did for the first UDF.
2. Make sure that you select the lower edge and flip both datum
plane arrows to match the correct orientation of the UDF on this
end of the model.
Figure 47: Finished Axle
3. Save the models, close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXCERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Adding the Splined

UDF to the Hub
Task 1. Place the UDF on the hub part.
1. Open the R_HUB.PRT.
Figure 48
2. Click Feature > Create > User Defined .
3. Select the SPLINE_END UDF and click Open.
Note:
According to this design intent scenario, place the UDF so it
can be updated from the original.
4. Click UDF Driven > Done > Same Dims > Done .
5. Type [0.5] as the spline length.
Note:
According to this design intent scenario, you should not show
the dimensions in the model.

NOTES
6. Click Blank > Done for the other dimensions.
Task 2. Follow the prompts and select appropriate references on the

hub.
1. Select references appropriately. Refer to the following figures.
Figure 49: End Edge and Main Axis
Figure 50: Datum Plane Along Axis and End Surface
Figure 51: Cylindrical Surface.
2. Complete the UDF using the Hole defaults.
Figure 52: Finished Hub

NOTES
Task 3. Investigate Blanked dimensions
1. Modify the placed UDF. Notice that the only dimension that
displays is the overall length because you blanked the other
dimensions.
Figure 53: Blanked Dimensions
Task 4. Change the UDF file and observe how it affects the UDF-driven
spline end in the hub, but does not affect the independent spline end in the
axle.
1. Open AXLE_END.PRT.
2. Modify the width of one of the cuts from 0.2 to 0.1 and
regenerate.
Figure 54: Change Width of Cut in AXLE_END.PRT
3. Activate the R_HUB.PRT window.
4. Click Feature > Group > Update > Done/Return > Done .

NOTES
5. Regenerate the model to see the changes.
Figure 55: Updated Hub
Task 5. Try to make the same modification to the axle part that you
made to the UDF earlier.
1. Open the AXLE.PRT and click The generic > Open .
2. Click Feature > Group . Notice that Update is unavailable.

Because Independent was chosen for the UDF. Therefore, it is not
associated with the SPLINE_END UDF file.
3. Save the models, close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not
Displayed .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module you have learned:
• How to create local groups.

• How to manipulate groups.
• How to reuse data.
• How to work on multiple features as if they were one.
• How to break the dependency of features within groups.
• How to create user defined features (UDF).
• How to place UDF’s on new models.

Advanced Assembly Tools

In this module you learn different ways to manipulate assemblies.
You do this by modifying subassemblies and components.
Objectives
• Modify subassemblies.
• Reposition and add components.
• Replace components.
• Repeat component placement.
• Create exploded assembly views.
Page 8-1
NOTES
MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES
Once you have created an assembly, you can manipulate it by modifying
its subassemblies, repositioning or replacing components, and creating
exploded views.
Modifying Subassemblies
Because Pro/ENGINEER assembles a subassembly into the current
assembly as a single component, it applies component operations to the
entire subassembly.
You must perform operations on components within the subassembly to

which they belong. However, you can use the Mod SubAsm option to
redefine, delete, assemble, and replace components without displaying the
subassembly in its own window.
Restructuring Subassemblies
Using the Restructure option, you can easily move assembly components
from one level to another, for example, from the top-level assembly to a
lower subassembly.
You can also restructure to a new subassembly by using Component >

Create > SubAssy .
Figure 1: Restructuring an Assembly

NOTES
Note:
When restructuring a component, the system sometimes
requires you to reselect its assembly references to reference
geometry in the desired level of the assembly. Although it
assembles the part in a new level or subassembly, it maintains
the original assembly references, resulting in external
references. These references should be redefined to avoid
possible component placement failure.
Repositioning Components
Using various methods, you can reposition components after constraining
them. The method that you use depends on the type of change that you
make, and the extent to which you want to control the component after
making the change.
• Redefining or rerouting components – This can be used to

assemble a component into a different position.
• Using offset constraints – To translate a component to a different
position, you can use the Mate Offset or Align Offset placement
constraints. To create angle dimensions, you can create a datum and
use the Angle option when assembling.
• Using the package move functionality – By packaging, you can
drag a component to a new position and automatically add offsets
while moving it.
• Using assembly skeletons – You can use skeletons to represent the
framework of a moving assembly.
• Temporarily translating or rotating a component – You can
temporarily translate and/or rotate a component away from its
placement position—with respect to the axis of an assembly
coordinate system—without changing the component’s constraints.
• Using Pro/PROGRAM –Using the PRO/PROGRAM functionality, you
can set up the system so that it prompts you automatically for the
values of component dimensions.

Adva nced A ssemb ly Tools Pag e 8- 3
NOTES
Replacing Components
Using Adv Utils > Replace , you can remove one component from an
assembly and replace it with a different one without deleting the
component and reassembling.
You can use the following tools to replace components within an

assembly.
• By Family Table Member • Manually

• By Interchange Assembly • By New Copy
• By Layout • By Shrinkwrap
Note:
When replacing a component, the system places the new
component in the same order in which it assembled the
original component. If you simply deleted the component and
assembled a new one, you would have to reorder the new
component to return it to its original place.
Replace By Family Table Member

Instances of a family table are automatically interchangeable as long as
they were created from the same generic instance, and each instance
contains the required references. The system can also replace with child
components if those references are available as well. For example, both
pin instances below have the same ‘head’ feature (required for Mate
constraint) and also the hole (used for a child clevis pin component).
Figure 2: Instances of the Pin

NOTES
Note:
When using any of the replacement methods, if the replaced
component has child components assembled to it, you may
have to replace the children’s missing references by redefining
or rerouting them to the new component.
Replace By Interchange Assembly

An Interchange Assembly is a special type of assembly that can contain
two types of components:
• Simplify Components
• Functional Components
Both types allow components to be interchanged with other compatible
members of the interchange assembly. The interchange assembly can be
saved and used repeatedly.
Simplify Components
• Used with Simplified Reps for Substitution.
Functional Components
• Used with the component advanced utilities Replace functionality,
you can set up functional interchangeability between two or more
independently modeled parts or assemblies.
• Allows functionally equivalent components to be easily exchanged in
an assembly.
• Uses reference tags between components for assembly or child
references.
• Use this method to change the configuration of the model rather than
to simplify the model.

NOTES
Figure 3: An Interchange Assembly with Functional Components
Figure 4: Using an Interchange Assembly
Replace By Layout
If adequate global datum references have been established between two or
more components and a Layout, the components may be interchanged.
Replace Manually
Using Replace Component > Manual , you can use placement constraints
or packaging techniques to place the new component as you would in a
normal assembly.

NOTES
Replace By New Copy

This option will replace the selected component with a new component.
This new component is an independent copy of the entire original model
and is given a name during the replace process.
Replace By Shrinkwrap
Allows you to select a component that contains a shrinkwrap of the
component to be replaced.
Repeating Component Placement

You have the ability to repeat the placement constraints of a component to
place additional instances of the same component into an assembly. This
reduces the number of selections required since you do not have to re-
select all of the references on the component that you are placing. The
system also allows you to skip redundant references, such as a common
mating plane.
Figure 5: Repeated Placement of Bolt
Creating Exploded Views

Using View > Explode , you can generate a default explode state for an
assembly. Exploding an assembly affects only the display of the
assembly—the system does not alter actual distances between
components.

NOTES
Figure 6: Exploded Assembly View
The default explode may or may not explode your assembly as desired. To
modify the exploded positions, you can use Modify > Mod Expld to
generate one or multiple exploded states. Within each exploded state you
can drag components into a desired position using the EXPLODE
POSITION dialog box, as shown in the following figure. In addition, offset
lines may be added between components.
Figure 7: Setting Explode Positions

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you manipulate components in an assembly.
Method
In Exercise 1, you restructure a component in an assembly rather than
deleting and reassembling it.
In Exercise 2, you create an interchange assembly of components that

have the same function in an assembly but are physically different.
In Exercise 3, you demonstrate how to quickly assemble the same

component numerous times using the Repeat option.
Table 1: Advanced Assembly Tools Icons

Icons Description
Fix to current position
Assemble at default placement
Change orientation of constraint
Preferences
Remove selected constraint
Specify new constraint
Show component in assembly window
Show component in separate window

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Restructuring the Carburetor

Task 1. Investigate the top-level assembly.

2. Open CARB_RESTRUCT.ASM.
Figure 8: The Carburetor Assembly
3. View the structure of all of the components in the Model Tree as

Figure 9

NOTES
4. Notice the assembly and the subassembly structure. Also notice

that the VALVE is the part of the SHAFT subassembly.
Task 2. The valve part is in the shaft subassembly, which would make
the valve shaft physically impossible to assemble into the housing part.
Change the level at which the valve part was placed.
1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Restructure .
2. Select the VALVE.PRT. This marks the component as moving.
Figure 10
3. Select VALVE.ASM as the target. In the MODEL TREE, notice that

the VALVE.PRT is now part of the VALVE.ASM.
Figure 11: The Valve Moved into the Valve Assembly
4. Click Done .

NOTES
Task 3. The handle could be assembled to the shaft before assembling

to the valve. Move the handle part into the shaft assembly.
1. Click Restructure. Select the HANDLE.PRT from the Model Tree.
2. Select SHAFT.ASM as the target. The Model Tree should display

Figure 12: Moving the Handle
2. Click Done.
3. Save the assembly, close all windows and click File > Erase Not
Displayed.
Task 4. Determine if the subassembly has any problems.
1. Open SHAFT.ASM. Notice that the assembly fails to regenerate

the handle placement, but displays the handle in its last known
position.
Figure 13

NOTES
2. In the RESOLVE FEAT menu, click Quick Fix > Redefine >
Confirm.
3. With Placement checked, click Done .
4. Read the prompt. Click Confirm .
5. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box notice that the

assembly references are missing.
Figure 14
Task 5. Replace the missing references with surfaces on ARM1.PRT.
1. In the dialogue box, Click and . The component should

display in a subwindow as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15

NOTES
2. Select the cylindrical surfaces of the ARM1.PRT and the

HANDLE.PRT as shown in the following figure. This creates an
Insert constraint.
Figure 16
3. Select the flat circular surfaces on the ARM1.PRT and

HANDLE.PRT, as shown in the following figure. This creates a
Mate constraint.
Figure 17
4. Click to accept the [0.0] offset.
5. Select the 0.0 Offset for the Mate constraint, and select
Coincident from the drop down list.

NOTES
Figure 18
6. Click OK to finalize the component placement.
7. Click Yes to resume the assembly.
Figure 19
Displayed.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Replacing the Brake Hub Assembly

Components
Task 1. Attempt to replace the DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT by
deleting it from the assembly.
1. Open BRAKE_HUB.ASM.
Figure 20
2. Click Component > Delete . Select DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT.

Notice that the system highlights a BRAKE_CALIPER because it is
a child of the disk.
3. Click Quit > Quit Del/Sup .
4. Click Window > Close.
Task 2. Create a new interchange assembly called DISKS.ASM so you

can replace the disk brake and preserve the parent/child relationships.
1. Click File > New > Assembly > Interchange .
2. Type [DISKS] as the name and click OK .
3. Click Component > Add .
4. Select DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT and click Open .
5. Click Add > Functional Component > OK .
6. Select DISK_BRAKE_SOLID PRT and click Open .

NOTES
Figure 21
7. Click OK > Done/Return .
Task 3. Through the interchange assembly, set up the equivalent

references on the components using tags. First, determine the references
that the hollow disk has in the brake hub assembly
1. Click Reference Tag > Auto Tag . Select the

DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW from the Model Tree.
2. Read the prompt.
3. Select the BRAKE_HUB.ASM and click Open.
Figure 22: AutoTag Creation Dialog Box

You can control the orientation of the model shown in the
AutoTag Creation dialog box using the mouse.

NOTES
Task 4. Define tag names.
1. For the highlighted surface, type [MATE_SURFACE] as the tag name

and press <ENTER>.
2. For the highlighted axis, type [ALIGN_AXIS] as the name and

press <ENTER>. The dialog box should display as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 23: Specifying the Tags
3. Click OK . The Tag names appear in the Reference Tags dialog.
Figure 24

NOTES
Task 5. Assign the Mate Surface tag to the corresponding geometry on

the solid disk to make it interchangeable.
1. Select the MATE_SURFACE and DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown

Figure 25
2. Notice that the back surface of DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW is

highlighted. Use Query Select to select the equivalent back
surface on DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in the following figure.
Figure 26: Creating Reference Tags
Task 6. Assign the Align Axis tag to the corresponding geometry on the
solid disk to make it interchangeable.
1. Click to display Datum Axes.

NOTES
2. Select ALIGN_AXIS and DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 27
3. Notice that A_1 on the DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW is highlighted.

Select the equivalent axis DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in the
following figure.
4. Notice that the entries under ALL TAGS list now indicate Y,
signifying that you have defined all of the reference tags.
5. Click OK .
Task 7. Automatically replace the hollow disk with the solid disk.
1. Open BRAKE_HUB.ASM.

NOTES
Figure 28
2. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace and select

DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT.
3. Click By Interchange Assembly > Browse .
4. Expand the tree and select DISK_BRAKE_SOLID.PRT. Click OK .
5. Click Apply > Done .
Figure 29: The Replaced Disk
Task 8. Replace components in the wheel assembly using the family

table definitions associated with it.
1. Open the WHEEL_GENERIC.ASM and click The generic > Open.

NOTES
Figure 30: WHEEL_GENERIC.ASM
2. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace and select

RIM_GENERIC.PRT from the Model Tree.
3. Click By Family Table Member > Browse .
4. Select the 12X6-STYLE_C instance. Click OK > Apply > Done .
Figure 31
5. Replace the rim with another instance.
Displayed.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Repeating Components

Task 1. Start by assembling the BOLT.PRT to a hole in the
INTAKE.ASM.
1. Open INTAKE.ASM.
Figure 32:
2. Click Component > Assemble . Select the BOLT.PRT and click

Open .
3. Select the two surfaces shown below. This creates an Insert

constraint.
Figure 33

NOTES
4. Select the two surfaces shown below. This creates a Mate

Coincident constraint.
Figure 34
5. Click Ok.
Figure 35
Task 2. Use Repeat to place another bolt.
1. Click Component > Adv Utls > Repeat . Select BOLT.PRT.
2. Select Insert and Mate from the dialog box as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 36
3. Click Add. Read the prompt.

NOTES
4. Select the cylindrical surface shown below.
Figure 37
5. Read the prompt and then select the surface shown below.
Figure 38
6. Notice the assembled bolt as shown in the following figure.
Figure 39

NOTES
7. Select another corresponding cylindrical and mating surface as

Figure 40
8. Continue to place bolts into all of the holes.
9. Click Confirm .
Note:
The repeated bolts are completely independent to one another.
Displayed.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Exploded Views

and Dynamic Repositioning
Task 1. Open the assembly and experiment with dynamic repositioning.
1. Open VALVE_EXP.ASM.
Figure 41:
2. Select the ARM_EXP and click > Delete > Ok .
3. Click Component > Assemble. Select Arm.prt and click Open .
4. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and click and drag the
mouse. Notice the component zooms in and out of the screen.
5. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and click and drag the
mouse. Notice this rotates only the component.

NOTES
6. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and drag the mouse. Notice this
pans only the component in the plane of the screen.
Task 2. Fully constrain the component.
1. Position the component approximately as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 42: Positioning Component
2. Maintain the default Automatic constraint, and select the two

surfaces, as shown in the following figure.
3. Again, press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT>. Click and then

while dragging the mouse. Notice that the component is partially
constrained.

NOTES
4. Click > Snap Options > Activate Snapping > Close.
5. Click and select the surface as shown in the following figure.
Figure 44: Selecting Surfaces for Automatic Constraint
6. Click <CTRL> + <ALT> + . Drag the component up and down

without releasing any keys. Notice that is snaps to available
surfaces.
7. Snap the Arm as shown below and release all keys.
Figure 45
8. Notice the system has interpreted this as a Mate constraint. Test the
degrees of freedom of the component with <CTRL> <ALT> and
, and .
9. Position the arm as shown in the following figure using the mouse.

NOTES
Figure 46: Positioning Component
10. Click OK .
11. Notice that the arm reoriented itself to a default position.
12. Redefine the arm, and clear the Allow Assumptions check box.
13. Position the arm again.
14. Click > [Fix to current position]. Notice the arm is now
fully constrained, and click OK .
Task 3. Activate the default exploded state.
1. Click View > Explode .
Figure 47: Unhelpful Exploded View

NOTES
2. Notice that this exploded state is likely not desirable.
3. Click View > Unexplode .
Task 4. Create a custom exploded state.
1. Click Explode State > Create . Type [Explode_all].
2. Maintain the default Motion Type of Translate . Set the Motion

Reference to Plane Normal .
3. Select the surface as shown in the following figure.
Figure 48: Selecting Surface
4. Select the Arm and reposition as shown in the following figure.
Figure 49: Repositioning
5. Set the Motion Increment to 10 and select the Cover.
6. Reposition as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 50: Repositioning after Setting Motion Increment
7. Click Preferences > Move Many > Close .
8. Set the Motion Reference to Plane Normal . Select the surface

Figure 51: Selecting Surface after Setting Motion Reference
9. Select the Arm , Cover , and Shaft followed by .
10. Click anywhere in the window and reposition as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 52: Repositioning
11. Set the Motion Reference to Plane Normal . Select the surface
Figure 53: Selecting Surface after Setting Motion Reference
12. Reposition the VALVE_PLATE, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 54: Repositioning the Valve Plate
13. Reposition the Arm. Use the edge shown in the following figure as
a reference.
Figure 55: Selecting Edge

NOTES
Task 5. Finish the explode state with offset lines.
1. Click OK > Offset Lines > Create .
2. Toggle to display datum axes and select the two axes, as shown
Figure 56: Selecting Two Axes
3. Repeat for other axes.
Figure 57: Selecting Other Axes
4. Use a combination of the Axis and Surface Norm options for the
last offset line.

NOTES
Figure 58: Using a Combination for the Last Offset Line
5. Return to the main menu to complete the explode state.
Task 6. Create another exploded state.
1. Click View > Unexplode .
2. Create the explode state named EXP_SUB_ASSY, as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 59: Creating an New Explode State

NOTES
3. Use Explode State > Set Current to toggle between the three
exploded states.
4. Use View > Explode and View > Unexplode to toggle between
the unexploded view and the last used explode state.
Displayed.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned:
• How to restructure assembly components without deleting them.

• How to create and use interchange assemblies to replace components
in an assembly.
• How to replace components using family table instances.
• How to use the repeat functionality to rapidly place components into
an assembly without establishing unwanted dependencies.

Simplified Representations & Shrinkwrap

In this module you learn how to use Simplified representations to
reduce retrieval, repaint, and regeneration time for large assemblies
and parts.
Objectives
• Create Simplified Representations of parts and assemblies.

• Create Shrinkwraps in part and assembly mode.
• Use substitution in Simplified Reps.
• Create Simplified Representations with Shrinkwraps.
Page 9-1
NOTES
SIMPLIFIED REPRESENTATIONS
Simplified Representations (Simplified Reps) are the primary large
assembly management tool in Pro/ENGINEER. For assemblies, you can
control which components the system retrieves into session, and to what
level components are retrieved. You can omit components, use different
reps of particular components, and substitute less complicated versions of
components. For Part models, you can control which features are
displayed, and also create work-region (cutaway) representations.
Simplified Reps:
• Increase machine efficiency when working with complex models or

large assemblies.
• Can tailor your model for a particular task not requiring all
components or features.
• Automatically manage the children of components that you substitute
or remove, unlike the suppression functionality.
Simplified Representation Types

• Master Rep – Model geometry is solid, visible, and available for
selection or referencing. Mass property calculations and measurements
may be performed. Individual features can be selected and redefined.
Equivalent to the default state of a model before Simplified Rep
creation, the Master Rep always reflects the full assembly, including
all of its members and their detail.
Figure 1: Master Rep of an Assembly (Shown Exploded)

NOTES
• Geometry Rep – Model geometry is solid, visible, and available for

selection or referencing. Mass property calculations and measurements
may be performed. The model is treated as one combined solid instead
of individual features, so individual features can not be selected or
viewed in the model tree. Although visually identical, Geometry Reps
regenerate and display faster than Master Reps.
Figure 2: Geometry Rep of an Assembly (Shown Unexploded)
• Graphics Rep – Model geometry is not solid or available for

selection, and mass property calculations and measurements may not
be performed. Graphics Reps are significantly faster than Geometry
Reps. Visibility of Graphics Reps is dependant on the config option
save_model_display when the model is saved, with the following
options:
½ Wireframe – Model will be displayed in wireframe.
½ Shading High – Shading with full detail.
½ Shading Med – Shading with medium detail.
½ Shading Low – Shading with least detail.
½ Shading LOD – Shading is dependent on the performance

setting Levels of Detail.
Figure 3: Graphics Rep Shown in Wireframe

Simp lif ied Rep resent ation s an d Sh rin kw rap Pag e 9- 3
NOTES
• Exclude – Model(s) can be excluded from current Simplified Rep, and

are not displayed or regenerated.
Figure 4: Excluded Gear Models
• Substitute – Model(s) can be substituted with simplified versions
Figure 5: Substituted Brake Disk Assembly

NOTES
CREATING SIMPLIFIED REPS

You can create Simplified reps in an assembly:
• After retrieving the entire assembly.

½ Once the Rep is created, excluded models must be erased from
RAM to improve performance.
• On-the-fly during retrieval of the assembly.
½ The Open Rep option in the Open dialog box will allow you to
open an existing Simplified Rep, or create a new one before the
assembly is retrieved. This eliminates the need to open the entire
assembly, only to remove some components from RAM after
implementing a Simplified Rep.
Figure 6: Open Rep Dialog Box
Creating Customized Representations

Instead of opening all components in an assembly as a Master, Geometry,
or Graphics Rep, you can define your own customized Rep. This allows
different components to be placed into various Rep levels, depending on
their relevance to the task at hand.
Specifying the Default Rule

The default rule for a Simplified Rep determines how the system will
initially classify all components, and cannot be redefined. The following
four options are available:
• Master • Geometry • Graphics • Exclude

NOTES
Defining Action for Components

Once you have created a Simplified Rep and set the default rule, you can
define one of the following actions for each component to be selected.
• Master – Includes component in its Master Rep.

• Exclude – Does not include the component in the Rep.
• Graphics Rep – Includes the component in its Graphics Rep.
• Geometry Rep – Includes the component in its Geometry Rep.
• Default – Returns the component to the Rep level defined by the
default rule.
• Substitute – Substitutes the component with representative geometry.
Selecting Components
There are several available selection tools:
• Pick Mdl – Select the model(s) from the screen or Model Tree.
• All – Select all components.
• From/To – Select two models or features in the model tree to select all
those in between.
• By Rule – Setup a rule for component selection.
• By Rep – Select models active in another Rep.
• By Envelope – Selects components belonging to a defined Envelope.
Used with Substitute only.

NOTES
Creating Rules
Definition Rules
Using the Definition Rules option allows you to create rules that can
dynamically update a Simplified Rep as assembly components are added
or modified. Definition Rules are based on the same rule options as
Selection Rules
Selection Rules
You can establish selection rules using the By Rule dialog box, to more
efficiently select desired components. Selection Rules are intended to be
used to select components for the original definition of the Rep. The
system does not re-evaluate them when it retrieves the Simplified Rep or
regenerates the assembly.
Figure 7

NOTES
Selection Rules
Geometric
• Zone – Components are located within a predefined zone. Zones can
be used to select components on one side of a plane, within an
enclosed surface, or within a specified distance from an entity.
Figure 8: Selecting Using Zone
• Distance – Selects components located within a spherical region from

a point defined by a radius.
• Size– Selects components based on their model size—the diagonal
measurement of the smallest bounding box that could hold the part.
Figure 9: Model Size Option

NOTES
• Exterior Comps – Select components that contribute to the external

shape of the assembly.
Properties
• Model Name – Selects components based on their names. Wildcards
such as *or ? can be used to select multiple similar names.
• Expression – Create logic statement(s) based on model parameters.
For example, all items with Cost > 12.00 AND Vendor =
Boston Gear. You must designate the parameters and save the
model to use this option.
• Comp Type – Can be used to select all skeleton models.
Parent / Child
• Used to select all parents of children of selected component. Several
options and filter settings are available.
SUBSTITUTING COMPONENTS
Model can be substituted (exchanged) with a simpler, representative
model or subassembly. The system preserves the references of the
replaced component to allow you to work on the assembly in the future.
Selecting Components for Substitution

• Pick Mdl – Select the model(s) from the screen or Model Tree.
• By Rule – Setup a rule for component selection.
• By Envelope – Selects components belonging to a predefined
Envelope. Used with Substitute only.
Substitution using Envelopes

An Envelope is a special part that you can create in the context of an
assembly specifically for use with the Substitute option when creating a
Simplified Rep.
• Envelopes typically replace a number of components or subassemblies

with simplified, representative geometry.
• The envelope part itself contains a list of all components that it
replaces, as well as some simplified geometry to represent the
substituted parts.

NOTES
• Components can be selected to be included in the envelope manually,

or by using a selection rule.
• Envelopes offer the following substitution advantages:
½ One envelope can replace many components.
½ An envelope can cross over the boundaries of a subassembly to

include components not included in that subassembly.
½ The system stores envelope geometry in a separate part file so

that you can make changes and assign mass properties in Part mode.
Note:
You can only use an envelope in the assembly in which you
created it.
Envelope Methods
There are several methods that can be used to create envelope geometry:
Figure 10
Create Envelope Part

This option allows you to manually create and assemble a part model into
the assembly. Geometry such as solids or surfaces can be created manually
in the context of the assembly to represent multiple components.

NOTES
Figure 11: Using a Manually Created Envelope
Select Existing Assembly Component

With this option, an existing component in the assembly is selected and
used for envelope geometry. Typically, the component would have been
created specifically for use as an envelope, and could contain solid
features or surface features such as a Shrinkwrap.
Surface Subset Shrinkwrap

This option creates an envelope part using a surface Shrinkwrap, which is
automatically created and engulfs selected envelope component(s). Small
surfaces are left out using lower quality values.
Figure 12: Original Cylinder Head Model

NOTES
Figure 13: Envelope using Shrinkwrap Surface Subset
Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap

Creates an envelope part using a faced solid shrinkwrap, which is
automatically created and engulfs selected envelope component(s). Small
surfaces are passed over using lower quality values.
Original Cylinder Head Envelope Using Faceted Solid

Figure 14

NOTES
Other Substitution Options

Besides Envelopes, there are other Substitution options available:
Figure 15
By Family Table Member

A family table instance may be used for substitution. For example,
instances of components or subassemblies with a reduced number of
features or components can be substituted for the more complex instance.
The ‘simplified’ instance must support any assembly references used in
the original model.
By Interchange Assembly
A special type of assembly that can contain two types of components:
Simplify Component
• Used with Simplified Reps for Substitution.
• A component is placed or created in the interchange assembly that
represents a simplified version of a part or assembly.
• The Simplify Component is assembled directly on the component(s) it
is to substitute for.
• The Simplify Component can be assigned the mass properties of the
component(s) it is to substitute for.

NOTES
Original Subassembly Simplify Component Interchange Assembly

Figure 16
Original Assembly Simplify Interchange Component Substituted

Figure 17
Functional Component
• Used with the component advanced utilities Replace functionality.
• Allows functionally equivalent components to be easily exchanged in
an assembly.
• Uses reference tags between components for assembly or child
references.
• Use this method to change the configuration of the model rather than
to simplify the model.
By Simplified Rep
This option allows you to select pre-defined Simplified reps from a part or
assembly, and use them for substitution in the Simplified Rep of a higher
level assembly.
Assembly Simplified Reps
If you create a Simplified Rep in a subassembly, you can substitute it into

the Simplified Rep of a higher level assembly.

NOTES
Figure 18: Substituted Rep
Part Simplified Reps
Simplified reps can be created at the part level to aid in the creation of
complex models. They will be available for selection during substitution
while creating an assembly Simplified Rep. Part Simplified reps offer the
following capabilities:
• Including / Excluding features without affecting parent/child

relationships.
• Create Work-Region cutaways.
• Selecting surfaces to be copied into the Rep.
Figure 19: Part-level Simplified Rep Substituted in an Assembly
Considerations with Part Simplified Reps

• When you retrieve a part Simplified Rep or an assembly that uses a
part Simplified Rep, the system automatically regenerates the Master
Rep of that part and then the part Simplified Rep. As a result, retrieval
time increases for part level reps.

NOTES
• Since part level reps will allow you to Exclude features without
affecting parent child relationships, they are best used to aid modeling
of complex part models outside of the context of an assembly; and not
as a large assembly management technique in Simplified reps.
• To decrease retrieval time with part level reps, you can create an
accelerator file (.xpr ) that contains model information, allowing you
to directly retrieve the part level Simplified Rep without first
regenerating the part’s master Rep.
SHRINKWRAP
Shrinkwrap Capabilities
A Shrinkwrap:
• Provides an extremely ‘lightweight’ method for representing

components or entire assemblies.
• Can be used inside of Simplified reps.
• Allows for distribution of complex design information.
• Provides representations of designs to suppliers and customers, while
protecting proprietary design information.
• Creates accurate representations, including:
½ Surface appearance and colors.
½ Mass properties.
½ Space claims for range of component motion using

Mechanism.
• Reduces data size by 70-90% resulting in:
½ Less time to retrieve data sets for visualization.
½ Less hardware resources needed to work with data sets.
½ Less time needed to transfer data over networks.

NOTES
SHRINKWRAP TYPES
There are two types of Shrinkwrap:
• Exported Shrinkwrap models.

• Associative Shrinkwrap features.
Exported Shrinkwrap Models

Exported shrinkwrap models are created through the Save a Copy menu,
and are non-associative. This creates a new part model which is a
shrinkwrap of the model or assembly in the active window.
The type of geometry created in the shrinkwrap depends on the creation

method used:
• Surface Subset – Creates a non-parametric surface model. The

amount of surfaces included is dependent on the quality setting and
other options.
• Merged Solid – (Assemblies only) Merges part models in an assembly
together to form one solid part.
• Faceted Solid – Creates a faceted solid that is representative of the
original solid. How closely the faceted solid maps to the original
geometry is dependent on the quality setting and other options.
Exported Shrinkwrap Dialogs

Other options for exported shrinkwrap models are managed in the
following dialog boxes.

NOTES
Figure 20: Options for Exported Shrinkwrap

NOTES
Shrinkwrap Examples
Surface Subset
Figure 21: Original Transmission: File Size 147MB
Figure 22: Surface Subset: File Size 23MB

NOTES
Merged Solid
Figure 23: Original Engine: File Size 591MB
Figure 24: Merged Solid: File Size 18MB

NOTES
Faceted Solid
Figure 25: Original Transmission: File Size 147MB
Figure 26: Faceted Solid: File Size 17MB

NOTES
Associative Shrinkwrap Features

• Are created in a new or existing component or assembly.
• Are accessed through the Data Sharing menu.
• Are associative, since they can be parametrically updated to reflect
changes made in the source geometry.
• Only have the Surface Subset method of creation.
• Promote data sharing and reuse in other assemblies.
Associative Shrinkwrap Feature Types

• Internal Shrinkwrap – Created using the Shrinkwrap option.
½ Available as an assembly level feature, or a part level feature of
a component in the context of an assembly.
½ Uses geometry from a set of components in the current

assembly as a source.
• External Shrinkwrap – Created using the ExtShrinkwrap or
Shrinkwrap from Other Model option.
½ Available as an assembly level feature, a part level feature of a

component in the context of an assembly or in an individual part
model.
½ Uses geometry from any selected or retrieved model as a

source.
½ Locates the source geometry by coordinate system.
Creating Associative Shrinkwrap Features

• Attributes – Quality level (1-10) and options for filling / ignoring
surfaces.

NOTES
Figure 27
• Component Subset – Components are marked as Consider or Ignore

for shrinkwrap creation in the model tree.
• Subset Handling – Order of operations for creating shrinkwrap.
½ Shrinkwrap and Select – Create shrinkwrap, then select
components specified in Component Subset.
½ Select and Shrinkwrap – Select components specified in

Component Subset, then create shrinkwrap.
• Additional Srfs – Select additional surfaces to be included in
shrinkwrap.
• Include Datums – Select additional datum features to be included in
shrinkwrap.
• Geom Dependency – Allows you to toggle the shrinkwrap from
Dependent to Independent and back.
• Externalize – Converts the shrinkwrap to External.
Updating Associative Shrinkwrap Features

There are two ways to update a shrinkwrap:
• Regenerating the model(s) – This will effectively update the

shrinkwrap for most dimensional and other moderate changes.
• Using Update Shrinkwrap on the shrinkwrap feature – This will allow
the shrinkwrap to recalculate itself, accounting for major changes such
as addition / removal of components.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you practice with simplified reps and shrinkwrap
features, which are key tools for working with large assemblies.
Method
In Exercise 1, you will create various Simplified Reps, utilizing Rep levels
and selection rules.
In Exercise 2, you will create and use shrinkwrap as a tool to create

envelope models.
EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Simplified Reps

Task 1. Open the engine assembly and setup display.
1. Set the working directory to the folder, which matches the name of
this module.
2. Open CART_ENGINE.ASM.
3. Turn off the display of all datum features.
4. Click Utilities > Environment and ensure that Colors is enabled.

Click Ok .
5. If necessary, enable transparency by clicking View > Display

Settings > Model Display . Select the Shade tab, and click
Transparency > Ok.

NOTES
Figure 28: Original Assembly (Master Rep)
Note:
Depending on your graphics card, you may wish to change the
transparency level to clearly view the internal engine
components. Click View > Model Setup > Color and
Appearance . Then click Modify from Model , and select
the engine block. Select Advanced , and drag the
Transparency bar accordingly.
Task 2. Create a Simplified Rep with Exclude as the Default Rule
1. Click Simplified Rep > Create . Type [STATIONARY_COMP]

as the name.
2. Click Exclude Comp as the default rule to exclude all components

in this assembly except those that you will explicitly select.
3. Click Update Screen . No components will be displayed.
Task 3. Select the components to include in this Simplified Rep.
1. Expand the model tree to view both columns.

NOTES
2. Click Master Rep and select ENG_BLOCK.PRT, ENG_HEAD.PRT,

and ENG_SIDE_COVER.PRT from the Model Tree.
3. Click Update Screen . Notice that several components are visually

missing, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 29: Stationary_Comp Rep
Note:
Remember Pro/E allows you to remove components that have
children using Simplified Reps without addressing parent/child
relationships.
4. Click Done and File > Erase > Not Displayed. Notice that the
other models from the assembly are listed and click Ok .
5. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok. Notice
the erased components are retrieved back into session.

NOTES
Figure 30
Task 4. Create a Simplified Rep with Master Rep as the Default Rule
1. From the Simplified Rep menu, click Create and type [INTERNAL]
as the name.
2. Click Master Rep as the default rule.
3. Click Exclude and select the ENG_MTR_SKEL and ENG_BLOCK

from the model tree.
4. Click Update Screen .
Figure 31

NOTES
Task 5. Experiment with selection options.
1. Click Exclude > From/To , and select the ENG_SIDE_COVER and

ENG_FLYWHL from the model tree.
2. Click Update Screen .
Figure 32
3. Click Exclude > By Rule.
4. Select Geometric > Size > Absolute > Less Than , type [5.25],
and click Evaluate .
5. Notice the new components marked as Exclude in the model tree.

Click Update Screen .

NOTES
Figure 33
6. Click Undo Last > Update Screen .
7. Click Done > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok.
Task 6. Create a Rep using Geometry Rep as the Default Rule.
1. Click Create and type [COVER_MOD]. Select Geometry Rep as the

default rule.
2. At this point, there is component data that can be erased to

improve performance. Click Done and File > Erase > Not
Displayed . Notice the entries in the list and click Ok .
Task 7. Configure the Rep for modification of the Cover.
1. Further define the Rep. Click Redefine > COVER_MOD > Ok.
2. Click Exclude > By Rule > Properties > Model Name .
3. Type [*ON*] and click Evaluate > Update Screen . Notice that the
ENG_CONNECT_ROD and ENG_PISTON models are excluded.
4. Select the ENG_MTR_SKEL and click Update Screen.

NOTES
Figure 34
5. Click Graphics Rep , select the ENG_HEAD and ENG_FLYWHL,

and click Update Screen . There should be no visual difference.
Note:
Remember that the display of components in Graphics Rep is
dependant on the Save_Model_Display config option. In
this case, the models were saved with the Shading_High
option.
6. Click Master Rep and select the ENG_SIDE_COVER.
7. Observe the model tree. Notice components are now in four

different Rep states (Master, Geometry, Graphics, Exclude).
8. Click Done and File > Erase > Not Displayed. Notice the models
listed and click Ok .
9. Click Done/Return > Regenerate > Automatic.
Task 8. Investigate selection capabilities of the components.
1. Click Analysis > Measure. Select any edge(s) of the

ENG_FLYWHL, and notice that it is not selectable, since it is in
Graphics Rep.
2. Select any edge(s) from the ENG_BLOCK. Notice that these are
selectable, since it is in Geometry Rep.

NOTES
3. Close the Measure dialog box.
4. Click Modify. Select anywhere on the ENG_FLYWHL. Again, it

doesn’t register.
5. Select the ENG_BLOCK. Read the message window.
Task 9. Make modifications to the cover
1. Zoom in as shown in the following figure.
Figure 35
2. Click Analysis > Measure. Set the Type to Diameter .
3. Since the ENG_SHAFT is in Geometry Rep, select the surface

Figure 36
4. Note the diameter value (1.25) and click Close .
5. Click Modify and select the hole in the ENG_SIDE_COVER as


NOTES
Figure 37
6. Modify the hole diameter as shown in the following figure to

accommodate for a bearing to be assembled.
Figure 38
Note:
In this case, you could not ‘accidentally’ modify the diameter
of the shaft since it is in Geometry Rep.
7. Click Regenerate > Automatic.
8. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok.
9. Save (do not close) the Assembly.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Using Shrinkwrap and Substitution

in Simplified Reps
Task 1. Create a shrinkwrap envelope on the cylinder head.
1. Click Design Mgr > Envelope> Create , and type [HEAD_ENV].
2. Select the ENG_HEAD and click Done .
3. Configure the dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Figure 39
4. Click OK , wait for the shrinkwrap to calculate, and click Done .
Note:
You must be in the Master Rep of the assembly to enable the
shrinkwrap options above.
Task 2. Create a shrinkwrap envelope on the clutch assembly.
1. From the Envelope menu, click Create , and type [CLUTCH_ENV].
2. Select the ENG_CLUTCH.ASM from the model tree and click

Done .

NOTES
Figure 40
4. Click OK , wait for the shrinkwrap to calculate, and click Done >
Done Return > Done Return.
Task 3. Create a non-associative faceted solid shrinkwrap of the engine

block.
1. Select the engine block and click RMB > Open .
Figure 41
2. Click Setup > Density and type [0.098].

NOTES
3. Click File > Save a Copy, set the Type to Shrinkwrap , and
click Ok .
Figure 42
5. Click Preview , and wait for the shrinkwrap to appear.

NOTES
Figure 43
6. Click Create . When the dialog box opens, click Window >
BLOCK_FCT_SHRNK > File > Save .
7. Close the dialog box and the engine block window.
Task 4. Create an Interchange assembly for the engine block
1. Click File > New > Assembly > Interchange.
2. Type [BLOCK_INTCH ] and click Ok .
3. Click Component > Add , select the Eng_block.prt , and click

Open .
4. Notice the component was added as a functional component.
Note:
The designation represents a functional component, while
represents a simplify component.
5. Add another block as a simplify component. Click Add > Simplify

Component > Ok.
6. Select the Block_fct_shrnk.prt and click Open.

NOTES
Figure 44
7. Click . The blocks are now assembled on top of each other.

Click Ok.
8. Select the Mass Properties tab and select the Properties of a

specified functional component option.
9. Click Compute and accept the default accuracy value.
10. Click Default > Ok .
11. Click File > Save and close the window.
Task 5. Create a Simplified Rep that substitutes the two envelopes just
created.
1. If necessary, Open the Engine assembly in its Master Rep, and

Activate the Engine Assembly window.
2. Click Simplified Rep > Create and type [ENVELOPES]. Select

Geometry Rep as the default rule.
3. Click Master Rep and select the engine block.
Note:
The component to be substituted with an interchange assembly
needs to be in its Master Rep.
4. Click Substitute > By Envelope > HEAD_ENV > Update

Screen .

NOTES
5. Zoom in as shown and note that the head now has no holes and
some surfaces have been left out.
Figure 45
6. Click Substitute > By Envelope > CLUTCH_ENV >

Update Screen.
7. Notice the small clutch surfaces left out due to low quality levels.
Figure 46
Task 6. Substitute using the interchange assembly you created.
1. Click Substitute and select the ENG_BLOCK.
2. Select By Interchange Assembly and click Browse .
3. Expand BLOCK_INTCH and select BLOCK_FCT_SHRNK .
4. Click Ok > Ok > Update Screen.

NOTES
Figure 47
5. Click Done and Save the Assembly.
Task 7. Shrinkwrap the entire engine in a separate part model.
1. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep Ok.
2. Click File > New > Part , type [ENGINE_SW], and click Ok .
3. From the new part, click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap
from Other Model.
4. Click Open , select Cart_Engine.asm and click Open .
5. Click Default , set the Quality to [4] and click Done .
6. Click Component Subset > Define .
7. Click Ignore > All. Notice the Ignore status in the model tree.
8. Click Consider > By Rule > Geometric > Exterior Comps >
Evaluate.
9. Notice that several components are now set to Consider in the

model tree.
10. Click Done > Ok.
11. The entire engine assembly is now represented by a single

associative shrinkwrap feature in the model tree.

NOTES
Figure 48
12. This model could now easily be used to create an interchange

assembly with the actual engine assembly, and then be substituted
in a higher level assembly.
Displayed .

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Level

Simplified Reps
Task 1. Open the engine head to create a simplified version of it.
1. Open the ENG_HEAD.
Figure 49
Task 2. Create a simplified version of this part showing only the basic
shape and the important mounting locations.
1. Click Simplfd Rep > Create . Type [HEAD_NO_FINS] as the name.
2. Click Exclude Feat > Regenerate > Whole Model > Done .
Tips & Techniques:

If the part regenerates slowly, you could use Accelerate
instead of Regenerate to retrieve it faster (you can set this
option later by selecting Attributes from the EDIT
METHOD menu).

NOTES
3. Click Features > Include > From /To .
4. From the Model Tree, select DTM1 and Round id 65 . Notice that
the system now includes all of the features between DTM1 and the
round.
Figure 50
5. Click Done > Done /Return. The simplified part should display as
Figure 51

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

To view the Rep with the included features only, click Update
Screen . If you inadvertently select a feature to
include/exclude, click Default and select the feature to set it
back to the default rule.
Task 3. Create a Simplified Rep that shows a cutaway of this part. Use
an accelerator file for faster retrieval.
1. Click Set Current > Master Rep > OK .
2. Click Create and type [HEAD_CUTAWAY] as the name.
3. Click Include Feat > Accelerate > Whole Model > Done .
4. Click Work Region > Extrude > Solid > Done > Both Sides >
Done .
5. Select DTM1 as the sketching plane and click Okay to accept the
default direction for viewing.
6. Click Top and select DTM2.
7. From the references dialog, Delete DTM3 and select the outermost
vertical edges of the part as references.
8. Turn off the display of datum planes and sketch a single horizontal
line as shown in the following figure.
Figure 52
9. Click and Flip the arrow upward if necessary. Click Okay.

NOTES
10. Click Thru All > Done > Thru All > Done.
11. Click OK to complete the work region. Click Done Return >
Done Return.
12. Spin the model and notice the cutaway section. The Rep should
display as shown in the following figure.
Figure 53
Task 4. Create a Simplified Rep in the engine assembly, substituting the

part Rep that you just created.
1. Open the CART_ENGINE.ASM. If necessary, set the current Rep to

Master Rep.
2. Click Simplified Rep > Create. Type [HEAD_CUT_REP] and click

Exclude Comp as the default rule.
3. Begin the new Rep creation by using a previously defined Rep as a

starting point. Click Master Rep > By Rep >
STATIONARY_COMP > OK.
4. Click Update Screen.

NOTES
Task 5. Change the Rep of the ENG_HEAD.PRT.
1. Click Substitute , Select the ENG_HEAD part and click Browse to

view the Simplified reps in that model.
2. Select HEAD_NO_FINS and Click OK > OK > Update Screen.
Figure 54
3. Click Substitute , Select the ENG_HEAD part and click Browse to

view the Simplified reps in that model.
4. Select HEAD_CUTAWAY and Click OK > OK > Update Screen.
Figure 55
5. Save the models, Close all windows and click Erase > Not
Displayed.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned how to:
• Create Simplified representations using predefined or customized

representations.
• Create part and assembly level Simplified representations.
• Use substitution in Simplified reps.
• Create a Shrinkwrap feature.

Top-Down Design and Layouts

In this module you learn how to use concurrent design techniques to
develop models in a top-down design environment. You also learn
how to use layouts to control the design intent of an assembly in a
top-down design environment.
Objectives
• Identify a project’s design intent.

• Use 2-dimensional (2-D) layouts and engineering notebooks to set
up and document designs.
• Define assembly structures.
• Create new parts and subassemblies while working in an assembly.
• Copy geometry between assembly components.
• Propagate design intent from top-level data into subassemblies.
• Build a layout or engineering notebook.
• Link parts to layouts.
Page 10-1
NOTES
DEFINING TOP-DOWN DESIGN TECHNIQUES

Pro/ENGINEER offers several methods that you can use to successfully
design in a top-down environment. It provides you with many tools to
interrogate assemblies and determine how they are built.
Identifying Design Intent

Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can plan your designs before creating any
models. Before performing any work in Pro/ENGINEER, you can save
time and also increase design accuracy by:
• Sketching preliminary geometry.

• Defining critical sizing and fit information.
• Establishing relationships between model parameters.
• Specifying how components are to be assembled.
You can then use the layout functionality to control the design at all points
though out the development process.
Using Assembly Structures

Using the following techniques, you can define the structure of the
assembly prior to creating or assembling all of the components.
Creating New Subassemblies

You use the CREATION OPTIONS dialog box to:
• Copy existing assemblies.

• Place the three default datum planes directly into the assembly without
manually adding placement constraints.
• Define only the subassembly’s existence in the assembly structure.

Pag e 1 0-2 Fundam ent al s of Des ign
NOTES
Figure 1: Creating an Assembly
Note:
When you select Leave Component Unplaced and Copy
From Existing or Empty from the CREATION OPTIONS
dialog box, the system displays the component in the Model
Tree—but not in the actual assembly window—even if the
component contains geometry.
Copying Existing Geometry
You can define a new subassembly by copying an existing assembly. Start

assembly files are particularly useful if you would like to use the
subassembly immediately; however, you cannot copy the assembly if it
contains any components.
Defining Default Datum Planes
You can create a new subassembly by placing the three default datum
planes directly in the assembly. This technique saves time, because you do
not have to start a subassembly in a separate assembly window, and you
do not have to manually add assembly constraints.

T o p - Do w n Des ig n a n d L a y o u t s Pag e 1 0- 3
NOTES
Defining Empty Subassemblies
You can define the existence of the subassembly in an assembly structure,

that is, in the Bill of Materials (BOM) and Model Tree, by creating an
assembly that contains no geometry.
Creating Parts without Geometry

Using the same methods described above for creating new subassemblies,
you can also create new parts without geometry by defining their existence
in the assembly structure.
• Copying Existing Parts – When you copy a start part or other

existing part, you can use constraints to assemble it or leave it
unplaced.
• Locating Default Datums – Without creating the actual part
geometry, you can place the three default datum planes directly in the
assembly.
• Empty – The system lists an empty part file in the Model Tree without
displaying any features in the graphics window. You can place the
empty part in the default position, or leave it unplaced. This allows
you to indicate the part’s existence in the assembly BOM.
During or after development of your product model, you can create
features in the part by using Modify >Mod Part . Using the Copy From
Existing option, you can copy start part information to obtain the
appropriate position and constraints; however, you may need to redefine
the placement of the part.
Placing Components in the Default Position

You can include a component as a member of an assembly without
actually placing it in the assembly window. This allows you to list the
component as a member of the assembly, even if the component is not
ready to be assembled (for example, it does not have geometry). If you are
not ready to specify constraints yet, you can assemble a component
quickly into a default position to view it in the assembly and Bill of
Materials. The default position for a component is the point at which its
origin matches up with the origin of the assembly.
Packaging Components
Using the Package functionality, you can place a component in the
assembly window without specifying exact placement constraints.

NOTES
Defining Object Relationships in Pro/INTRALINK

You can use Pro/INTRALINK to set up assembly structures—or virtual
assemblies within a workspace.
Using Assembly Skeletons

You can use skeletons to create a 3D layout of an assembly, simulate
motion, space plan, and to visualize the assembly design without
developing the components. Later, you can use the skeleton as a central
reference that you can change to update components by passing
information down through the assembly structure.
To convey design intent from the skeletons to the assembly components,

you can:
• Design features in the parts with external references to the skeleton.

• Design features in the parts without external references to the
skeletons, but use the skeleton as a guideline.
• Reference higher level skeletons with subassembly skeletons.
• Use relations through the skeleton to control parts, or use relations in a
layout to control the skeleton and components.
Concept Blocks
Instead of creating fully developed components and subassemblies to
place in an assembly, you can create simple parts that represent them.
Later, you can use these blocks in the assembly to develop space claims
temporarily, while you develop the final models. Using various methods,
you can replace the components later in the design.
Copying Reference Geometry between Models

When modifying parts or subassemblies in Assembly mode, you can use
the Copy Geom feature to copy reference geometry from one model to
another.
Using this feature in a top-down design allows you to:
• Control change propagation by redefining the dependency for the copy

geometry feature.

NOTES
• Copy skeleton data into parts for feature design in Part mode, or into
subassemblies or their skeletons for design in subassembly windows.
• Create map parts.
• Provide a visible entity for an external reference.
• Consolidate external references into a single feature.
• Copy references to subassemblies that can have external references.
USING PRO/ENGINEER LAYOUT

A layout is a centralized location in which you can develop, capture, and
control the design intent of your project models. The information that you
can include in a layout is similar to the information that you would find in
an engineering notebook, such as:
• 2-D non-parametric sketched geometry

• Design notes
• Global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems for
automatic assembly
• Global dimensions and parameters
• Tabulated data
• Global relations
Using an engineering notebook or layout, you can:
• Access and control several models from one centralized location by

consolidating critical parameters.
• Drive any number of geometric models and drawings.
• Ensure the proper fit and size of design components.
Using the Where Used functionality in the RELATIONS menu, you can
easily determine which parts and assemblies have global datums and
parameters that belong to a notebook.

NOTES
Capturing the Design Process

Pro/ENGINEER enables you to capture your design intent and control it
throughout the development of your project.
It is important to add as much information to your layout as possible to

make it easily understandable. If the notebook becomes too complicated,
you can create an additional notebook and connect the two.
Creating Engineering Notebooks

To create an engineering notebook, you begin by initializing the layout.
The creation of a notebook is similar to that of a production drawing. You
set a sheet size, and add multiple sheets, if necessary.
You can build several notebooks for one design project, and each
notebook can consist of several sheets. You can create a notebook for the
overall project and additional notebooks for the subassemblies of the
design.
Sketching Designs
To sketch your design, you create geometry using the same 2-D drafting
tools that are available for production drawings. The geometry can be as
simple or as complex as you want it to be. Pro/ENGINEER does not use
layout geometry to create your parts.
Figure 2: Example of Draft Geometry

NOTES
Documenting Components with Balloons

To document your design, you can use balloons to call out the
components, and then label them in the lower left corner of your layout.
You can also add text notes to display information, such as project name,
material, cost.
Figure 3: Adding Balloons and Notes to a Layout
Controlling Designs with Global Information

The power of a Pro/ENGINEER layout increases with the addition of
parameters. By incorporating global dimensions and parameters into your
layout, you can control key elements of your design.
Figure 4: Adding Parameter Dimensions

NOTES
To increase the power of your layout and capture your design intent, you
can:
• Use relations to interrelate parameters.

• Use parameter sets to change parameter values automatically.
• Add global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems to
enable automatic assembly.
Interrelating Parameters with Relations

By adding relations, you can:
• Increase the level of design intent controlled by the layout.

• Set up global relations, so that one global dimension obtains its value
from a relation with another global value.
• Develop the relationships between the parameters, even if the
components that they will control do not exist.
Organizing Layouts
You can use tables to organize the parameters and relationships that you
add to the layout.
Figure 5: Adding Parametric Tables

NOTES
Changing Parameter Values Automatically

In the Layout mode, you use parameter sets to change parameter values
automatically.
Figure 6: Big Bolt Instance Set Applied
Enabling Automatic Assembly

By adding global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems to the
notebook, you can set up your layout to enable automatic assembly.
You define all of the surfaces and axes that are necessary to assemble one
component to another using the Align command. The system references
the features when it assembles a part.
Figure 7: Adding Global Datum Planes and Axes
Note:
A layout limits user access to your design. Once you have
created a layout to control the geometry of your model, you
cannot change it at the part or assembly level. The layout
controls the parameters, dimensions, and features. Only users
who can access the layout can make modifications to these key
parameters.

Pag e 1 0-10 Fundament als of Des ign
NOTES
Linking Parts to Layouts

When you use an engineering notebook to design a part, it is important to
understand the layout and the global information it contains. For example,
if you add a global dimension to a layout, it should indicate to the designer
that this is a critical dimension that should be used in designing the part.
Using Global Dimensions

When you want a part to reference a global dimension, you must declare
the part to the layout. When you declare a part to a layout, you create a
direct connection between them—that is, the part can now reference the
layout for certain values.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER automatically retrieves the layout into RAM
when you retrieve a part that has been declared to it.
Writing Assembly Relations

Relations are mathematical equations involving symbolic dimensions and
parameters that you can use to capture design intent. They enable you to
take advantage of the parametric nature of Pro/ENGINEER.
When you use dimensions in relations, you use them in their symbolic
form. Symbolic dimensions at the assembly level have an additional suffix
on the end, referred to as a coding symbol. All dimensions with the same
coding symbol (i.e., d0:8, d12:8, d25:8) belong to the same part.
Note:
If the assembly is in RAM, you cannot modify the dependent
variable of the relation, even at the part level. If the assembly
is not in RAM, you can modify it at the part level. Once you
retrieve the assembly, the system resets the part to the value
dictated by the relation.

T o p - Do w n Des ig n a n d L a y o u t s Pag e 1 0- 1 1
NOTES
The following figure shows an example of an assembly relation. The

relation always makes the hole diameter (d2:0) larger than the shaft
diameter (d0:2) by .005.
d2:0 = d0:2 + .005
Figure 8: Assembly Relation
Capturing Design Intent

You can design a model in various ways. Using any of the following
techniques, you can capture and preserve design intent with different
results.
• Making modifications manually – Without using relations or a

layout, you must control the design intent and ensure proper fit and
function when dimensional changes are made to the model.
• Using assembly relations – You can automate the modifications to
the models to ensure proper fit and function.
• Part relations through assembly mode – You must have the driving
part in RAM, because the driving part controls the dependent part
dimensions.
• Part and assembly relations in a notebook – You can make all
changes in the central layout, because all parts and assemblies are tied
to the layout.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create and develop layouts in the design process
without modeling a part or assembly.
Methods
In Exercise 1, you use a layout to propagate a change throughout an
assembly. The change has such a dramatic effect, it would have been very
difficult to manage manually.
In Exercise 2, you develop a layout to drive the components in an engine

assembly to develop parameters and relationships without assemblies and
components. You also develop control of existing components in an
assembly.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Top-Down Design and Layouts
Icons Description
Create Lines
Select
EXERCISE 1: Using Layouts

Task 1. Open the go-cart assembly.

Note:
To achieve the best performance, you should retrieve the go-
cart assembly while in wireframe representation.
2. Open GO_CART.ASM.

NOTES
Task 2. Attempt to change the frame width directly.
1. Click Modify > Mod Part > Sel By Menu .
2. In the SELECTION TOOLS dialog box, select FRAME.PRT and

click Select .
3. Select the feature that controls the frame width. In the GET
SELECT menu. Click Sel by menu . Select MAIN_FRAME from
the SELECTION TOOL dialog box and click Select .
4. All of the dimensions that control the size of the frame now display
Figure 9: Frame Width Dimension
5. Select the 20.0 dimension controlling the width of the frame.

Read the prompt displayed in the MESSAGE AREA. The system
informs you that this dimension is driven in FRAME by relation
D11=frame_width.
Task 3. A layout documents this design and controls it. Open the layout,
view all the sheets then change the FRAME_WIDTH parameter.
1. Open GO-CART.LAY. Click File > Open . Select GO-CART.LAY,

then click Open . Notice that the first sheet is simply a cover sheet
showing the completed go-cart.

NOTES
2. To view the next sheet, click Sheets > Next . Notice that the
SHEET 2 organizes the assembly, and defines the major
components and their placement during the initial development of
the go-cart.
3. Click Next to view the SHEET 3. Notice that it defines the

dimensions governing the size of the go-cart.
4. Click Next to view the SHEET 4. Notice that as the design

progressed, more details were added to the layout to define the
position of the user interface (seat and controls).
5. View the remaining sheets. Notice that, as the design progressed,

the layout also progressed.
6. Click Previous several times to go back to SHEET 3. Click Set

Current , type [3]; then click Done/Return .
Task 4. Change the frame width.
1. Click Edit > Value and select the FRAME_WIDTH dimension from
the table on the layout. Change its value to 40. In the LAYOUT
menu, click Regenerate . Notice that this causes several errors to
display in the error box. The errors occurred because the frame is
too wide to allow room for the suspension.
Note:
This type of early error detection is another powerful use of
layouts. Without this detection, you would not discover the
error until you regenerated the assembly and the system placed
you in the Resolve environment.

NOTES
Changed
dimension
Figure 10: Modifying FRAME_WIDTH to 40 Produces Errors
2. To correct this problem, make the FRAME_WIDTH value more

reasonable. Change the value to 30 and regenerate. The error box
should now indicate that there are no errors remaining.
Note:
If your error box does not say NO ERRORS, do not proceed.
This indicates that you still have a problem and will not be
able to regenerate the assembly successfully.
Task 5. Change to the assembly window and regenerate the go-cart to

view the effect that takes place.
1. Change to the go-cart assembly window. Click Window >

GO_CART.ASM
2. Click Regenerate > Automatic .

NOTES
3. Notice that the system completely updated the assembly, including

the frame and all other affected components, by making the
following changes:
• Increased the width of the frame part.
• Replaced the front and rear wishbones with shorter parts.
• Replaced the top suspension links with shorter parts.
• Replaced the tie rod links with shorter parts.
• Replaced the steering rack with a longer rack.
• Replaced the main axle with a longer axle.
• Replaced the half axles with shorter parts.
• Changed the left and right front wings to fit the new frame.
Figure 11: Modified Go-Cart Assembly
4. Erase the assembly and the associated model, click File > Erase
Current . Click > OK .
5. Erase the layout from memory, click File > Erase > Current >
Yes .
6. To erase the generic assembly members, click File > Erase > Not
Displayed > OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Developing Layouts

Task 1. Start the creation of a layout called ENGINE.
1. Click File > New > Layout . Type [engine] as the name. Click
OK .
2. To specify the drawing sheet size, In the NEW LAYOUT dialog

box, from the STANDARD SIZE list, select A. Click OK . The
drawing border displays on the screen.
Task 2. Import an IGES file into the layout to initiate the development
of a figure.
1. To import a file, click Insert > Data from File .
2. Select PARTIAL_SECTION.IGS, then click Open . The section

represents part of a piston assembly, without the piston.
Figure 12: Imported IGES File
Task 3. Develop a 2-D sketch in the layout to represent the piston.
1. Select Sketch > Parametric Sketch .

NOTES
2. Click Utilities > Sketcher Preferences and select the option to

snap to Horizontal/Vertical. Close the window.
3. Create a crossed pair of two construction lines to use as a guide.

Click Sketch > Construction Line > Crossed Pair .
4. In the REFERENCES dialog box, click . Select the top vertex

and the center of the circle from the imported geometry as
references. Click Done Sel .
Figure 13: Sketch References
5. Sketch a vertical line from the top vertex to the bottom vertex.
6. Click [Create Lines] and draw a vertical line to represent the

left side of the piston.
Figure 14: Sketching the Piston

NOTES
7. Sketch a horizontal line representing the top of the piston.
8. Sketch another horizontal line to represent the base of the piston.
9. Mirror the vertical line about the vertical construction line. Close
the REFERENCES dialog box. From the LAYOUT menu, click
Tools > Mirror . Select the vertical line and click Done Sel . Select
the vertical construction line.
Small
radius
Figure 15: Mirroring the Vertical Line
10. Trim the lines so that they form a box. Click Trim > Corner .
Select the mirrored vertical line and the upper horizontal line.
11. Repeat the same step for the lower horizontal line.
12. Click Done /Return to exit from the TOOLS menu.
Task 4. Clarify what the geometry represents by annotating the drawing.
1. Create balloons attached to the section. Click Insert > Balloon >
Leader > Make Note . Select the small radius (as the item to which
the system should attach the note). Click Done Sel > Done .
2. In the DISPLAY area, select where the balloon should display.
3. Type [crank_shaft] as the name of the component.

NOTES
4. Create another balloon for the piston representation. In the NOTES

TYPE menu, retain the selections and click Make Note . Select the
right vertical line. Click Done Sel > Done . Select location for
balloon, type [piston], and click Done /Return .
Figure 16: Adding the Balloons
5. If necessary, move the balloons. Click . Drag the balloon to the

new location, then click once to place the balloon.
6. If necessary, move the note that documents the names. Click ,

press and hold <SHIFT> and select both the text lines that you
created. Drag the notes.
Task 5. Document the layout of the engine further by adding

dimensions to the section.
1. Add a dimension for the diameter of the piston called PISTON_DIA

Click Insert > Dimension > New References . Select the top
horizontal line representing the piston. Click to place the
dimension.
2. Type [piston_dia] as the name, and type [3.00] as the value.

NOTES
3. To create another dimension for the connecting rod length, Select

the slanted line, then click . Type [rod_length] as the name,
and type [5.00] as the value.
4. Create a diameter dimension for the stroke, represented by the

construction circle. Click the circle twice, then click . Type
[stroke] as the name, and type [4.00] as the value.
5. Return to the LAYOUT menu.
6. If necessary, move the dimensions. Position the diameter

dimension vertically on the screen.
Figure 17: Adding the Dimensions
7. Convert the diameter dimension to linear. Click and select the

STROKE dimension. Right-click the selected dimension. Select
Toggle Type from the pop-up menu. The dimension now displays
linear.
8. Remove the diameter symbol from the text line. Right-click and
select Properties from the pop-up menu. Notice that the
PROPERTIES dialog box opens. Click the DIMENSION TEXT tab.
Using the arrow keys and backspace key, delete the portion of the
text line that reads {0:∅}. Click OK .
NOTES
9. If necessary, move the dimension value.
Task 6. Organize the layout and make it easier to use by tabulating the
parameters that you have created; then select a parameter directly from the
table to modify it’s value.
1. Create a table and locate it to the right of the figure. In the

LAYOUT menu, click Table > Create > By Num Chars . Select a
point to define the left vertex of the table. Refer to the following
figure.
select
this point
Figure 18: Adding the Table
2. Notice the strings of numerals displayed next to the point that you
have chosen. To define the width of the columns as 15 characters,
select the second 5 from the left. For the next column, select the
second 5 from the left again to define the width of the second
column. Click to finish defining the column.
3. Define six rows to allow for two lines of text. Select 3 from the
numerals displayed on the screen.
4. Repeat the process to define six rows for the table; then click
to finish.

NOTES
5. Change the justification of the cells. In the TABLE menu, click

Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Center > Middle . Select a cell in
each column. Read the prompt in the MESSAGE AREA.
6. Merge the cells at the top of the table to create one cell. In the
TABLE menu, click Modify Table > Merge . Select the two cells
across the top of the table.
7. Specify the title of the table. Click Enter Text . Select the top cell.
Type [parameters] as the name; then press <ENTER> twice.
8. Using the method outlined in the previous step, type the names in
the left column, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19: Entering Text
9. Add the parameter values in the right cell. Click Enter Text . Select
the cell beside the STROKE entry. Type [&stroke] in the cell and
press <ENTER> twice. Notice that the system automatically adds
the parameter to the table.
10. Type the parameter values for ROD_LENGTH and PISTON_DIA

using the same method.
Note:
Do not add the values for CYLINDERS and
DISPLACEMENT at this time.

NOTES
11. Click Done/Return to exit the TABLE menu.
Task 7. Add parameters to the layout to determine values for the

cylinder and displacement entries in the table.
1. In the LAYOUT menu, click Done/Return > Relation > Add

Param > Integer . Type [cylinders] as the name, and type [2] as
the value.
2. Show the existing parameters. Click Show Rel . Notice that the
INFORMATION WINDOW lists the cylinder parameter, as well as
the other dimensional parameters. Click Close .
3. Add a parameter named DISPLACEMENT by writing a

relationship to determine its value. In the RELATIONS menu, click
Add and type the following relation:
/* calculate the displacement of the engine
displacement = pi * (( piston_dia/2 )^2 ) *

stroke * cylinders
4. Add the new parameters into the table using the & symbol.
5. Confirm that the parameters have the correct values.
Figure 20: The Added Parameters

NOTES
Note:
Keep in mind the layout has no models declared to it yet.
6. Modify the stroke value to six. Click Edit > Value . Select the
4.00 value beside the STROKE entry. Type [6.00]. Regenerate
the layout and note the change in the displacement value.
Task 8. Use the layout to drive an existing assembly.
1. Click File > Open to retrieve the ENGINE_LAYOUT.ASM.
2. Modify the length of one of the connecting rods. Click Modify >
Mod Part . Select one of the CONNECTING_ROD_LO_PRT entries
from the Model Tree. Select the base protrusion and modify its
length from 5 to 10.
3. Regenerate the assembly. Click Regenerate > Automatic . Notice

that the connecting rods have pushed through the tops of the
piston.
4. Drive the connecting rod component using the layout. Open

CONNECTING_ROD_LO.PRT.
5. Show the relations of the model. Click Relations > Show Rel .
Notice there are no relations for this model. Click Done .
6. Declare the part to the engine layout. In the PART menu, click
Declare > Declare Lay . Select the ENGINE layout from the
menu.
7. Show the relations of the model again. Click Relations > Show
Rel . Notice that the parameters of the layout are now associated to
the part. Close the INFORMATION WINDOW.
8. Add a relationship to drive the length of the connecting rod from

the layout. Select the base protrusion of the connecting rod. Notice
the dimension parameters that the system displays. Click ADD .
Type the following relationship:
/* Length of rod controlled by layout
d83 = ROD_LENGTH

NOTES
Figure 21: Dimensions of the Rod
9. In the MODEL REL menu, click Done .
10. Regenerate the part. Notice that the rod returns back to the 5.00-
inch length, since the layout now drives it.
11. Close the window.
Task 9. The piston will not update its location in the assembly because
it was assembled to a component called a skeleton part instead of the
connecting rod. Change the layout so that it controls both the rod and
skeleton, so that the assembly will update correctly.
1. Open LAYOUT_SKELETON.PRT. The system retrieves a model

consisting of datum curves, axes and planes. Only the curves are
visible; the other features are on a layer and blanked.
2. Declare the model to the layout. Click Set up > Declare >
Declare Lay . Select the ENGINE layout. Click Done .
3. Add a relation to the component to drive the stroke represented by

the circle. Click Relations . Select the circle and the bottom curve
to show the dimensions. Click Add . Type the following relation on
two lines:
/*drive the engine stroke from layout engine
d3 = STROKE

NOTES
4. Add another relationship to drive the length of the curve that

represents the connecting rod. Type the following two lines:
/*drive connecting rod length from layout
engine
d22 = ROD_LENGTH
Task 10. Drive the diameter of the piston from the layout.
1. Open PISTON_LO.PRT.
2. Declare the piston to the layout. Click Declare > Declare Lay .
Select the ENGINE layout.
3. Add a relation to control the piston diameter from the layout. Click
Relations . Select the base protrusion of the piston. Click Add and
type the following:
/*Piston diameter is driven by layout engine
d2 = PISTON_DIA
Figure 22: Driving the Diameter of the Piston from the Layout
4. Save the piston and close the window.

NOTES
Task 11. You have declared the components to the layout and written
relations using the layout parameters. Control the assembly from the
layout.
1. Activate the layout window. Click Window > ENGINE.LAY:1.
2. Click Edit > Value . Change the values of STROKE from 6.00 to
7.00, PISTON DIA from 3.00 to 4.00, and ROD LENGTH from
5.00 to 10.00.
3. Regenerate and save the layout.
4. Activate the engine layout assembly. Click Window >

ENGINE_LAYOUT.ASM.
5. Regenerate the assembly. Click Regenerate > Automatic . Notice

that the entire assembly updates correctly.
Original Assembly Modified Assembly
Figure 23: Modifying the Assembly
6. Save the assembly.
7. Erase the assembly and the associated model, click File > Erase
Current . Click > OK .
8. Erase the layout from memory, click File > Erase > Current >
Yes .
9. To erase the generic assembly members, click File > Erase > Not
Displayed > OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• Layouts are useful in documenting the design process.

• Layouts can be created at any time during the design process.
• Layouts can be used to control the design from one central location.
• Models may be changed by changing the layout rather than by opening
the entire model to make a simple change.

Designing with Skeletons

In this module you learn how to use skeleton models to develop
products in a top-down design environment.
Objectives
• Create a skeleton part.

• Relate assembly components to a skeleton.
• Use skeleton geometry for modeling.
• Control a skeleton model.
• Use various skeleton properties.
Page 11-1
NOTES
USING SKELETON PARTS

A skeleton part is a special part model created in the context of an
assembly to develop design criteria without having to create components
and assemble them together. The skeleton part is a 3-D layout of an
assembly that is used as the framework to build the assembly.
You can use skeleton parts for:
• Interfaces – Skeletons can be created and employed as design

interfaces between components.
Figure 1: Plastic Container Interfaces
Figure 2: Engine Assembly Interfaces

NOTES
• Staking Space Claims – Skeletons can be used to create space claims

for subassemblies, which establishes an interface between the master
assembly and subassemblies in the model.
Figure 3: Space Claims for Subassemblies
• Determining Assembly Motion – Skeletons can specify the

movement of an assembly, in order to establish complex linkage
motion before adding components.
Figure 4: Skeleton for Motion of Piston

Des igning w ith Sk eleto ns Pag e 1 1-3
NOTES
Creating the Skeleton

You can create a skeleton part in the assembly. You have full control of
the level and the location of its existence.
Notes:
You can only create one skeleton in each assembly, but
skeletons can exist in each subassembly that belongs to a top-
level assembly. [You can have multiple skeletons in each
assembly with the config option “multiple_skeletons_allowed”
set to “yes”].
If you create the skeleton after assembling the components, the

system automatically redefines the placement of the skeleton
as the first component using an “origin to origin” constraint.
To make it easier to use skeletons in your model, you can add layers and
modify the names of features.
Relating Assembly Components to Skeletons

You can assemble components on to the skeleton part, establishing a
relationship between the assembly components and the skeleton models, in
order to:
• Reduce the parent/child hierarchy – The skeleton becomes the

master parent to many of the components in the assembly.
Figure 5: Example of Parent/Child Relationship

NOTES
• Limit the scope for selecting constraints – The Reference Control

option in the Design Manager functionality allows you to assemble
models only to the skeleton rather than to each other.
• Control component locations – You assemble the components to the
skeleton, the system updates the components’ locations automatically
when you modify the space claims in the skeleton.
• Control motion at a centralized location – By modifying the
skeleton component, you control the motion of a component linkage.
Using Skeleton Geometry for Modeling

When you create or add a part to an assembly, you can reference skeleton
geometry by copying it.
You also have the option to create geometry features. This offers the
following advantages over manually copying a skeleton feature:
• You can select different forms of geometry, such as axes, curves, and
surfaces in a single feature.
• The system automatically associates geometry features to layers of the
same name, if the selected feature is associated with a layer in the
skeleton.
• The geometry automatically updates when the assembly containing the
geometry feature is in RAM.
• You can turn the dependency on and off, which allows you to control
change propagation.
Controlling the Skeleton Model

You can control and modify the skeleton model in various ways. Using
Modify > Mod Skel , you can modify assembly dimensions, as well as add
and define geometry.
Defining Additional Skeleton Properties

The following additional skeleton properties help you to effectively use
skeleton models in the development of your design:
• Deleting Skeletons – You can delete a skeleton model from the

assembly, but removing it does not remove the skeleton part file from
the disk.

NOTES
• Filtering the Skeleton from a Bill of Materials – When creating a

Bill of Materials (BOM) report in a production drawing using
Pro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically filter skeleton
models from the display.
• Excluding Skeletons from Simplified Representations – You can
easily exclude skeleton models from simplified representations of an
assembly. The Model Tree labels a skeleton model with a unique icon
to distinguish it from other part models.
• Tracking – Pro/PDM and Pro/INTRALINK do not manage the
references between the skeleton and the components, only the
relationship between the assembly and the components.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create a skeleton part that can be used to simulate
motion in an assembly.
Method
In Exercise 1, you build a skeleton to represent the motion of a one-
cylinder engine for the go-cart motor.
In Exercise 2, you set up a parent/child relationship between the

components and the skeleton model, assemble the crank shaft by copying
the skeleton geometry, and then modify the crank shaft at the part level.
In Exercise 3, you make modifications to the skeleton assembly, change

the parameters in the associated layout, and verify the parent/child
relationship.
Tools
Table 1: Icons for Skeletons
Icons Description
Insert datum curve
Insert datum axis
Insert datum plane
Insert datum points

In Session

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Building the Motor Skeleton

Task 1. Create an assembly. Use a standard part file to create a skeleton
model as the first part.

2. Create the SKEL_ENGINE.ASM. Click File > New > Assembly.

Type [SKEL_ENGINE]. Click OK .
3. Click Component > Create > Skeleton Model > OK . In the

CREATION OPTIONS dialog box, click Copy From Existing >
Browse . Select the START_PART.PRT. Click Open > OK .
Note:
In the Model Tree, the system lists the skeleton part as the first
component in the assembly. It automatically adds the datums
of the start part to the skeleton part. Notice the skeleton icon in
the Model Tree.
4. Save the assembly, then close the window.
Task 2. Develop the linkage for the crank and piston. Define a curve to
represent the stroke of the engine.
1. Click File > Open . Click . Select SKEL_ENGINE_SKEL.PRT

and click OK .
2. Click > Sketch > Done . Select the FRONT datum as the
sketching plane and click OKAY
3. Click Top and select the TOP datum plane.
4. Sketch a circle with a diameter of 4.00.
5. Finish creating the sketch and the feature.
6. Change to the DEFAULT view.

NOTES
Figure 6: Sketch for Circle
7. To create an axis, click > Two Planes . Select the SIDE and
TOP datum planes.
Task 3. Create a sketched datum curve to represent the crankshaft

connecting rod connection.
1. Create a sketching plane for the curve. Click > Offset . Select
the FRONT datum plane from which to offset.
2. Click Enter Value and type [1.75] and click Done .
Figure 7: New Sketching Plane

NOTES
3. Create the curve to represent the connection. Click > Sketch >
Done .
4. Select DTM1 as the sketching plane and click Okay. Click Top and
select the SIDE datum plane.
5. In the REFERENCES dialog box, delete the F1(SIDE) reference.
6. Define the left side of the datum circle and the datum axis as
references for sketching.
7. Sketch two lines, as shown in the following figure.

½ The first line represents the crank rotation and is 30 degrees
from the top datum plane.
½ The second line represents the rod length and is of 5 length.
Endpoint to
TOP datum
Endpoint to
Datum Axis
A-1
Endpoint to
circular
datum
curve
Figure 8: Sketch for Connecting Rod and Crank
8. Delete the tangent constraint, if there is a conflict.
9. Finish creating the sketch and the feature.
10. Change to the DEFAULT view. The model should appear as shown

NOTES
Figure 9: Connecting Rod Number One
Task 4. To aid in the assembly and component creation process, add a

datum axis to represent the joints of the connecting rod and piston.
1. To create datum points through the vertices of the curves, click

> On Vertex . Select the two vertices, as shown in the following
figure. Click > .

Select these
vertices.
Figure 10: Creating Datum Axis
2. Create a datum axis through the point PNT0. Click > Pnt Nrm
Pln . Select DTM1 and then select PNT0. Click > .
3. Using the same procedure, create another axis through the point
PNT1.

NOTES
Figure 11: Finished Skeleton
Tips & Techniques:

By setting the configuration file option repeat_datum_create
to yes, you can reduce the number of menu selections that you
have to make to create multiple datums.
Task 5. Confirm that the skeleton’s motion is appropriate by modifying

the angle on the datum curve. Automate the modification by using a
relation. The relation should cause the angle to increment by 30 degrees
each time that you regenerate the part.
1. To check the skeleton motion, click Modify. Select a straight line.

Change the 30 angle to 75 and regenerate.
2. Click Relations > Add Param > Real Number . Type

[crank_angle] as the name. Type [0] as the parameter value.
3. Define the relation. Click Show Dim > , then select the one of
the straight line. Make note of the symbolic name of the angle
dimension.

NOTES
4. Click Edit Rel . In the Notepad, type the following:

crank_angle = crank_angle +30
IF crank_angle > 340
crank_angle = 0
ENDIF
D# = crank_angle
[Where D# is the symbolic name for the angle]
In the Notepad, click File > Exit > Yes .
5. To finish defining the relations, click Done in the MODEL REL

menu.
6. Regenerate the model. Continue to regenerate until the section

rotates back to 30 degrees from the TOP datum plane.
7. Save the part and close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating the Crank Model

Task 1. Investigate the associativity between the skeleton part and the
assembly.
1. Open SKEL_ENGINE.ASM.
2. Note the full associativity. The system has updated the assembly to
reflect all of the work that you performed in Part mode.
Note:
Once you added the default datums to the skeleton part, you
could create the other geometry in the assembly using Modify
> Mod Skel .
Task 2. Set up this assembly such that components are children only to
the skeleton.
1. Click Design Mgr > Ref Control . In the EXTERNAL REFERENCE

CONTROL dialog box, select Skeleton Model .
2. Click OK > Done /Return .
Task 3. Set up datums in the skeleton so that the crank model retains its
orientation to its own datum planes when it rotates.
1. Click Modify > Mod Skel . Select the skeleton model.
2. To create a datum plane, click > Through . Select axis A_1 in

the skeleton. Click Through again. Select the axis shown in the
following figure. Click Done .

NOTES
Figure 12: Adding a Datum Plane
3. To create another datum plane, click > Through . Select axis

A_1. Click Normal . Select DTM2 and click Done .
4. Return to the ASSEMBLY menu.
Figure 13: Completed Datums
Task 4. Define the crank shaft within the context of the assembly.
1. Click Component > Create . In the COMPONENT CREATE dialog

box, retain the selection PART and type [sample_shaft]. Click
OK > Locate Default Datums > Three Planes > OK .

NOTES
2. Select DTM3 on the skeleton to define the first plane.
3. Select DTM2 and the FRONT datum as the other two planes on the
skeleton.
4. Click Done/Return .
Task 5. Copy references into the part to create the crank.
1. To copy the geometry from the skeleton into the shaft, in the FEAT
CLASS menu, click Data Sharing> Copy Geom .
2. In the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box, click Misc Ref > Define . In
the MISC REF dialog box, click Axis . Select the axes shown in the
following figure. Click Dtm Plane . Select DTM1 in the skeleton
part. Click Ok .
Select this
datum.
Select these
two axes.
Figure 14: Selecting Features to Copy
3. Click OK from the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box.

NOTES
Task 6. The system automatically adds the geometry to the sample shaft
part. Modify the shaft at the part level.
1. Open SAMPLE_SHAFT.PRT.
2. To create the central shaft of the part, click Insert > Protrusion >
Extrude > Solid > Both Sides > Done .
3. Select DTM3 as the sketching plane then click Okay.
4. Click Top then select the DTM2 datum plane.
5. Sketch a circle of 1.25 diameter and finish the sketch.
6. Define the depth as 12.25.
Figure 15: Sketch for Central Shaft
7. Finish defining the protrusion.
8. Create a protrusion on DTM4. Click Insert > Protrusion >

Extrude > Solid > Both Sides > Done .
9. Select DTM4 as the sketching plane and click Okay.
10. Click Top and select DTM2.
11. Specify axis A1 and A2 as references.
12. Sketch the section shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 16: Sketch for Crank Lobe
13. Finish defining the feature with depth as 2.
14. Cut away the opening for the connecting rod. Create an extruded
cut on both sides using the same sketching and reference plane.
Create a circle for the section as shown in the following figure.
Remove the material from the outside of the section. Extrude to a
depth of 1.5.
Figure 17: Sketch for Cut

NOTES
Figure 18: The Completed Sample Shaft
15. Save the part file and close the window.
16. Open SKEL_ENGINE.ASM again. Notice that the sample shaft

updated. Regenerate the assembly a few times to confirm that the
shaft maintains its relationship with the assembly.
17. Save and the assembly.
18. Erase the assembly and associated models from memory.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Using the Skeleton to Complete the

Assembly
Task 1. Make modifications to COMPLETE_SKELETON.ASM.
1. Open COMPLETE_SKELETON.ASM.
2. An assembly cut was added so that you can see the detail in the
components.
3. Click Regenerate > Automatic . Notice that the components

update their location because of the relations. Regenerate a few
times to observe the changes.
Tips & Techniques:

You may want to turn off the display of axes and points.
Figure 19: Modified Skeleton

NOTES
4. Modify the stroke of the assembly. Click Modify > Mod Skel .
Select SAMPLE_MOTOR_SKEL.PRT from the Model Tree. Select
the circular datum curve. Try to modify the diameter to 5. Read the
prompt in the MESSAGE AREA.
Task 2. The layout drives some of the parameters in the assembly.

Modify the parameters in the layout table.
1. Open COMPLETE_SKELETON.LAY.
Figure 20: Displacement Layout
2. Click Edit > Value . Select the 4-inch parameter in the table next to
the entry STROKE. Type [5].
3. Select the 5-inch dimension next to the table entry of ROD

LENGTH. Type [7].
4. Regenerate the layout.
5. Save the layout and close the window.
Task 3. Check the changes that you made to the assembly.
1. Click Window > Activate .

NOTES
2. Regenerate the assembly. Notice that the system updated all of the
models with respect to the skeleton model.
Task 4. Check the parent/child association between components.
1. Suppress the connecting rods in the assembly. Click Component >

Suppress . Select the two connecting rods. Regenerate the
assembly. Notice that the pistons retain the reference to the
skeleton model.
2. Save the assembly and erase all objects from memory. Click File >
Erase > Current . Click > OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Skeletons can be used to simulate motion in simple assemblies.

• Skeletons can aid in parent child relationship definition when all of the
components are assembled to the skeleton.
• Skeletons can be as simple or as complex as necessary, but are
typically components of surface and datum geometry only.
• Top-down design techniques can be implemented by using the copy
geometry features to create new geometry that references the skeleton.

Skeletons with Mapped Geometry

In this module you learn techniques for sharing information
throughout different design groups, while maintaining associativity
with the top-level assembly.
Objectives
• Construct a skeleton for mapping existing geometry.

• Share associative geometrical information between models.
Page 12-1
NOTES
USING SKELETONS WITH MAPPED GEOMETRY

Using a skeleton with mapped geometry in a large design project:
• Provides a mechanism for driving and maintaining form, fit, and

function in each subassembly that you use at the top level.
• Provides access to top-level information in the subassembly without
resulting in increased regeneration and repaint time.
• Enables multiple users to accomplish concurrent engineering.
• Reduces assembly-level revision conflicts.
Constructing Mapped Skeletons

You construct a mapped skeleton in an assembly and locate it to the top-
level default datum planes using Component > Create .
Figure 1: Creating Map Skeletons
The following table outlines the steps for creating skeletons with mapped
geometry.

NOTES
Table 1: Steps for Creating Skeletons with Mapped Geometry

Step Action
1 Add the main components to the top-level assembly using typical
assembly techniques.
Note: The assembled components should be those components
that define the needed references for the mapped skeleton.
2 Create a new subassembly using a template.
3 Create a skeleton using a template and assemble in the default
location of the subassembly as the first component.
4 Copy needed references into the skeleton using data sharing
features—copy geom, shrinkwrap, etc.
5 Use the shared data features in the skeleton to design models in
the subassembly.
Using Model Geometry

When referencing a mapped skeleton in a large design project, you can
either create individual datum and surface features, or a single feature that
uses all geometric references.
To create or modify the skeleton with mapped geometry in the context of

the assembly, you can create a Data Sharing feature, such as copy geom
and shrinkwrap. This offers the following advantages over manually
copying a skeleton with mapped geometry:
• You can select different forms of geometry, such as axes, curves, and
surfaces in a single feature.
• The system automatically associates data sharing features to layers of
the same name if the selected feature is associated to a layer on the
component from which you copied the geometry.
• The data sharing feature does not allow you to select references from
more than one component.
• The data sharing feature automatically updates when the assembly
within which you created the feature is in RAM.
• You can turn the dependency on and off, which allows you to control
change propagation.

Sk eleto ns with Mapp ed Geomet ry Pag e 1 2-3
NOTES
Copying Surfaces
Surfaces are infinitely thin features. Using Surface > Copy, you can
duplicate any other surface of a feature by selecting only the surfaces that
you need, such as the mounting face on a flange.
• The yellow edge of a surface denotes a one-sided edge.

• A magenta edge denotes a two-sided edge, tangency line, or silhouette
edge of the surface.
Figure 2: Map Skeleton for Pipe Routing
Note:
You should avoid copying surfaces of components that have
been assembled to the mapped skeleton. This can create a
circular reference.

NOTES
Using the Mapped Skeleton at the Subassembly

Level
Once surfaces are copied into the subassembly, you can work at the
subassembly level by assembling components to the mapped skeleton
geometry.
Figure 3: Piping Added into Subassembly
Figure 4: Pipes Automatically in Top-Level Assembly

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create a mapped skeleton that captures critical
design criteria. Using a mapped skeleton allows you to have high-level
assembly geometry in session without having the actual large assembly
in RAM.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create geometry based on a large and complex
assembly. You use a mapped skeleton to copy only the references that are
needed for the particular component.
In Exercise 2, you create the exhaust reference geometry based on the

assembly. To save time, you create a skeleton with mapped geometry to
define the exhaust system references.
Tools
Table 2: Skeletons with Mapped Geometry Icons
Icons Description
Assemble at default location
Make selected layers blanked

Repaint the Screen
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Mapped Skeleton

Task 1. The carburetors require an exact fit to the engine. Create a
mapped skeleton with this information inside a new subassembly.

2. Open M_ENGINE.ASM.

NOTES
Figure 5: The Engine Assembly
Task 2. The screen is fairly cluttered with extraneous parts. Use an

existing layer to blank the components.
1. Click View > Layers . Select CLEAN_UP_DISPLAY; click >

> Close .
Figure 6: Engine with Layer Blanked

NOTES
Task 3. Define the subassembly and mapped skeleton for the carburetor.
1. Click Component > Create > SubAssembly. Type

[m_carburetor]. Click OK .
2. In the CREATION OPTIONS dialog box, click Copy From

Existing > Browse . Select START_ASM.ASM. Click Open > OK .
3. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click > OK .
Task 4. Start the definition of the mapped skeleton.
1. Click Done/Return to reach the highest level menu. Click Modify

> Mod Subasm . Select M_CARBURETOR.ASM.
2. Click Component > Create . Click Skeleton Model from the

dialog box. Type [map_carburetor]. Click OK .
3. Click Copy From Existing > Browse . Select START_PART.PRT.

Click Open > OK .
Figure 7: M_Carburator Subassembly

NOTES
Task 5. Copy some of the assembly references from the engine into the
carburetor subassembly. Copy the surfaces and axis of the mounting
locations for the carburetor from the engine block.
1. Click Done /Return twice to access the ASSEMBLY menu. Click

Modify > Mod Part . Select MAP_CARBURETOR.PRT from the
Model Tree.
2. Click Feature > Create > Data Sharing > CopyGeom .
3. In the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box, double-click Surface Refs .
4. Select both mating surfaces for the carburetor, as shown in the

following figure. Click Done Sel .
Select these mating

surfaces
Outer edge
Inner edge
5. Click Loop Surfs and select the front surface of one of the parts
again. Select one of the outer edges of the selected surface as
shown in the previous figure. Pro/ENGINEER automatically
selects all of the surfaces that are adjacent to the selected surface.
6. Click Loop Surfs and select the front surface again; then select
one of the inner edges of the surface.
Tips & Techniques:

To confirm which surfaces you selected, use the Show >
Mesh option before clicking Done .

NOTES
7. Repeat the process for the second intake port.
8. Click Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Do not click OK yet.
9. Double-click Misc Refs . Click Axis from the ADD ITEM area;
select the four axes required to mount the carburetors.
Click Done Sel > OK .
10. To finish copying the surfaces, click OK from the dialog box.
11. Save M_ENGINE.ASM.
12. Open M_CARBURETOR.ASM. The assembly should display as

Copied surfaces
and axes
Figure 9: The Finished Carburetor Map
13. Close all windows.
14. Erase models from memory. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed
> OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Mapping the Exhaust

Task 1. The exhaust pipes require an exact fit to the engine and frame
along with various frame mounting locations. Create a mapped skeleton
that contains this reference geometry.
1. Open the MAP_CART.ASM.
2. Reorient the model to a view that is similar to the one shown in the
following figure.
Figure 10: The Map View
Task 2. Start a map for the exhaust assembly by defining a subassembly

in the mapped skeleton
1. Click Component > Create > SubAssembly. Type [exhaust].

Click OK .
2. Click Copy From Existing > Browse . Select START_ASM.ASM.

Click Open > OK .
Task 3. Add the mapped skeleton as the first component in the

subassembly. Create a part in the context of the top-level assembly.
1. Click Done /Return to access the ASSEMBLY menu.

NOTES
2. Click Modify > Mod Subasm . Select EXHAUST.ASM from the

Model Tree.
3. Click Component > Create > Skeleton Model . Type

[map_exhaust].
4. Click Copy From Existing > Browse . Select START_PART.PRT.

Click Open > OK .
Task 4. Add copy data sharing features to create references that you can
use at the subassembly level.
1. Click Done /Return twice to access the ASSEMBLY menu. Click

Modify > Mod Part . Select MAP_EXHAUST.PRT from the Model
Tree.
Figure 11: Map_Exhaust Part
2. Click Feature > Create > Data Sharing > CopyGeom .
3. Double-click Surface Ref .
4. Select the mating surfaces of the exhaust ports, as shown in the

following figure.
5. Use Loop Surfaces to copy the outer and inner loops of surfaces.
6. Click Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Do not click OK yet.
NOTES
Select these outer Select these

loops mating surfaces
Select these inner

loops
Figure 12: Mapping the Port Surfaces
7. Double-click Misc Refs . Click Axis from the ADD ITEM area.
Select the four axes required to mount the exhaust pipes.
Click Done Sel > OK > OK .
Task 5. Copy the surfaces of the frame around which the exhaust
system must wrap.
1. Create another data sharing feature for the frame. Click Create >
Data Sharing > CopyGeom .
Copy both sides

of these frame
tubes.
Figure 13: Mapping the Frame

NOTES
2. Double-click Surface Refs . Select the surfaces shown in the

previous figure. Remember to select both sides of each cylinder.
3. Click OK from the dialog box.
4. Save the assembly
5. Open MAP_EXHAUST.PRT. The part should display as shown in

Figure 14: The Exhaust Mapped skeleton Shaded
6. Close the windows.
7. Erase models from memory. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed
> OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• How to make high-level assembly information available at the

subassembly level using mapped skeletons.
• How to create Data Sharing features that can be used to copy
references into mapped skeletons.
• How to create subassemblies within the context of the large assembly.
• How to create parts while in Assembly model.

Managing References
In this module you learn how dependencies, known as parent/child
relationships, develop between various objects and features within
Pro/ENGINEER.
Objectives
• Create parent/child dependencies.

• Find dependencies within a design by interrogating parts and
assemblies.
• Control dependencies between components.
Page 13-1
NOTES
DEFINING THE PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIP

During the Pro/ENGINEER design process, you frequently create
dependencies between objects, referred to as parent/child relationships.
To establish effective dependencies throughout your design model and to

avoid unwanted ones, you should become familiar with Pro/ENGINEER
terminology pertaining to parent/child relationships:
• Reference – an entity used to define a relationship between two items,

as when locating or sizing a feature within an assembly.
• External reference – an entity the system uses to locate or size a
feature that exists in another model outside the current model.
• Dependency – a relationship between an object and another
referenced entity.
Benefits of Designing with External References

Creating external references offers many benefits, such as allowing you to
do the following:
• Design features that meet overall design intent by locating to, sizing
by, and shaping by geometry in the assembly.
• Establish relationships between models so that if one or more of them
changes, others change automatically.
• Easily copy geometry from one model to another.
• Consolidate control of geometry in skeleton model(s) so that making a
change to it ripples down to components that reference it.
Creating Dependencies
The following table lists various ways that you can create parent/child
relationships within a design model.

NOTES
Table 1: Creating Parent/Child Relationships

Dependency Action
Between two features, during part Select a sketching plane and reference
creation plane.
Dimension to or reference existing
geometry.
Use the Align constraint
Use Edge or Offset Edge.
Create concentric arcs and circles only
when you select existing geometry.
Use the depth options that require you to
select a reference such as a surface, edge,
datum, or point (Up to Curve, Up to
Point, Up to Surface, and Thru Until).
Select the placement and dimensional
references for select and place features.
Use Dependent when copying a feature.
Between two components in an Assemble a component to other
assembly components in the assembly (the
component then depends on the other
components for its placement within the
assembly).
Use Mirror, Merge, or Cutout to create
a dependency between components but
not to the assembly (one part then
depends on another part for its geometry).
Between a component and an Create or modify part features and
assembly reference other components for the
sketching plane, horizontal or vertical
reference plane, dimensioning reference,
aligning reference, etc.
Create an assembly level feature and
make the feature visible at the part level,
or you use the New Names option at the
assembly level.
Create an assembly level feature and
reference a component during feature
creation.

M a n a g i n g Ref e ren ce s Pag e 1 3- 3
NOTES
INTERROGATING EXISTING OBJECTS

Before making design changes to a model constructed by another user,
you should become familiar with the part or assembly and determine how
it was constructed. To interrogate existing objects, you can use any of the
following three tools.
Info Pull-Down Menu

You can use the Info option to obtain information about regeneration,
dependencies, components, models, and Bill of Materials (BOM).
• Regeneration • Model
Information
• BOM
• Parent/Child
• Component
Model Tree Tool

The Model Tree tool can provide you with dynamic feedback concerning
the creation of an object within Part and Assembly mode. This tool shows
only the regenerated objects in their respective order by default; however,
you can customize the format to meet your needs. You can access
information about a model by using the TREE pull-down menu.
Figure 1: Model Tree Tool (Separate Window)

NOTES
Global Reference Viewer

To identify internal and external references within a part or assembly,
you can interrogate the model using the Global Reference Viewer.
Figure 2: Global Reference Viewer
Listing Parent/Child References

Using this Global Reference Viewer tool, you can list the parent or child
references of components or features that have internal and/or external
references to the active item.
To set a different current item, select a feature, component, or assembly;

then click Actions > Set Current . Using the PARENT AND CHILD
REFERENCES dialog box, you can interrogate the selected reference to
determine the following:
• Parent or child references based on the creation of features with

external references
• Models that have parent/child relationships
• Placement constraints that develop parent/child relationships

NOTES
Limiting the Scope of Information
Using the FILTER SETTINGS, you can define the scope of information that
the Global Reference Viewer provides. You can customize it to show:
• The component you want to view in the initial tree.

• The reference type.
• The objects that have parent relationships rather than objects that have
child references.
Determining Relationship Hierarchy

Using the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER, you can also determine the
hierarchy to the references associated with a model.
Figure 3: Relationship Hierarchy
CONTROLLING INTERDEPENDENCIES
Using Utilities > Reference Control , you can define the scope for
creating references to other models in a working session of
Pro/ENGINEER.
Setting Object-Specific Reference Control

When you specify the scope setting and reference-handling scheme for
each object individually, the system stores the information with the object
and applies it to each assembly in which the object appears.
You can access the REFERENCE CONTROL dialog box using any of the
following methods.

NOTES
Table 2: Accessing the Reference Control Dialog Box.

Method: Action:
For a particular part or Click Part Setup > Ref Control
skeleton
For a part in the Click Modify > Mod Part > Ref Control
assembly
For a skeleton in the Click Modify > Mod Skel > Ref Control
assembly
For a subassembly Click Modify > Mod Subasm > Design Mgr >
Ref Control
For the top-level Click Assembly > Design Mgr > Ref Control
assembly of the active
assembly window
From the Model Tree Select any object with the right mouse button; then
click Ref Control from the pop-up menu.
Reference Control Settings

To specify the scope, you can select settings from the REFERENCE
CONTROL dialog box.
Figure 4: REFERENCE CONTROL Dialog Box
Reference handling options define the system behavior that should occur
when you attempt to create an external reference that violates the defined
scope. Selection settings provide color feedback for out of scope
references and selection options for out of scope references.

NOTES
Note:
If you bring into session the model containing the original
reference, but the original reference has been deleted or
suppressed, the system places you in Feature Resolve Mode,
even if you have local backup copies of the references.
Using Copy Geometry Features to Track and Control

External References
Using the Copy Geom option, you can easily track and control external
references by consolidating them into one copy geometry feature.
By changing the Dependency element of the feature, you can specify

whether the system should reflect changes made to the original model in
the copy.
Note:
While assembling components into a subassembly at the top-
level assembly, you can specify assembly references (among
the constraints) that are outside of the subassembly into which
you are assembling. If you retrieve the subassembly without
the top-level assembly in session, component placement fails
because the references are missing.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you investigate a model to determine how it is
constructed and to identify the parent/child relationships.
Method
In Exercise 1, you use the global reference viewer to interrogate the model
and you use Reroute and Redefine to change the references.
In Exercise 2, you investigate the head part to determine how it was

constructed and identify the parent/child relationships of certain features.
In Exercise 3, you investigate the front suspension assembly to determine

how it was constructed and identify the dependencies that were
established.
EXERCISE 1: Modifying the Piston

Task 1. Interrogate the model to determine feature dependencies.
Determine how it is being regenerated.

2. Open PISTON_PC.PRT.
3. Investigate the regeneration order. Click Info > Model from the
menubar. Notice that the features are listed in the order of creation.
Close the window.
4. Click Utilities > Model Player to regenerate the model one feature
at a time.
Tips & Techniques:

To obtain more information about the regenerating feature,
click Info Feat to display feature information or Show Dims
to view the dimensions used to create the feature.

NOTES
Task 2. Use the Model Tree to interrogate the model, in order to

determine how the part was constructed.
1. Click Utilities >Customize Screen > Options > Display as

separate window > OK.
2. In the MODEL TREE, expand all of the items.
Tips & Techniques:

It is always good practice to use Setup > Name to assign
names to important features.
Figure 5: Expanded Model Tree

NOTES
Task 3. Interrogate the first cut feature to identify any parent/child

relationships.
1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click ROD_PIN_HOLE > Info >

Parent/Child Info .
2. Review the REFERENCE INFORMATION WINDOW.
Task 4. Interrogate the individual references.
1. The system lists DTM3 because it is the sketching plane reference

for the feature. Click the + next to PROTRUSION ID 7.
Figure 6: Reference Information Window
2. Select SURFACE ID 13. This highlighted surface is the reference

plane. Also note that AXIS A_1 was referenced.
3. Select EDGE ID 12 and note the dimensional reference to the top

front edge of the piston. Click Close .

Managi ng Refe rence s Pag e 1 3-11
NOTES
Tip:
You should avoid selecting edges as references if you can
select a coplanar surface in the model. It would be more
appropriate to dimension to the top piston surface.
Figure 7: The Piston Model
Task 5. Change the dimensional reference for the rod pin hole from the
edge to the surface.
1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click ROD_PIN_HOLE > Edit

References. Click Yes to roll back the part.
2. Read the prompt in the MESSAGE AREA and accept the existing
sketching plane. Click Same Ref .
3. Click Same Ref to accept the bottom horizontal reference.
4. When AXIS A_1 highlights for the dimensioning reference, click

Same Ref .

NOTES
5. For the next dimensioning reference, click Alternate. Select the

top surface of the piston.
Task 6. Recall that the orientation reference of the model was the
bottom of the piston when the dimensional reference was the top of the
piston. This is an unnecessary parent/child relationship. Change the
reference.
1. In the Model Tree, right-click Rod_Pin_Hole > Redefine .
2. To change the section, double-click Section from the dialog box.

Click Sketch Plane .
3. Click Same Ref to retain DTM3 as the sketching plane.
4. Retain ALTERNATE as the default. Click Top then DTM2.
Task 7. Finish the redefinition of the feature. The system places you in
Sketcher mode. Pro/ENGINEER automatically regenerates the section to
determine if it is still valid.
1. Click > OK .
Note:
The main difference between redefining and rerouting a
sketching and reference plane is that redefining automatically
brings up the dialog box. To avoid Sketcher regeneration, click
Reroute .
2. [Optional] Use the information options that you learned previously

to check the parent/child references.
Displayed .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Breaking External References

Task 1. It is good practice to determine how a model was constructed
before making any changes to it. Investigate how the engine head part was
created.
1. Retrieve HEAD_PC.PRT.
Figure 8: Engine Head Part
2. Click Utilities > Model Player to regenerate the model one feature
at a time.
Note:
You do not have to step through every feature using
Continue . If you click Quit , the system completes the
regeneration of the model.
Task 2. Use the Info menu to interrogate the model and determine
feature dependencies.
1. Click Info > Global Ref Viewer .

NOTES
2. View individual feature references as shown in the following

figure. Select the FILTER SETTING bar to expand it. Click Feature
in the REF TYPE area. Click All in the REF EXTENT area. Click All
Objects in the DISPLAYED OBJECTS area . Double-click
GASKET_MOUNT to make it the current object.
Figure 9: Global Reference Viewer
3. Note that this feature has an external parent reference to

ENGINE_PC.ASM.
4. Identify all features that have external references to other parts.

Click External in the REF EXTENT area. The GLOBAL
REFERENCE VIEWER only displays those features with external
references.

NOTES
Figure 10: Showing Features with External References
Task 3. Redefine the GASKET_MOUNT feature to be independent of the

assembly.
1. Open ENGINE_PC.ASM.
2. Redefine the GASKET_MOUNT cut. Click Modify > Mod Part .

Select HEAD_PC from the Model Tree.
3. Click Feature > Redefine . Use the MODEL TREE to select the
GASKET_MOUNT. In the MODEL TREE, click Tree > Item
Display > Features. Expand the HEAD_PC.PRT using the + icon
then select GASKET_MOUNT .

NOTES
Figure 11: Gasket Mount in Model Tree
4. In the OPEN REP dialog box, click Master Rep > OK .
5. Double-click Section from the CUT: EXTRUDE dialog box; then

click Sketch .
6. Click Sketch > References from the menu bar. Select all
references in the dialog box. Click Delete .
7. Specify references for the centerlines to the part datums. Select

DTM3 and DTM2. Click Close .
8. Add two diameter dimensions and a horizontal dimension as


NOTES
Figure 12: Sketcher Dimensions for the Gasket Mount
9. After the section regenerates successfully, click > OK from the

dialog box.
10. Save and erase the assembly from memory.
11. Activate the HEAD_PC.PRT window.
12. Use the REFERENCE VIEWER to verify that the system has
removed the external references for this feature. Click Info >
Global Ref Viewer .
13. Set up the filter options to show external feature references. Make
sure that Feature, External and All Objects are selected in the
REF TYPE, REF EXTENT and DISPLAYED OBJECTS areas.
Double-click HEAD_PC.PRT . Notice that HEAD_PC.PRT has no
external parental references.

NOTES
Figure 13: Global Reference Viewer Dialog Box
Displayed .

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Suspension

Assembly
Task 1. Interrogate the assembly to determine its regeneration order.
1. Open PC_SUSPENSION.ASM.
Figure 14: The Front Suspension
2. Investigate the order in which components regenerate in the

assembly.
Task 2. Interrogate the assembly to identify references between

components and determine how components were assembled.
1. Click Info > Component from the menubar.

Select PC_SHOCK_RF.ASM.
2. To identify the referenced entities, select the first ALIGN constraint

from the dialog box. The assembly reference, AXIS A_17,
highlights in magenta. The component reference, AXIS A_2,
highlights in cyan.
3. Select the other two constraints and observe which components

highlight on the screen. Close the dialog box.

NOTES
Task 3. Use the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER to interrogate

component information.
1. Click Info > Global Reference Viewer menu bar. In the dialog
box; click Component, All, All Objects from REF TYPE, REF
EXTENT and DISPLAYED OBJECTS areas.
2. In the MAIN TREE, double-click PC_SHOCK_RF.ASM . Notice

that PC_FRNT_SKEL.PRT is a parent reference. Recall that the
A_17 axis is an alignment reference for assembling the component.
Tips & Techniques:

You can use Highlight in the TREE pull-down menu of the
GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER dialog box to select a
feature or component and highlight it on the screen.
Task 4. Use the Global Reference Viewer to interrogate model

information. Determine why there is an external reference between the
PC_WISHBONE.PRT and the PC_WHEEL.ASM. Repeat the process for
the PC_KNUCKLE_LF.PRT.
1. Click Feature from the REF TYPE area.
2. In the MAIN TREE, double-click PC_WISHBONE.PRT .
3. In the PARENT / CHILD TREE, right-click PC_WHEEL.ASM >

Info . The INFORMATION WINDOW explains that this component
is part of an interchange assembly. Close the window.
4. Change the current model. Expand PC_WHEEL_HUB_LF.ASM by

using the + icon. Double-click PC_KNUCKLE_LF.PRT .
5. Notice that this component has parent references outside this

assembly.
6. Right-click PC_KNUCKLE_RF.PRT > Full Path . Notice that the

PC_KNUCKLE_LF part was created as a mirrored component from
the component PC_KNUCKLE_RF part, shown in the following
figures.

NOTES
Figure 15: PC_KNUCKLE_LF Part
Figure 16: PC_KNUCKLE_RF Part
7. [Optional] Use the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER to investigate

other components inside this front suspension assembly; to
determine what kind of references were established, as well as how
they were established.
8. Save and erase the entire assembly when you have finished.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• Parent Child relationships are an integral part of the design process.

You must consider the effects downstream when you establish
references.
• The Design Manager is an important tool that allows you to control
what references you want to retain and those you want to modify or
delete.
• The Global Reference Viewer should be the first tool to use on a
model created by someone else.

Project Part 1: Design Intent

This is the first of four major stages in a Top-Down Design project
in which you are provided all critical design information without
step-by-step instructions.
The broad focus of Part 1 is on the capture of design intent and the
creation of a product structure.
Objectives
In this module you will complete the following:
• Capture initial project parameters and design intent in

Pro/ENGINEER using a layout.
• Develop the initial product structure in assembly mode.
Page 14-1
NOTES
PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS

Scenario
You are an engineer at the Faneuil Fan Factory (F3), a well-known
design and manufacturing company in Massachusetts.
F3 is committed to creating a new household product design before the

current fiscal quarter ends. Creating fans for individual consumer use is a
new market area for F3, as they had traditionally manufactured only for
the industrial market.
The rapid development of intelligent Pro/ENGINEER models is critical to

continued success at F3. Internally, the design is known as the VORTEX-
1200, the newest adaptation of F3’s popular VORTEX commercial line of
air management products.
VORTEX 1200 Project Goal

The goal of the entire project is to create a flexible assembly model for the
oscillating desk fan (shown in the following figures) using Top-Down
Design techniques.
Figure 1: Completed Fan Model

NOTES
Figure 2: Rear View of the Fan Assembly
Figure 3: Exploded View of Fan Assembly

P ro j e c t P a rt I Pag e 1 4- 3
NOTES
Figure 4: Fan Layout Information
Figure 5: Layout Table

NOTES
Design Requirements
The following is a list of requirements and parameters defined by the
product management team at F3.
• The entire Fan model must fit in a 12x12x15 container for shipping
and shelf space requirements.
• The Fan will use F3’s standard ¼ HP 110-volt motor/gearbox
Drivetrain Assembly as on the VORTEX-1800 model.
• The fan must adapt to use 3, 4, or 5 fan blades. A final decision from
F3’s design team has not been issued.
• The fan blades must fit within a safety cage diameter of 11 inches, and
a depth of 2.75.
• As per F3 standards, the blade diameter is defined by the cage
diameter. There is a clearance value of [0.50] between the fan tip and
the cage.
• The unit must have a total oscillation spread of at least 45°.
• The height of the fan must be easily modifiable from the base to the tilt
axis and from the tilt axis to the main axis. Initial values are [2.125]
and [4.25] respectively. The Tilt axis height may get drastically
modified for a ‘floor-stand’ version.
• The unit must be able to pivot vertically 90° to allow for the ‘wall-
mount’ capability.
• The Fan’s base needs to have a ‘sculpted’ look, according to recent
customer surveys. Also, the general styling of the fan will have a
‘retro’ look and feel.
• The unit will be modeled without wiring or electrical connections. A
hole with a [0.50] diameter (this may change) must be left in the lower
side of the rear housing for the electrical group. They will design the
wiring and install a F3 standard cord-mounted switch unit. The switch
unit controls power to the fan and can also switch the oscillation on
and off with a patented gearbox mounted Electro-clutch.
• All hardware fasteners will be standard from F3’s hardware library,
and therefore need not be modeled or assembled at this stage of
development.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you capture the initial project parameters and design
intent in Pro/ENGINEER, and then develop the initial product
structure.
Method
In Exercise 1, you use a layout in Pro/ENGINEER to capture initial
project parameters and design intent.
In Exercise 2, you develop an initial product structure in the assembly.
EXERCISE 1: Capturing Initial Design Intent

Task 1. Prepare for working on the project and create the layout file.
1. Clear all RAM and change the working directory to the PROJECT
folder.
2. Create a new layout named VORTEX-1200.LAY. Use the options

for EMPTY and C-SIZE.
Task 2. Setup the layout for sketching.
1. Set the following Sketch preferences.

NOTES
Figure 6: SKETCH PREFERENCES Dialog Box
2. Click View > Draft Grid > Grid Params and set the X&Y Spacing
to [0.250].
3. Enable the Parametric Sketch option.
Task 3. Sketch layout geometry.
1. Create the 2D geometry approximately as shown in the following

figure. The overall size is roughly 8” wide by 12” tall.

NOTES
Figure 7: Creating 2D Geometry
Task 4. Add the details.
1. Add the dimensions and axes. When prompted for values, type [0]
temporarily.
Figure 8: Adding Dimensions and Axes

NOTES
Task 5. Create a table of modifiable parameters.
1. Create the table and fill in only the captions (first two rows), as
2. Create parameters for MAX_HEIGHT, MAX_WIDTH,

MAX_DEPTH, NUM_BLADES, BLADE_CLEARANCE,
MIN_OSC_ANGLE, TILT_ANGLE, and ELEC_HOLE_DIA. Use the
Real Number option and the values as shown in the table.
3. Modify the CAGE_DEPTH, CAGE_DIA, INTERFACE_HEIGHT,

MAIN_HEIGHT, and TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT dimensions to the
values shown in the table.
4. Create the relation:

blade_dia = cage_dia – (blade_clearance*2)
5. Regenerate the Layout.
6. Type the values in the PARAMETER column as plain text.

For Example: MAX_HEIGHT.
7. Type the values in the VALUE column as parametric notes.

For Example: &MAX_HEIGHT.
8. Type the entries in the NOTES column as plain text.

NOTES
Figure 9: Critical Specifications
Task 6. Finish the layout.
1. Finish the layout, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 10: Completed Layout
2. Save the layout and close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Developing Initial Product Structure

Task 1. Create a new assembly and product structure.
1. Create a new Assembly called VORTEX-1200 using the default

template.
2. Using the Model Tree and the , create the

VORTEX-1200_SKEL part and the FAN_UNIT assembly using the
start models in the PROJECT directory, and default assembly
constraints. Refer to the following figure.
3. Use the Include option to include the F3_DRIVETRAIN

assembly. (an existing assembly from the F3 database)
4. Create the remainder of the models in the FAN_UNIT assembly.

Note that the F3_CAGE-11, F3_HUB, and F3_BLADE models
already exist and are Included .
5. Create the BASE_UNIT assembly and its components using the

start models in the PROJECT directory, and default assembly
constraints.

NOTES
Figure 11: Model Tree
6. Save the VORTEX-1200 Assembly.

Project Part II: Skeleton Design

In part two of the Top-Down Design project, you focus on the
creation of an intelligent skeleton model. The skeleton involves basic
skeleton features, motion, space claims, and interfaces.
Objectives
In this module you will:
• Create basic skeleton features.

• Create skeleton features for motion.
• Create skeleton features for space claims.
• Create skeleton features for interfaces.
Page 15-1
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating the Basic Skeleton

Task 1. Open the skeleton part and create the initial features.
1. Open the VORTEX-1200_SKEL model.
2. Rename the TOP datum. Click Setup > Name. Select the TOP
plane and type [GROUND]. Create the sketched datum curve, as
shown in the following figure. Rename the curve to [POST_CRV].
Figure 1: POST_CRV
3. Sketch a datum curve on the GROUND plane. (Or use the pre-
saved BASE.SEC file). Rename the curve to [BASE_CRV].
Figure 2: BASE_CRV

NOTES

In the following exercises, several datum features will be
created and renamed using Setup > Name . Create a mapkey
for renaming to improve your efficiency.
4. Create the TILT_REF plane through the upper vertex of the

POST_CRV, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3: TILT_REF plane
5. Create the TILT axis (intersection of the TILT_REF and RIGHT

planes), and the TILT_ANG plane (though the TILT axis, angle of
15° from TILT_REF).
Figure 4: Creating TILT AXIS and TILT ANG Plane

P ro j e c t P a rt I I Pag e 1 5- 3
NOTES
6. Create the INTERFACE and MAIN_DRIVE planes offset [2.125]

and [4.50] respectively from TILT_ANG as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5: Planes Offset from TILT_ANG
7. Create the TILT_PERP plane though the TILT axis and normal to
the TILT_ANG plane, as shown in the following figure. Redefine
its attributes to Fit Feature and select the INTERFACE plane.
Figure 6: TILT PERP Plane

NOTES
8. Offset the TILT_PERP plane 1.50 to create the PIVOT_REF plane,

as shown in the following figure. Redefine the attributes to Fit
Feature and select the INTERFACE plane.
Figure 7: Offset PIVOT_REF Plane
9. Create the PIVOT axis at the intersection of PIVOT_REF and

FRONT.
Figure 8: Create PIVOT Axis
10. Save the model, and continue to the next exercise.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Skeleton Features for

Motion
Task 1. Create datum features that will function as the fixed attachment
point for the linkage on the support arm.
1. Create the sketched datum curve on the INTERFACE plane using

PIVOT_REF as the RIGHT reference. Use only the PIVOT axis as a
reference in sketcher, and rename the curve to FIXED_CRV.
Note:
In this chapter, several figures have been created with some
Datum planes removed from display with the Hide option for
clarity.
Figure 9: FIXED_CRV
2. Return to the default view. Create a datum point on the nearest

vertex of the FIXED_CRV you just created.
3. Create an axis Through the point just created and Normal to the
INTERFACE plane. Rename the axis to LINK_FIXED.

NOTES
Figure 10: Create LINK_FIXED Axis
Task 2. Create datum curves to represent the linkage.
1. Create the sketched datum curve shown below on the INTERFACE

plane using PIVOT_REF as the RIGHT reference. Use only the
PIVOT and LINK_FIXED axes as references in Sketcher, and
rename the curve to LINKAGE. Sketch 3 lines and a construction
circle.
Figure 11: Sketching LINKAGE curve
2. Using the thumbwheel, drag the angle value from 5-355°. The
curve should move freely in an oscillating motion.
3. Create a YES/NO Parameter named OSCILLATE. Set the initial

value to YES .
4. Set the CONFIG option shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 12: Setting Config Options
5. Click Relations > . Select the datum curve, and note the
dimension number, d31 in this example. Then type the relation, as
Figure 13: Entering Relation
6. After exiting the RELATIONS EDITOR, regenerate the model

several times to test the operation of the linkage. Return the
linkage to the starting position of approximately 85°.
Note:
For future use, the OSCILLATE parameter may be toggled to
YES or NO to toggle the linkage rotation on and off.
7. Create another sketched curve using the same references, as shown

in the following figure. Name this curve RT_ANG_CRV. (Sketch
two lines.)

NOTES
Figure 14: Create RT_ANG_CRV Curve
Task 3. Create additional datum features using the linkage as references.
1. Create a plane through the curve segment shown below, and

through the PIVOT axis. Name the plane MAIN_FRONT and resize
it to the RT_ANG_CRV feature.
Figure 15: Create MAIN_FRONT Plane
2. Create the MAIN_PERP plane through the pivot axis and normal to
the MAIN_FRONT plane, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 16: Create MAIN_PERP Plane
3. Create an axis named MAIN at the intersection of the

MAIN_DRIVE and MAIN_FRONT planes, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 17: Create MAIN Axis
4. Create a datum point feature named LINKAGE_PTS at the linkage

vertices, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 18: Create LINKAGE_PTS Datum Point

NOTES
5. Create the AUX_ROTATE and the AUX_ARM axes through the

previous points and normal to the INTERFACE plane.
Figure 19: AUX_ROTATE and AUX_ARM Axes
6. Create the SKEL_MAIN coordinate system at the intersection of the

MAIN_DRIVE, MAIN_PERP, and MAIN_FRONT planes. Orient the
X, Y and Z axes as shown in the following figure.
Figure 20: SKEL_MAIN Coord System
7. Delete all default layers and create three new layers named BASE,
FAN, and LINKAGE to control the display of the many skeleton
features.
8. Add items to the layers as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 21: New Layers
9. Save the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Skeleton Features for Space

Claims
NOTE:
When using the finished version of this skeleton, first open the
Drivetrain assembly to allow the shrinkwrap feature to
regenerate properly.
Task 1. Create a space claim for the base, using an extruded surface.
1. Create an extruded surface using the BASE datum curve, as shown

in the following figure. Use the option for Capped Ends and
extrude upward [2.0].
Figure 22: Extruding Surface
Task 2. Create a space claim for the already-designed F3 drivetrain

assembly by using an external shrinkwrap.
1. Open and examine the DRIVETRAIN assembly. Then close the

window.
2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap from Other Model >
Open . Select the F3_DRIVETRAIN.ASM.
3. Click Coord Sys > Sel By Menu > dt_main > Select . Then select
the SKEL_MAIN coordinate system.
4. Increase the Quality Level to and set .

Then click Done > OK.
NOTES
Figure 23: Drivetrain Shrinkwrap
Task 3. Create a space claim for the cage and fan blades.
1. Create an extruded surface using the Both Sides and Open Ends
options. Select the surface shown as the sketching plane and use
the INTERFACE datum as the TOP reference. Refer to the
following figure
Figure 24: Selecting Sketching Plane
2. Sketch circle of diameter 11.0, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 25: Sketching Circle
3. Use Blind for the depth option and type [ 1.375] for the depth.
Figure 26: Completed surface

NOTES
Task 4. Test the skeleton operation.
1. Test the oscillation of the skeleton by regenerating through one

complete rotation of the linkage, 360°.
2. Test the tilt action by modifying the TILT_ANG plane to 45°. Then
modify to 90°.
3. Test the oscillation at 90°, and then modify the TILT_ANG plane
back to 15°.
4. Rename the three space claim surfaces to BASE_CLAIM,

DRIVE_CLAIM, and BLADE_CLAIM respectively. Add these
features to the BASE and FAN layers accordingly.
5. Save the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Creating Skeleton Features for

Interfaces
NOTE:
When using the finished version of this skeleton, open the
Drivetrain assembly first to allow the shrinkwrap feature to
regenerate properly.
Task 1. Create the first interface between the base and support arm.
1. Set the layer display, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 27: Setting Layer Display
2. Create a flat surface sketched on the FRONT plane, using GROUND

as a TOP reference, and the TILT axis as the only Sketcher
reference, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28: Flat Surface

NOTES
Task 2. Create the second interface between the fan and base assemblies
at the pivot axis.
1. Create a flat surface sketched on the INTERFACE plane, using

FRONT as a bottom reference, and the PIVOT and LINK_FIXED
axes as the only Sketcher references, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 29: Second Flat Surface
2. Name the two interface surfaces BASE_INTF and PIVOT_INTF

respectively, and add only the BASE_INTF surface to the BASE
layer.
Task 3. Create the interface between the drive arm and link
1. Set the layer display, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 30: Setting Layer Status
2. Create a flat surface with the Use Prev option. Reference the
AUX_ARM axis as the only Sketcher reference, as shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Figure 31: Creating third Flat Surface
3. Name the surface TEMP.
4. Offset the TEMP surface upward 0.125. Name the offset surface
ARM_LINK_INTF.
5. Add the TEMP surface to the BASE layer and the

ARM_LINK_INTF surface to the LINKAGE layer.
6. Display all layers.
Figure 32: All surfaces displayed
7. Modify the TILT_ANG plane to 0° and test the oscillation of the

skeleton. Notice the circular space claim for the blades is very
close to the base. Modify the height of the BASE_CLAIM to
1.25.

NOTES
Note:
Notice how one interface is completely stationary
(BASE_INTF), one will tilt but not oscillate (PIVOT_INTF)
and one tilts and oscillates (ARM_LINK_INTF).
8. Return the TILT_ANG plane to 15°.
9. Save the model.

Project Part III: Creating Components

In Project Part III, you focus on the communication of geometrical
and parametric information to create individual components in the
assembly.
Objectives
In this module you will complete the following::
• Communicate Layout information to the skeleton.

• Communicate Skeleton information to components.
• Build components using skeleton information.
Page 16-1
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Communicating Layout Information

to the Skeleton
Task 1. Declare the skeleton to the layout and then link some of the
Layout parameters to skeleton dimensions.
1. Open the Layout, then open the Skeleton.
2. Click Setup > Declare > Declare Lay > Vortex-1200 .
3. Modify the POST_CRV, and select the 3.50 dimension.
4. When prompted for a dimension value, type

[tilt_axis_height], and click Yes .
5. Modify the MAIN_DRIVE plane and select the height dimension.

Enter MAIN_HEIGHT for the value and click Yes .
6. Repeat for the INTERFACE plane and the INTERFACE_HEIGHT

parameter.
7. Repeat for the CAGE_DIA and CAGE_DEPTH parameters by

modifying the BLADE_CLAIM surface.
8. Repeat for the TILT_ANGLE parameter by modifying the

TILT_ANG plane.
Notes:
Other Layout parameters will be declared later in the project.
The following exercises outline the communication of data

from skeleton to part models.
The part models you create in this module do not need to be

exactly as shown in the figures. But the interfaces between
modeled components should interact properly.
If you are short on time you can:
1. Create the part models with fewer and simpler features

than shown.
2. Assemble the finished models to the skeleton instead.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Features in the Main Base

Part
Task 1. Communicate skeleton geometry to the model.
1. Open the top-level assembly.
2. Select the MAIN_BASE part from the Model Tree and redefine it.
Notice the DEFAULT constraint. Since this is a stationary
component, it is acceptable to leave the default constraint.
3. Select the MAIN_BASE part from the Model Tree.
Click > Insert Feature > Data Sharing > Copy Geom .
4. Using the Surface Refs , Curve Refs and Misc Refs options
appropriately, select the geometry as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 1: Selecting Geometry
5. Create a second Copy Geom feature referencing the large

BASE_CLAIM surface.

P ro j e c t P a rt I II Pag e 1 6- 3
NOTES
NOTE:
For this project, the geometry is transferred directly from the
skeleton to the part models, even though they are actually in
subassemblies.
If time constraints of the class were not an issue, best practice

would be to first transfer the geometry to separate skeletons at
each subassembly level, and then transfer again to the
individual models.
In addition, features are copied directly with Copy

Geometry features. In order to keep references organized,
you could have first created Publish Geometry features at
the skeleton level to make the selection of geometry easier
with subsequent Copy Geometry features.
Task 2. Create basic features to form the post.
1. Open the MAIN_BASE part and Hide the Copy Geom of the
BASE_CLAIM surface.
Note:
The following series of figures illustrate one way to create
features in this model. Create protrusions and other features
approximately as shown, or use your own methods. As long as
the geometry maps to the copied skeleton geometry
appropriately, the overall goal will be met.
2. Create a protrusion to reference the circular interface surface and

extrude both sides, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 2: Creating a Protrusion
3. Create a cut referencing the interface surface.
Figure 3: Creating Cut
4. Create another cut referencing the interface surface and a full

round.
Figure 4: Creating Cut and Full Round
5. Round the backside.

NOTES
Figure 5: Rounded Back Side
6. Add a variable radius round on the front side. (Hint: A datum point
was used at the apex of the round.)
Figure 6: Variable Radius
Task 3. Create an extruded surface to merge with the BASE_CLAIM.
1. Create an extruded surface using a spline, as shown in the

following figure. Be sure that it overhangs the BASE_CLAIM
surface in width and depth.
Figure 7: Overhanging Extruded Surface
2. Merge this surface with the BASE_CLAIM surface.

NOTES
Figure 8: Merging Surfaces
3. Create a variable radius round.
Figure 9: Variable Radius Round
4. Create a protrusion with the Use Quilt option to ‘fill’ the enclosed
surface quilt.
5. Add a final round and blank all unneeded layers. Refer to the
following figure.
6. There is a palette of colors stored in your PROJECT directory. Load

the PROJECT_COLORS.MAP file.
7. Color all surfaces using the defined LT_BROWN appearance.
Figure 10: Coloring Surfaces

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Features in the

Support_Arm Part
2. Select the SUPPORT_ARM part from the Model Tree and redefine
it. Notice the default constraint. Since this is a moving component,
you cannot accept the default constraint.
3. Remove the default constraint.
4. Add three Align Coincident constraints between the FRONT,

TOP, and RIGHT planes in the part to the FRONT, TILT_ANG,
and TILT_PERP planes in the skeleton respectively.
5. Select the SUPPORT_ARM part from the Model Tree.
Click > Insert Feature > Data Sharing > Co py Geom.
6. Using Surface Refs and Misc Refs appropriately, select the

geometry (2 surfaces and 2 axes) as shown in the following figure.
Figure 11: Selecting Geometry

NOTES
Note:
The following series of figures illustrate one way to create
features in this model. Create protrusions and other features
approximately as shown, or use your own methods. As long as
the geometry maps to the copied skeleton geometry
appropriately, the overall goal will be met.
7. Open the SUPPORT_ARM and create two protrusions that

reference the lower interface surface, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 12: Creating Protrusions Referencing Interface Surfaces
8. Then create two planar datum curves. Each is sketched on an offset

plane from the neighboring geometry.
Figure 13: Creating Planar Datum Curves
9. Create a series of general blends by selecting sections. Use the

Tangency option for smooth transitions.

NOTES
Figure 14: Creating Blend
10. Create rounds at the lower end of the model.
Figure 15: Creating Rounds
11. Create a through cut (bottom) and two blind holes (top) referencing
the interface geometry.
Figure 16: Creating Cut and Blind Holes

NOTES
12. Blank any unnecessary layers and color all surfaces using the
defined LT_BROWN appearance.
Figure 17: Coloring Surfaces
13. Save the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Creating Features in the Link Part

1. Open the top-level assembly, and then open the Skeleton.
2. Create a Coordinate System using the 2Axes option. Select the

axis and curve as shown in the following figure and click Y > X >
Done .
Figure 18: Selecting Axis and Curve
3. Rename the feature to LINK_CSYS.
Figure 19: The LINK_CSYS
4. Open the top-level assembly window.
5. Select the LINK part from the Model Tree and redefine it. Since
this is a moving component, delete the default constraint.
6. Add a CoordSys constraint between the LINK_CSYS in the

skeleton and the default Csys in the LINK part.

The selection of Coordinate Systems will be common in
upcoming exercise tasks. To easily select them, use
Sel By Menu rather than un-blanking layers.

NOTES
7. Create a Copy Geom feature in the link part (2 axes and 3

surfaces) as shown in the following figure. Open the model.
Figure 20: Copy Geom Feature in Link Part
8. Create the protrusion referencing the copy geometry features, as

Figure 21: Creating Protrusion
9. Create two holes referencing the copy geometry.
Figure 22: Creating Holes
10. Blank any unnecessary layers, and color the part using the
DK_GREY appearance.

NOTES
Figure 23: Coloring Part
11. Save the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 5: Creating Features in the Drive_Arm

Part
1. Open the top-level assembly, and then open the Skeleton.
2. Create a Coordinate System using the 2Axes option. Select the

axis and curve shown, then click Y > X > Done , as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 24: Creating the ARM_CSYS
3. Rename the feature to ARM_CSYS.
4. Open the top-level assembly window.
5. Select the ARM part from the Model Tree and redefine it. Remove
the default constraint, and add a COORDSYS constraint between
the ARM_CSYS in the skeleton and the default CSYS in the
DRIVE_ARM part.
6. Create a Copy Geom feature in the DRIVE_ARM part consisting of

3 surfaces and 2 axes, as shown in the following figure.
7. Open the model.
Figure 25: Creating Copy Geom Feature in Drive Arm Part

NOTES
8. Create the protrusion referencing the copy geometry, as shown in

the following figure. The base of the protrusion should be flush
with the ‘doughnut’ shaped surface.
Figure 26: Creating Protrusion
9. Create a second protrusion.
Figure 27: Creating Second Protrusion
10. Create a cut using the Use Quilt option, and a second cut
referencing the copy geom.
Figure 28: Creating Cuts
11. Blank any unnecessary layers, and color the part using the
LT_GREY appearance.

NOTES
Figure 29: Finished Part
12. Save the model

Project Part IV: Completing the Assembly

In Project Part IV, you complete the communication of geometrical
and parametric information, populate the assembly, and add
finishing touches.
Objectives
In this module you will complete the following:
• Communicate Skeleton information to components.

• Build components using skeleton information.
• Populate the assembly with existing components.
Page 17-1
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Features in the

Housing_Rear Part
2. Select the HOUSING_REAR part from the Model Tree and redefine
it. Remove the default constraint. Add a COORDSYS constraint
between the SKEL_MAIN Csys in the skeleton and the default Csys
in the HOUSING_REAR part.

Use Sel By Menu to select blanked Coordinate systems.
3. Open the HOUSING_REAR model.
Figure 1: Housing Rear Model
Task 2. Use an Inheritance feature to transfer geometry from the

standard F3 rear housing to the current model.
1. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open
2. Select the f3_rear_hsg.prt and click Open > Default .
3. This housing should be independent from the original. Select

Dependency > Define > Independent > Ok > Ok.

NOTES
Figure 2: Inheritance feature created.
Task 3. Customize the housing to fit in this assembly.
1. Return to the top level assembly and notice that the gearbox
interferes with the rear housing.
2. Create a copy geometry feature in the rear housing consisting of

the two 180° cylindrical surfaces from the gearbox, as shown in
Figure 3: Creating Copy Geometry

P ro j e c t P a rt I V Pag e 1 7- 3
NOTES
3. Return to the Rear Housing part window.
4. Offset the surface outward [0.10], as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 4: Offsetting Surface
5. Hide the original copy geom surface.
6. Create a cut with the Use Quilt option, selecting the offset surface.
Be sure to remove material on the inside of the surface.
7. Color the model using the DK_BROWN appearance.
Figure 5: Housing with Cut.
8. Blank any unnecessary layers and Save Status .
9. Save the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Completing the Assembly Population

Task 1. Assemble the DRIVETRAIN.
1. Open the top-level assembly and hide the skeleton.
Figure 6: Top-Level Assembly without Skeleton
2. Test the operation of the assembly by regenerating the assembly

several times.
3. Redefine the DRIVETRAIN assembly. Add a COORD SYS

constraint as the only constraint between the DT_MAIN Csys in the
DRIVETRAIN and the SKEL_MAIN Csys in the skeleton.

NOTES
Figure 7: Redefining Assembly
Task 2. Assemble the hub and blades.
1. Open the DRIVETRAIN assembly.
Figure 8: Drivetrain Assembly
2. Regenerate the assembly a few times and watch the driveshaft

rotate. This is accomplished by assembling the driveshaft on an
angled datum, and using a relation similar to that in the linkage.
3. Close the DRIVETRAIN assembly and return to the top-level

assembly.
4. Redefine the F3_HUB and assemble as shown in the following

figure. Be sure to use the flat on the shaft during assembly, so that
the hub will rotate with the shaft.

NOTES
Figure 9: Assembling Hub
5. Redefine the F3_BLADE, and assemble using a Csys constraint

between the default Csys in the F3_BLADE and the Csys on the
leader ear of the F3_HUB pattern.
Figure 10: Redefining and Assembling Blade
6. Reference pattern the blades around the hub.

NOTES
Figure 11: Blades Reference Patterned
Task 3. Assemble the cage.
1. Redefine the F3_CAGE-11 part, and assemble, as shown in the

following figure. Use INSERT constraints to center the wire loops
on the cage with the holes in the cover. Then use a TANGENT
constraint to make the cage flush with the cover.
Figure 12: Assembling Cage

NOTES
3. Set the OSCILLATE parameter in the skeleton to NO. Test the

rotation of the hub and blades by regenerating.
4. Set the OSCILLATE parameter in the skeleton to YES. Test the full
motion of the assembly.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISES
The following exercises are optional. Complete as many as you have
time for, in any order you wish.
1. Trim the blades to fit in the cage and change the number of blades
using the layout.
2. Use BMX to examine the oscillation angle. Also flex the model to
test design variations.
3. Create the ‘missing’ pedestal part.
4. Finish the rear cover, main base, and the support arm.
5. Create exploded states.
6. Check the size requirements from the Layout.
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Blades

Task 1. Trim the blades to meet the size requirements.
1. Open the skeleton and create a surface as shown in the following

figure. Sketch on the tip of the driveshaft and extrude Both Sides .
2. Rename the surface to BLADE_DIA_SRF.
Figure 13: Creating the BLADE_DIA_SRF

NOTES
3. Link the two dimensions to the BLADE_DIA and CAGE_DEPTH

Layout parameters respectively.
4. Regenerate the skeleton. Open the assembly and note that the
blades extend past the BLADE_DIA_SRF surface.
Figure 14: Oversized Blades
5. Use Copy Geom to copy the BLADE_DIA_SRF to the leader of the

blade pattern, and then open the blade.
Figure 15: First Blade
6. Reorder the new Copy Geometry feature before the

BLADE_OUTLINE cut feature.
Task 2. Change the shape and size of the blades
1. Modify the RIDGE_POINTS datum point feature to change the

curvature of the ridge. Modify only the four horizontal dimensions
and the .74 REL dimension as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 16: Modifying Ridge Curvature
2. Redefine the BLADE_OUTLINE cut. Manipulate the sketched

spline, so that it is within the BLADE_DIA_SRF surface.
Figure 17: Redefining Blade Cut
3. Finish redefining the cut.
4. Add the new Copy Geometry to the ALL_SURFS layer, and blank
all layers.
5. Save the blade and return to the assembly.

NOTES
6. Notice the BLADES are now within their specified clearance. Hide
the skeleton.
Figure 18: Corrected Blade Clearance
Task 3. Communicate the NUM_BLADES parameter.
1. Declare the F3_HUB and top-level assembly (if necessary) to the

Layout.
2. Open the hub and write a relation similar to:

p49 = NUM_BLADES.
3. Modify the NUM_BLADES parameter in the layout to [4].
4. Regenerate the assembly.
Figure 19: Assembly Regenerated

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Using Behavioral

Modeling
Task 1. Test the assembly against initial design specs for oscillation
angle using Behavioral Modeling (BMX).
1. Save the top-level assembly, and create a copy of the skeleton

called SKEL_ANALYSIS. (There is also a saved SKEL_ANAL you
can use)
2. Open SKEL_ANALYSIS.
3. Create a datum analysis feature, which measures the angle from

the MAIN_FRONT plane to the FRONT plane, and outputs an
ANGLE parameter.
4. Enter the relations editor and delete the highlighted selection

shown in the following figure. Note the number of your angle
dimension (d31 in this example).
Figure 20: Deleting Relations
5. Setup a Sensitivity Analysis as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 21: Sensitivity Analysis
6. Compute the Sensitivity Analysis, and study the output graph.
Figure 22: Output Graph
7. Notice that the angle values on the graph are absolute, and show an
oscillation of approximately +/-35°. Therefore, the total
oscillation is close to 75°. The fan passes the minimum of 45°.
Task 2. Test the assembly against initial design specs for design
variations.
1. Modify parameters in the Layout to test the wall-mount version of

the fan by modifying the TILT_ANGLE parameter to 90° .

NOTES
Figure 23: Wall-Mounting the Fan
2. Reset the angle, and modify the TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT to 24.0.
Figure 24: Modifying Height
3. Reset the height value to 3.50.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating a Pedestal Part

Task 1. Create a Pedestal part.
1. Zoom in under the fan. Notice there is actually no model mounting

the fan assembly to the SUPPORT_ARM.
2. Using your own techniques, create a model called pedestal. Be sure

to create it in the context of the proper subassembly and to use top
down design techniques to help create the geometry.

This model oscillates with the Fan Unit. Assemble the model
accordingly before creating Copy Geom features.
3. One possibility for this model is shown in the following figures.
Figure 25: Creating Pedestal
Figure 26: Possible Pedestal Shape

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: Finishing a Model

Task 1. Create finishing geometry features on the rear cover.
1. Creating a cylindrical surface in the skeleton to represent the

electrical access hole. Make sure to reference it appropriately so it
will oscillate freely with the skeleton.
Figure 27: New Cylindrical surface
2. Link the diameter of the cylinder to the ELEC_HOLE_DIA layout

parameter, and Regenerate .
3. Use a Copy Geom feature to copy this surface to the cover
4. Use the surface to create a cut as shown in the following figure.
Figure 28: Creating Electrical Access Hole
Task 2. Complete the base part.
1. Add three swept protrusions to form stylish ribs on the base.

NOTES
Figure 29: Creating Stylish Ribs
Task 3. Complete the support arm.
1. Add a round to the support arm, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 30: Rounding Support Arm

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 5: Creating Exploded States

Task 1. Create exploded states.
1. Create the exploded state EXP_ALL
Figure 31: Explode State EXP_ALL
2. Create the exploded state EXP_SUB.
Figure 32: Explode State EXP_SUB

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 6: Testing Size

Requirements
Task 1. Test the assembly against initial design specs for overall size.
1. Open the BOX part.
2. Declare the BOX part to the Layout and link the values for max
height, width, and depth to the appropriate dimensions of the box.
3. Regenerate the model.
4. Assemble the box to the top-level assembly. Use an Automatic

constraint on the base, and then use the dynamic component
placement functions to see if the assembly will ‘fit’ in the box.
Figure 33: Using Dynamic Component Placement Functions

NOTES
Figure 34: Completing Placement
5. Complete placement using a fix constraint, and then suppress the

BOX part.
Task 2. Save the project.
1. Blank any unneeded layers and Save Status .
2. Save the completed assembly.

Resolving Failures
In this module you learn about the Resolve Environment and
Pro/ENGINEER’s solutions for regenerating a failed feature.
Objectives
• Diagnose the cause of a regeneration failure.

• Fix the regeneration failure.
Page 18-1
NOTES
DEFINING REGENERATION FAILURE

Because of Pro/ENGINEER’s parametric nature, when you make a change
in your design at any level in the model, it automatically propagates
throughout the entire assembly. This creates dependencies known as
parent/child relationships. If a conflict develops or the relationship is
violated, regeneration failure occurs.
When Pro/ENGINEER is unable to regenerate a feature, it cannot

construct the model geometry. Usually the problem occurs because a
feature was changed and now conflicts with or invalidates other features,
as would be the case in the following:
• A feature is improperly defined causing it to be unattached.

• A feature is resumed that now conflicts with another.
• The feature intersection is no longer valid because dimensional
changes have moved the intersecting surfaces.
• A reference is missing because you have redefined or deleted the
parent features or components.
• The feature is defined improperly.
• The model no longer satisfies the pattern restrictions.
• The new geometry is invalid due to feature definition.
• Component is missing.
USING THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT

Pro/ENGINEER always checks the model geometry as it regenerates
features. When a regeneration failure occurs, you must resolve the
problem before continuing with normal model processing to protect the
design intent of the model.
Using the Resolve Environment, you can address the failure problem
using any of the following methods:
• Undo all of the changes that you have made since the last successful
regeneration.
• Diagnose the cause of the model failure using the current (failed)
model or the backup model.

NOTES
• Attempt a quick fix of the problem using shortcuts for performing

standard operations on the failed feature only.
• Change the failed model or a backup model using standard part or
assembly functionality.
Diagnosing the Failure

Often, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solve
regeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration.
If the information the system provides in the DIAGNOSTICS window is
not sufficient, you can use the INVESTIGATE menu to access other tools
that can assist you in determining the cause.
In addition to using these tools, you must determine how the failed item
was constructed, the potential limitations of the method that was used, and
which of these areas is the source of the failure.
Fixing the Failure

The method that you use to resolve the regeneration failure depends upon
the information that you obtain through your investigation of the problem.
If you determine that you should not have made the original modification,
you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fix option to undo any changes and
return your model to its original state.
Working on the Failed Feature Only
The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on the
failed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine, reroute,
delete, or suppress the feature.
Note:
Suppressing features and components is an easy way to exit
out of the RESOLVE menu. However, you must correct the
problem in order to resume the suppressed features or
components and continue with the project.
Working on Any Feature
The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature in the current
model or the backup model.

Reso lvi ng Fa ilu re s Pag e 1 8- 3
NOTES
Examples of Regeneration Problems

Table 1 lists eight typical failure scenarios and a possible resolution for
each. The example that follows illustrates how to resolve a failure
resulting from a missing component and missing feature references.
Table 1: Regeneration Failures with Possible Solutions

Type of Failure: Possible Solution:
Unattached feature: direction of feature Redefine the direction of the feature so
creation is away from the solid. that it points into the solid.
Unattached feature: open section Redefine the section of the feature to
protrusion falls off the bounding surface. make it a closed section.
System resumes feature that conflicts Use Fix Model to suppress or delete the
with another feature. first regenerated feature or use Quick
Fix to suppress or delete the second one.
Intersection of features is no longer valid. Use Quick Fix and Reroute to change
the reference to the new reference.
References are missing due to the Use Investigate to find which
redefinition or the deletion of the parent references are missing. Use Quick Fix
component or feature. and Reroute or Redefine to select new
references.
Improper feature definition: shell Use the Info menu and create an offset
thickness is larger than the radius of mesh to determine maximum allowed
curvature of the surface. thickness. Use Quick Fix to change the
thickness of the shell. Use Fix Model to
modify the radius of curvature of the
feature.
Pattern restrictions are no longer satisfied. Use Quick Fix and Redefine to
change the pattern option to Varying or
General .
Component is missing. Use Quick Fix and Find Component
for retrieving the missed component.
Use Quick Fix and Quit Retr to stop
retrieving the assembly; then find the
component file and retrieve it into
session, or move the file into the
assembly directory. Set up a search path
to the failing component.

NOTES
Figure 1: Valve Assembly
The following figure shows a valve assembly that was created by another
user. When you retrieve it to make changes, the system automatically
places you in the Resolve Environment.
Figure 2: Failure Due to Missing Component
The FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window identifies the cause of the failure to

be a missing component. When you retrieve the assembly again, the
FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window displays, as shown in the following
figure. The system identifies the cause of this failure to be the third
component because its feature references are missing.

NOTES
Figure 3: Failure Due to Missing Feature References
When you use Redefine in the QUICK FIX menu to change the reference
to the surface of the shaft, the second constraint shows a missing
reference. Once you define the missing assembly reference, the assembly
regenerates successfully.

NOTES
Figure 4: COMPONENT PLACEMENT Dialog Box

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you use the Resolve mode to investigate failing feature
in a model.
Method
In the following exercises you will perform operations that will cause the
model to fail. You should focus on how to investigate why the failure
occurred and then use the tools available to correct the problem.
Tools
Table 2: Resolving Failures Icons
Icons Description
Select
Step Forward
Done
Trim Entities
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failures
Figure 5: Air-Cleaner RS Part Before and After Changes

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the air cleaner and determine how it was created.

2. Open AIR_CLEANER_RS.PRT.
3. Click Utilities > Model Player to step through the model. Click
then select BASE-PROTRUSION from screen or model tree.
Then select to step forward.
Figure 6: Model Player
4. After reviewing the model, close the MODEL PLAYER dialog box.
Task 2. Change the base solid by replacing the tangent arcs with non-
tangent arcs.
1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click BASE-PROTRUSION >

Redefine .
2. Double-click Section . Click Sketch .
3. Delete the two tangent end arcs. Select one of the arcs. Press
<DELETE>. Click Yes in the message area and continue. Delete
the other arc. Click Yes to delete the reference.
4. Sketch two new 3-point arcs that are non-tangent and dimension
them accordingly.

NOTES
Figure 7: Changing the Section
5. Click View > Default Orientation .
Tips & Techniques:

To quickly change to the default view, you can press <CTRL>
<D>.
6. Finish the redefinition. Click > OK .
Task 3. The model fails regeneration. Determine what has failed and the
cause.
1. Review the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. Read the

information that Pro/ENGINEER provides concerning the failed
feature.
2. Interrogate further by extracting feature information. Click

Feature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. Review
the various elements of the feature. Notice that the round’s
references are missing.

NOTES
Task 4. The failed feature is the edge round. It is sometimes beneficial

to work with a backup model to investigate and even resolve the failure of
the model. Use a backup to resolve the failure.
1. In the RESOLVE FEAT menu, click Investigate > Backup Model

> Confirm. An OPEN dialog box displays. Double click
AIR_CLEANER_RS.PRT. Click Roll Model > Before Fail.
2. Show the references used for the failing feature. Click Show Ref .
Expand the BASE-PROTRUSION using + icon.
Figure 8: Investigating the References
3. Select EDGE ID 223. Notice that the edge highlights on the model.
4. Right-click Edge id 223 > Info. Close the Information Window.
5. Right-click Edge id 34 > Entity Info. Close the Information

Window.

NOTES
6. The circular edges do not highlight when selected because they are
missing references. Close the dialog box.
Task 5. The round failed because you deleted the circular edges that
were referenced and re-sketched new ones. Change the round so that it
references these new edges.
1. Redefine the references used by the round. Click Quick Fix >
Redefine > Confirm .
2. Double-click References . Click Confirm .
3. Select the arc edges that are not highlighted. Click Done .
4. Type [.4]. Select Preview ; then OK .
Task 6. The round feature successfully regenerates, but the next feature
in the regeneration cycle fails. Determine the reason for the failure.
1. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Roll Model > Failed Feat >
Show Ref . The A_2 datum axis was created through the cylindrical
end surface on the part. Notice that four holes are children of this
feature and cannot be regenerated.
Figure 9: References of the Backup-model

NOTES
2. Close the Reference Information Window.
3. Click Investigate> Current Modl > Show Ref to see the

difference. The reference of axis A_2 is now marked as missing.
Figure 10: References of the Current-model
4. Click Quick Fix > Reroute > Missing Refs > Done . Select the
revolved surface for the axis reference on the left side of the part.
5. Automatically reroute all of the children features. Click All

Children .
Task 7. The identical pattern now fails. Change the pattern type.
1. Click Fix Model > Modify > Value . Select the first Pattern(Cut)
feature from the Model Tree. Select the cut offset dimension (1.50),
and change it to 0.75. Also modify the number of pattern cuts from
5 to 3.

NOTES
Figure 11: Modifying the Pattern
2. Click Regenerate .
Task 8. Change the pattern options using Resolve.
1. Do not exit from the Resolve environment. Click No to re-enter the

RESOLVE menu.
2. Click Fix Model > Feature > Redefine . Select the pattern cut from
the model tree.
3. From the dialog box, double-click Pattern . Click Pat Options >
Varying > Done > Done /Return > OK .
4. Click Done/Return to exit RESOLVE mode.
Task 9. You could have avoided entering the Resolve environment if

you had heeded the system’s warning when deleting the arcs. Instead,
replace the old referenced section entities with newly sketched entities.
Return the base protrusion to its original shape.
1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click BASE-PROTRUSION >

Redefine .
3. Sketch the two tangent end arcs as shown in the following figure,
but do not delete the non-tangent arcs.

NOTES
Figure 12: Sketching for Replacement
4. Click Edit > Replace. Select one of the newly created arcs; then
select the closest non-tangent arc. Click Yes , if asked to delete
dimensions. Notice that Sketcher automatically deleted the original
arc.
Note:
One arc has a radius dimension. When you select that arc, you
must click Yes to confirm the removal of the dimension.
5. Replace the other arc and finish the redefine.
6. Click > OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Resolving Assembly Failures

Task 1. Open the carburetor assembly. As the system retrieves the
assembly into memory, it reports any problems in the message area. A
FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window displays at the top of the screen.
Review the information in the window.
1. Open CARBURETOR_RESOLVE.ASM.
2. Click Feature Info . The system indicates that the failed

component is CARB_BOWL.PRT and why it failed.
Task 2. The component failed because the component model is missing.

The part is not in the current directory, nor is there a search path set for the
directory in which it resides. Locate the missing component, retrieve it
manually and back it up to the RESOLVE directory.
1. Click Quick Fix > Find Component .
2. Open CARB_BOWL.PRT from the MOVED_COMP directory.
3. Click Yes . Now the retrieval of the assembly is completed.
4. Open CARB_BOWL.PRT with right-click in the model tree. Then

click File > Backup . Make sure that the current directory
corresponds to the name of the current module. Click OK .
5. Close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not Displayed >OK .
Task 3. Since the part is in the same directory as

RESOLVE_CARBURETOR.ASM, there will be no failure when you
retrieve the assembly again.
1. Open CARBURETOR_RESOLVE.ASM again.
2. Click > LEFT . The model should display as shown in the

following figure. The shape of the backing plate should match the
shape of the air cleaner on the sides, but it does not.

NOTES
Figure 13: Setting the View
Note:
Notice that the shape of the backing plate does not match the
air cleaner in the preceding figure.
3. Click Regenerate > Automatic .
Task 4. The assembly fails regeneration. Investigate the reason for

failure.
1. Read the DIAGNOSTICS window. It states that the backing plate

component has an invalid external reference. Determine why it
failed. Click Investigate from the RESOLVE FEAT menu.
2. Identify the references for the feature. Click Show Ref .

NOTES
Figure 14: Missing References
3. Select the valid references in the PARENTS window. Notice that

there are two missing references.
4. Close the dialog box.
Task 5. Redefine the failed feature’s section.
1. Click Quick Fix > Redefine > Confirm .
Task 6. The system dipslays a reference window with existing and

missing references. Pro/ENGINEER cannot find the external reference for
these arcs because the air cleaner base feature was redefined outside the
context of the assembly. Change the section to reference the shape of the
air cleaner.

NOTES
1. Select the two MISSING REFERENCES in the dialog box and

click Delete . Click on the remaining two references, then click
Update . Select the two edges as additional references, as shown in
the following figure. Close the dialog box.
Pick the inside edges of

the shell
Figure 15: Using the Edge of the Air Cleaner
2. Replace the tangent arcs with the non-tangent arcs in the sketch.
Zoom into the left side of the model.
Sketch this
3 point arc
Figure 16: Left Side of Model
3. Sketch a 3 point arc on top of this reference.

NOTES
4. Repeat the process for the right side of the model.
Sketch this 3-
point arc
Figure 17: Specify the right side reference
5. Click Edit > Replace . Select the newly sketched arc; select the
original tangent arc. Click Yes .
6. Repeat the process for the left side.
7. Trim the horizontal lines to the new non-tangent arcs. Click .
8. Select the new arc and line at the four corners to generate a closed
loop.
9. Click > OK .
10. Click Yes to exit the Resolve environment.
Figure 18: The Finished Section

NOTES
Note:
The Replace option replaces internal references within the
part, as well as external references.
Displayed >OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• How to investigate why features fail.

• How to resolve feature failures in part and assembly mode.
• How to prevent features from failing using the Regeneration.

Pro/PROGRAM
In this module you learn how to use Pro/PROGRAM to automate
your design and build variations by incorporating user prompts into
the model regeneration cycle.
Objectives
• Automate the part and assembly design process in Pro/PROGRAM.

• Incorporate changes into the program.
• Run and edit the program.
• Use Pro/PROGRAM to manipulate part features from an assembly.
Page 19-1
NOTES
USING Pro/PROGRAM
Family tables are effective when you know the variations of the design, or
are sure that they are not going to change, as in part libraries.
Pro/PROGRAM is particularly useful when you do not know the

variations of a design in advance.
Figure 1: Custom Cabinet Variations
Defining the Program Structure

Pro/ENGINEER writes a program for every part and assembly as you
build the model. The program is actually a script of Pro/ENGINEER’s
actions as it regenerates. To build variations of your design, you can
access this program and manipulate it. Every program has five sections:
• Header
• Input
• Relations
• Model Section
• Massprops
Automating the Part Design Process

To use Pro/PROGRAM to automate the design process for a part, you
must first create a generic model as the basis for the design variation and
include all of the features needed for any of the design variations.
Perform these tasks to set up for part design automation:

NOTES
• Add input statements . Using the Input section of the program, create
prompts to supply the appropriate information using this standard
format:
Parameter_Name Parameter_Type
“prompt that you want displayed in the

message window”
• Write relations .
Using relations, you can control the model and
convey information from the input statements to the model parameters.
Edit the model section . You can edit by adding logic statements.
Generally, you add “if” statements to model features based on the input
statements and relations.
The following is an example of an edited program file. The additions to

the program are denoted with a “•”.
Listing for Part Side_Panel
INPUT
• HEIGHT NUMBER
• "WHAT IS THE SIDE PANEL HEIGHT"
• D2 NUMBER
• "WHAT IS THE SIDE PANEL WIDTH"
• MATERIAL STRING
• "WHAT TYPE OF WOOD IS THE SIDE PANEL"
• DRAWER_CUT YES_NO
• "DOES THE SIDE PANEL SUPPORT A DRAWER"
END INPUT
RELATIONS
• D3=HEIGHT

P ro / P RO G RAM Pag e 1 9- 3
NOTES
END RELATIONS
ADD FEATURE (initial number 1)
INTERNAL FEATURE ID 1
TYPE = DATUM PLANE
NAME = DTM1
END ADD
TYPE = DATUM PLANE
NAME = DTM2
END ADD
TYPE = DATUM PLANE
NAME = DTM3
END ADD
PARENTS = 1(#1) 5(#3) 3(#2)
PROTRUSION: Extrude
NO. ELEMENT NAME INFO

STATUS
--- ------------ -----------------

NOTES
1 Attributes One Side

Defined
2 Section Sk. plane - Surface DTM2

Defined
3 Direction
Defined
4 Depth Blind, depth = 1

Defined
SECTION NAME = S2D0015
FEATURE’S DIMENSIONS:
d2 = 18.00
d3 = 30.00
d4 = 1.00
END ADD
• IF DRAWER_CUT==YES
PARENTS = 1(#1) 5(#3) 7(#4)
CUT: Extrude
NO. ELEMENT NAME INFO STATUS
--- ------------ ------------
1 Attributes One Side

Defined
2 Section Sk.plane - Surface feat #4

Defined
3 MaterialSide Inside section

Defined
4 Direction
Defined

NOTES
5 Depth Blind, depth = 0.25

Defined
SECTION NAME = S2D0016
FEATURE’S DIMENSIONS:
d6 = 2.00
d7 = 4.00
d8 = 2.00
d9 = .25
END ADD
• ENDIF
MASSPROP
END MASSPROP
Figure 2: Edited Program for Side Panel
Automating the Assembly Design Process

Using programs for the regeneration cycle of the assembly, you can
exchange different components and communicate information to part
programs. To set up assembly design automation, perform the same tasks
that you would perform to automate part design as shown:
• Add input statements.

• Write relations.
• Edit the model section.
WIDTH NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE WIDTH OF THE CABINET"
HEIGHT NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE HEIGHT OF THE CABINET"

NOTES
DEPTH NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE DEPTH OF THE CABINET"
WOOD_TYPE STRING
"WHAT TYPE OF WOOD IS THE CABINET"
DRAWER YES_NO
"DOES THE CABINET HAVE A DRAWER"
IF DRAWER==YES
D_SIZE STRING
"WHICH DRAWER SIZE (DR_8, DR_12, OR DR_16)"
END IF
Figure 3: Input for Cabinet
Executing a Lower Level Program

You can use the EXECUTE…END EXECUTE statement to run a lower
level program (part or subassembly) from within the top-level assembly.
The following is an example of communicating parameters using the
execute statement.
EXECUTE PART SIDE_PANEL
HEIGHT = HEIGHT
D2 = DEPTH
MATERIAL = WOOD_TYPE
DRAWER_CUT = DRAWER
END EXECUTE
Figure 4: Executing the Side Panel Program
Interchanging Components
When replacing one component with another, you can use family table
instances of a component or subassembly to replace the generic model
with any of its instances, as shown:

NOTES
Figure 5: Family Table for Drawer
By setting up a parameter and using it in the program, the system

automatically selects the proper instance. You also add an input statement
so that the system manually prompts you to specify an instance when you
execute the program. The following is an example with the input
parameter specifying size to determine the proper instance.
ADD PART (D_SIZE)
INTERNAL COMPONENT ID 27
PARENTS = 15(#9) 11(#5)
END ADD
Figure 6: Adding Correct Instance of the Drawer Part
Incorporating Changes into the Program

When you exit from the editor after making changes to the program, the
system automatically verifies that you have used proper syntax. If it finds
an error, it requires you to correct it by re-editing the program.

NOTES
Running the Program

Once you have incorporated the program, Pro/ENGINEER automatically
runs it. However, you can run it at any time simply by regenerating the
model since it is simply a script of the regeneration steps. Because the
input section is no longer empty, the system asks you to specify one of the
following methods to obtain the prompt values:
• Typing new values.

• Maintaining the current values.
• Reading values from a text file.
Note:
Once you have run a program, you can permanently save that
version of the model by using the Instantiate option in the
PROGRAM menu. The system adds an instance to the family
table for that version.
Editing the Program

To make troubleshooting easier, work with one task at a time. Incorporate
changes and then run the program to test each step. To make editing
easier, use these techniques:
• When renaming features, use the Names option in the SETUP menu.
The system then shows the name in the section for that feature. You
can use the editor’s search/find functionality to locate the feature.
• To change the symbol name for a dimension, use the Symbol option in
the DIM COSMETICS menu. This makes relations easier to write and
interpret.
• Add comment lines to the program using /*. Any comment lines that
you add between the ADD and END ADD lines appear in the Feat Info
window for that feature.

NOTES
Manipulating Features Using Pro/PROGRAM

You can also use Pro/PROGRAM to manipulate a feature within the
model in the following ways:
• Delete a feature or component.Delete all lines between and

including the ADD and END ADD for that feature or component.
• Reorder a feature or component. Cut all lines between and
including the ADD and END ADD for that feature or component, and
paste it in another location in the program.
• Suppress a feature or component. Add the word SUPPRESSED
after the word ADD for that feature or component.
• Resume a feature or component. Delete the word SUPPRESSED in
the ADD statement for that feature/component.
• Modify a dimension. Add the word MODIFY before that dimension in
the model portion of the program, and then type the new value for that
dimension.
• Pause the regeneration. Add the INTERACT statement anywhere in
the model section. When Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the model, it
pauses at the interact statement to ask you if you want to add other
features to the model.

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you implement Pro/Program in the design process.
You also learn how to edit the existing program in a part and an
assembly to vary designs.
Method
In Exercises 1, you access the program, and manipulate the program to
vary the styles of the rim part. The rims have different sizes, spoke styles,
and mounting types.
EXERCISE 1: Automating Part Design
Figure 7: Start Part
Task 1. Open the rim part and investigate the work that has already been
done with the rim model’s program.

2. Open PGM_RIM.PRT.
3. Click Regenerate > Enter > Select All > Done Sel .
½ To define the Rim Diameter, accept the default value and click
.

NOTES
½ To define the Rim Width, accept the default value and click
½ To include the Straight Spokes click No.
½ To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes click Yes.
½ To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes click No.
½ To define the radius of the Spokes, accept the default value and
click
4. Wait until system regenerates the model.
Figure 8: Variation with Default Values
5. To generate a different variation, repeat Step 3 and respond to the

prompts by typing your own values.
6. Repeat Step 3 to build several variations of rims.
7. Erase the model from memory. Click File > Erase > Current >
Yes .
8. Open PGM_RIM.PRT again.
Note:
You must perform Step 5 to maintain consistent feature
numbering for the remainder of this exercise.
Task 2. Create a prompt for the mounting type. The rim will either use
lug nuts or a spindle mount. Notice that all of the holes for either type are
included in the model.
1. Click Program > Edit Design . Notice that system opens up the
Notepad.

NOTES
2. In the Notepad, add the input statement to ask for the mounting
type. Locate the entry END INPUT and type the following
statements before the entry. (Type only the statements that are
given under parenthesis and are bold. Other entries are shown for
your convenience to easily locate the position where you have to
type).
CURVE_RAD NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE RADIUS OF THE CURVED SPOKES?"
END IF
[MOUNT STRING]
["WHAT MOUNTING TYPE IS USED (LUG, SPINDLE)?"]
END INPUT
Note:
If you are using a Unix machine, you may need to use the vi
editor. Refer to Appendix B of this guide for the most common
vi commands. To use another editor, you can set the
configuration file option “pro_editor_command.”
3. Add an “if-else-endif” statement around the hole features.

½ Scroll down and locate the entry ADD FEATURE (initial
number 13). Type the following statement above the entry.
Refer to the following paragraph.
MAIN PATTERN DIMENSIONS:
INCREMENTAL PATTERN DIMENSIONS:
d76 = 30.0
d79 = 3.50R
d80 = .75
d81 = .75
END ADD
END IF
[IF MOUNT=="LUG"]

NOTES
PARENTS = 88(#5) 4(#2) 14(#4)

½ Type the following statement at the location shown in the
following paragraph.
END ADD
[ELSE]
PARENTS = 14(#4) 88(#5)

½ Type the following statement at the location shown in the
following paragraph.
END ADD
[END IF]
PARENTS = 14(#4) 4(#2) 6(#3)
4. Exit the editor, click Yes to save the file.
5. Click Yes to incorporate your changes into the model.
Task 3. Study the changes that you have made in the program.
1. In the GET INPUT menu, click Enter .
2. Select Mount then click Done Sel . To specify the mounting type
accept the default SPINDLE and click .

NOTES
Figure 9
Task 4. Add a prompt to specify the number of lug nut holes needed.
Since the prompt is only necessary when you select “LUG” as the
mounting type, use an IF statement in the input section after the input that
you added earlier.
1. Click Program > Edit Design . Add the input statement for the
number of holes. Type the following, just above the END INPUT
entry.
MOUNT STRING
"WHAT MOUNTING TYPE IS USED (LUG, SPINDLE)?"
[IF MOUNT=="LUG"]
[NUM_HOLES NUMBER]
["HOW MANY MOUNTING HOLES ARE NEEDED?"]
[END IF]
END INPUT
2. Before the END RELATIONS entry, add a relation to set the

number of instances in the pattern (P1) equal to the input
parameter (NUM_HOLES).
[/* SET THE NUMBER OF MOUNTING HOLES]
[P1=NUM_HOLES]

NOTES
[/* SET SPACING OF BOLT HOLES]
[D39=360/P1]
END RELATIONS
3. Exit the editor and click Yes to save the changes.
4. Click Yes to incorporate your changes into the model.
Task 5. Permanently save some rim variations for future use.
1. Regenerate the model.
2. Click Enter > Select All > Done Sel .
3. Provide the following input:

½ To define Rim Diameter, accept the default [12].
½ To define Rim Width, type [6].
½ For Straight Spokes, click Yes .
½ To select between right or left handed spokes, type [R].
½ To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].
½ To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].
½ To select the Mounting, type [Lug]
½ For number of holes, type [4]
Figure 10
4. Click Program > Instantiate to save the variation. Type [12X6-

AR-4N].

NOTES
5. Regenerate again.
6. Click Enter . Select SIDE. Click Done Sel .
7. Type [L] for the side.
Figure 11
8. Click Program > Instantiate . Type [12X6-AL-4N] as the instance

name.
Task 6. Create two more variations and save them as instances.
1. Using the procedure outlined in the previous task, create another

variation and save the following configuration as 12X8-BR-SP.
½ For Straight Spokes, click No .
½ To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [Y].
½ To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].
½ Define the Curve Radius as [3.5].
½ To select the Mounting, type [Spindle]

NOTES
Figure 12
2. Create another variation and save the following configuration as

12X8-BL-SP.
½ For Straight Spokes, click No .
½ To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].
½ To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [Y].
½ Define the Curve Radius as [3.5].
½ To select the Mounting, type [Spindle]
3. This has created instances in a family table. Look at the table.

Select Family Tab . Close the editor when you have finished.

NOTES
Figure 13
4. Save the model and erase it from memory.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Automating Assembly

Design
Task 1. Create a prompt asking for the suspension offset values for each
side; then pass the values down to the front suspension skeleton with an
execute statement.
1. Open PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL.PRT. Display the model in Hidden

Line mode.
Figure 14
2. Change to the RIGHT view.
3. Regenerate the part. Notice that some work has already been done
in the program.
4. Click Enter > Select All > Done Sel . Type [6] and [–3] for
R_OFFSET and L_OFFSET. The suspension changes to show the
suspension linkage motion.
5. Close the window.
6. Open PGM_FRT_SUSP.ASM. Notice that the changes made in the

skeleton model reflect in the assembly.

NOTES
Figure 15
Task 2. It is more practical to control the program in the suspension

skeleton at the suspension assembly level. Use an execute statement to
pass down information from the assembly.
1. Click Program > Edit Design .
2. Type the input statements for the left and right offsets between the
input entry and the end input entry of the program.
INPUT
[R_OFFSET NUMBER]
[“WHAT IS THE RIGHT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO

–9)”]
[L_OFFSET NUMBER]
[“WHAT IS THE LEFT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO –

9)”]
END INPUT
3. Type an execute statement for the PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL.PRT. In

this execute statement, pass the values of the assembly parameters
R_OFFSET and L_OFFSET to the skeleton parameters of the same
name. Type the statement immediately before the skeleton
component is added to the assembly. See the following:
RELATIONS
END RELATIONS

NOTES
[EXECUTE PART PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL]
[R_OFFSET = R_OFFSET]
[L_OFFSET = L_OFFSET]
[END EXECUTE]
ADD SKELETON MODEL PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL
4. Exit the editor save the changes.
5. Click Yes to incorporate the changes.
Task 3. Test the program.
1. In the GET INPUT menu, click Enter > Select All > Done Sel .
2. Enter any value between 10 to –9 for the Right Suspension Offset.
3. Enter any value between 10 to –9 for the Left Suspension Offset.
4. Notice the change and click Done Return .
Task 4. Use the program to automatically “swap out” components in the

assembly. Create a prompt to ask which disks to use for the brakes. Two
styles are available, solid and vented. A functional interchange already
exists between the two.
1. Open PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB.ASM.
2. Type the input prompt for the disk type in the assembly program.
Click Program > Edit Design .
INPUT
[BRAKES STRING]
["WHICH DISK DO YOU WANT (PGM_DISK_SOLID,

PGM_DISK_VENTED)?"]
END INPUT

NOTES
3. Scroll down to the entry ADD PART PGM_DISK_SOLID. Add the

EXECUTE and END EXECUTE lines to the program above the
ADD PGM_DISK_SOLID line. Delete the part name
PGM_DISK_SOLID and type in [(BRAKES)] in its place.
END ADD
[EXECUTE ASSEMBLY PGM_BRAKES]
[END EXECUTE]
[ADD PART (BRAKES)]
INTERNAL COMPONENT ID 19
PARENTS = 16(#4) 18(#5)
Note:
The execute statement retrieves the interchange assembly into
memory so that the interchange can occur between the two
components.
4. Exit the editor and save the changes.
5. Click Yes incorporate the changes.
6. To test the program, click Enter > BRAKES > Done Sel . Type
[PGM_DISK_VENTED] and click .
Figure 16

NOTES
Task 5. Add a prompt asking for the style of brakes in the front
suspension assembly; then pass this value down to the two wheel_hub
assemblies.
1. Activate the PGM_FRT_SUSP.ASM window.
2. Click Program > Edit Design.
3. Add the input prompt for the brake style. It should be identical to
the input statement in the PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB.ASM. You
must complete this step before adding the execute statement.
INPUT
R_OFFSET NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE RIGHT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO

-9)"
L_OFFSET NUMBER
"WHAT IS THE LEFT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO -

9)"
[BRAKES STRING]
["WHICH DISK DO YOU WANT (PGM_DISK_SOLID,

PGM_DISK_VENTED)?"]
END INPUT
4. Just after END RELATIONS add an execute statements to pass the

value to the PGM_WHEEL_RF_HUB subassembly.
END INPUT
RELATIONS
END RELATIONS
[EXECUTE ASSEMBLY PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB]
[BRAKES = BRAKES]
[END EXECUTE]
EXECUTE PART PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL
R_OFFSET = R_OFFSET

NOTES
L_OFFSET = L_OFFSET
END EXECUTE
5. Exit the editor and incorporate the changes.
6. To test the program, click Enter > BRAKES > Done Sel. Type
[PGM_DISK_SOLID] and click .
7. Regenerate to build different suspension configurations.
9. {Optional} Set up parameter BRAKES in the

PGM_LF_WHEEL_HUB assembly as you did for the right front
assembly; then add an execute statement in the front suspension
assembly to pass down the parameter information.
10. Save the assembly and erase all models from memory when you
have finished (use Current and Not Displayed ).

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• How to automate the design process to generate different variations of

the model at the part and the assembly level.
• How to run the program using Regenerate .
• How to access the program using Edit Design .
• How to incorporate the program’s changes into the model.
• How to vary the design in the assembly and part modes.
• How to create family table instances from the variations.
• How to use Pro/Program to manipulate features.

Mechanism & Design Animation

In this module you learn the process for implementing Mechanism
Design and Design Animation.
Mechanism (MDX) allows you to test and showcase motion and
flexibility of finished parts in an assembly.
Design animation (DAO) gives you the capability of creating custom
animations such as exploding/unexploding sequences, views, and
mechanism motion.
Objectives
• Describe the applications of Mechanism Design.

• Describe the major steps of implementing Mechanism Design.
• Create a simple mechanism.
• List the capabilities of Design Animation.
• Create a simple animation.
• Export an animated MPEG movie.
Page 20-1
NOTES
DEFINING MECHANISM ANIMATION

The Pro/ENGINEER Mechanism Design Extension (MDX) is a kinematic
motion simulation package that provides behavioral insight into the
assembly. Through easily defined connections during assembly creation,
MDX enables you to build “kinematic intelligence” into your assembly at
the very beginning of the product development process. Once assembled,
you can investigate your design by animating the mechanism throughout
the range of motion.
The results of the motion animation not only provide graphical illustration
of the mechanism, but also yield engineering information that can
facilitate the design, such as interference analysis and cam profile
synthesis. When used in conjunction with Behavioral Modeling Extension
(BMX), MDX can be used to create optimized design based on measured
geometry information. When a full dynamics simulation is needed,
assemblies created using MDX be easily reused in
Figure 1: Mechanism Design Window

NOTES
CREATING MECHANISM ASSEMBLIES

One of the first steps in mechanism design is to simulate assembly motion.
By assembling the movable components using connections, you can create
a movable system instead of one rigid body.
Comparing Connections to Constraints

Similar to assembly constraints, assembly connections are used to connect
components together. The connection types are defined by using the same
kind of assembly components that you would use in a real-world situation.
These assembly components include pins, bearings, and so on.
Each connection type is associated with a unique set of geometric

constraints that are based on existing constraints used in Pro/ENGINEER
Assembly mode. For example, a pin connection contains two geometric
constraints: an axis alignment constraint and a plane alignment constraint.
Selecting a Connection Type

The following table lists the eight available connection types on the
Component Placement dialog box, as well as the icons and DOFs:
Table 1: Connection Types

Connection Icon in Graphic Icon in the
DOFs
Type Window Model Tree
Pin 1
Cylinder 2
Slider 1
Planar 3
Weld 0
Ball 3
Bearing 4
Rigid
Note:
In addition to these types of connections, advanced
connections such as cam and slot are also available.

Mechan ism & D esign An imat ion Pag e 2 0-3
NOTES
SIMULATING MOTION
Dragging Assembly Components
Dragging is a powerful way to move your mechanism through an
allowable range of motion. Using the drag icons in the DRAG dialog box,
you can select a body that is not defined as ground and drag it with the
mouse. You can also have a body translate along or rotate about the axis
of a coordinate system.
Figure 2: Snapshots and Constraints in the DRAG Dialog Box
Drivers and Motion

As part of your mechanism analysis, you can use a driver to study
kinematic behavior in your designs. Drivers behave like motors in that
they exert forces between two bodies within a single degree of freedom
(DOF). You can add drivers to your model to prepare it for a motion
study.

NOTES
When configuring a driver you specify:
• Driver Type: Translation or Rotation.

• Profile Specification: Position, Velocity or Acceleration.
• Profile Magnitude: Constant, Ramp, Cosine, Sine Constant Cosine
Acceleration, Cycloidal, Parabolic, Polynomial, or Table driven.
Each profile magnitude will require different inputs for values. The profile
magnitude can then be graphed using the inputted values for visual
representation. The following example is for a Ramp driver.
Figure 3: Ramp Driver Graph
Selecting a Driver
You can impose drivers on joint axes or on geometric entities such as
points, planar surfaces, and datum planes.
Joint Axis Drivers

Joint axis drivers are used to define the relative motion between two
bodies in the joint axis direction.

NOTES
Geometric Drivers
Geometric drivers are used to define motion (rotation or translation) on
points or planes. They are useful when the motion cannot be defined using
a joint axis, for example:
• The two bodies involved in the motion are not directly connected by a
joint.
• DOF needed cannot be satisfied by any existing connection.
• Complex 3-D motions as opposed to single translation or rotation is
needed.
IMPLEMENTING MECHANISM
Using Mechanism Design involves two fundamental steps: defining a
mechanism and making it move. Depending on whether there are cam and
slot connections in the mechanism, the major steps of implementing
mechanism design is slightly different.
Mechanism Design without Cam and Slot

Connections
• Creating assembly connections $VVHPEOLQJWKHFRPSRQHQWVWKDW
are intended to move by using connections enables you to create a
movable system instead of one rigid body.

NOTES
• Defining Joint Axis Settings <RXFDQXVHWKHMRLQWD[LVVHWWLQJVWR

quantitatively describe the displacement, set the range of the motion
and choose the default configuration used in regeneration.
• Moving the assembly
½ 0RYHWKHDVVHPEO\LQWHUDFWLYHO\XVLQJWKH'UDJIXQFWLRQDOLW\
Using the Drag functionality, you can move the mechanism
through an allowable range of motion interactively.
½ 6HWXSGULYHUVDQGUXQPRWLRQ 7KHPRWRUOLNHGULYHUVHQDEOH\RX
to impose a particular motion on a mechanism. The mechanism
will move according to your design intent that has been build in the
connections, the joint axis settings and the drivers.
• Applying the results 8VLQJWKHPRWLRQUXQUHVXOWV\RXFDQ
perform various engineering studies, as well as generate movie and
image files for visualization purposes.
½ Generate movie/image output
½ Interference study
½ Generate Motion Envelope
½ Create Trace curve/Cam synthesis curve
½ Graph measure results

NOTES
• Perform Sensitivity and Optimization studies in conjunction with

BMX &UHDWLQJLQWXLWLYHDQGPRYDEOHPHFKDQLVPVGUDVWLFDOO\UHGXFH
the workload when setting up for performing studies, as opposed to
creating assembly skeletons. The build in functionality allows you to
continuously monitor parameters within the motion range.
Mechanism Design with Cam and Slot Connections

You can create the advanced cam and slot connections in a similar fashion
after you first assemble the component into the assembly using the regular
connections. Using cam and slot connections, you can capture motions
that are very difficult to accomplish using the regular connections or
skeletons.
Figure 4: CAM and SLOT FOLLOWER CONNECTIONS Dialog Boxes

NOTES
DEFINING DESIGN ANIMATION

The Pro/ENGINEER® Design Animation Option enables the creation of
animation sequences within Pro/ENGINEER, using parts, assemblies, and
mechanisms.
Using key frames, drivers and inherited mechanism joints, animations can
be created and manipulated with ease. These animation sequences can be
used as:
• Away convey complex information about a product or process.

• Animated guides to assembly and disassembly.
• Guides for maintenance procedures.
• Concept communication tools for sales and marketing, management
meetings, design reviews.
• A method for remote communication of information.
Design Animation is associative, so that any changes made to the
Pro/ENGINEER design are fully propagated throughout the animation—
making sure the animation presented is always up-to-date and correct.
Photorealistic animations can also be created combining Pro/ENGINEER's

photorendering technology with Design Animation.

NOTES
Figure 5: Design Animation of Assembly
DESIGN ANIMATION CAPABILITIES

Integrated and associative
Design Animation is an integrated part of Pro/ENGINEER, so there are no
data transfer problems usually found with 3rd party animation packages,
and users benefit from full associativity and interoperability with other
PTC products and data management tools. If the design of parts or
assemblies change, the animation will update automatically.
Key frame sequences

The user defines the key frame sequences that describe the position and
orientation of parts and assemblies at specified times. Design Animation
interpolates between these key frames to produce a smooth animation.
Simply snapping current positions and orientations in Pro/ENGINEER can

easily create Key frames.

NOTES
Figure 6: Key Frame Sequence Dialog Box
Animation Tools
Design Animation delivers powerful assembly manipulation functionality
to help quickly set up key frames by allowing the user to specify
geometric constraints, translational and rotational dragging, body locking
and other tools. This allows for rapid manipulation of part positions to
quickly build key frame sequences and animations.

NOTES
Figure 7: DRAG Dialog Box
Animation Manager
Events, key frames, and sub-animations are displayed and controlled by
the easy-to-use animation manager. From this one panel, users can quickly
and easily define, manipulate, and change any aspect of the animation.
Figure 8: Managing Animation
Mechanism Re-use
The mechanism joints used to create and move assemblies in Mechanism
Design are re-used by Design Animation where they can be selectively
activated and de-activated at any stage during animation sequences.

NOTES
LABORATORY EXERCISES
Goal
In this laboratory you practice with the fundamental mechanism and
design animation functionality.
Method
In Exercise 1, you create a mechanism of the Fan project assembly.
Tools
Table 2: Icons for Mechanism and Animation
Icons Description
Snapshot
Set coordinate system
Select and drag geometry
Drag link
Select connections
Add constraint
Align constraint
Body lock constraint

Animation icons display
Assemble default constraint

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Basic Mechanism

Task 1. Prepare for creating the mechanism, and view the exercise goal.

2. Use windows to navigate to the

fund_design_320/20_mechnism_animation directory. Double-
click FINISHED_MECHANISM mpg file to use your computers
default mpeg player. (Or, you may double-click the
MPEG_PLAYER.EXE file and use it to play the mpeg). Review the
motion.
3. After viewing the FINISHED_ANIMATION mpeg, close the player

and return to Pro/ENGINEER..
Task 2. Create a new assembly and assemble the base subassembly.
1. Create a new assembly called MECHANISM using the default

template.
2. Assemble the MECH_BASE assembly with a default constraint.
Figure 9: Assembling Base

NOTES
3. Open the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly, and suppress the HUB,

BLADES, and CAGE.
Figure 10: Suppressing Features
4. Close the MECH_OSCILLATE window.
5. Activate the MECHANISM window.
Task 3. Assemble the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly using a connection.
1. Begin to assemble the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly. Use the

mouse to position approximately, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 11: Positioning
2. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click Connections

to expand the dialog box. Notice that it enables you to use
mechanism connections instead of typical constraints.
3. Notice the default connection is a PIN joint. Select the two surfaces
shown in the following figure to satisfy the Axis Alignment.

NOTES
Figure 12: Selecting Surfaces for Axis Alignment
4. Select the two surfaces shown in the following figure to satisfy the
Translation requirement. (This will effectively mate the surfaces.)
Figure 13: Mating Surfaces
5. Click OK > Done Return .
Task 4. Dynamically drag the assembly.
1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Mechanism > Drag , and select on

the tip of the main driveshaft.
2. Move the mouse and notice how the pin joint has constrained the
subassembly. Position as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 14: Positioning Subassemblies
Task 5. Assemble the DRIVE_ARM using a connection.
1. Assemble the DRIVE_ARM. Establish the connection using a Pin

joint.
2. Using Mechanism > Drag , drag the part and locate it to the
position shown in the following figure.
Note:
Be careful when dragging the drive arm since you are also able
to drag the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly. An alternate
technique is to use the Move tab from the Component
Placement dialog box, as this will only move the current
component.
Figure 15: Drag to Position

NOTES
Task 6. Create the first driver.
1. In the MECHANISM dialog box, click Model > Drivers > Add ,
and select the joint axis, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16: Selecting Joint Axis
2. In the DRIVE EDITOR dialog box, click the Profile tab and set the
Specification to Velocity.
3. Leave the MAGNITUDE set to Constant and type [36.0] as the

value for A.
4. Click Graph to view the function to be applied to this driver. Close

the Driver Profile and Graph Options windows.
5. Name the Driver [AUX ] and click OK > Close .
Task 7. Run the mechanism.
1. In the MECHANISM dialog box, click Connect > Run >Yes .
2. Click Run Motion > Add , and type [FAN] as the name. Notice the
time length of 10 seconds. Leave all the default values and click
OK.
Note:
We entered 36 deg/sec for the velocity and 10 seconds time
duration. Therefore we will have 36x10 = 360° of angular
motion.
3. Zoom in to the DRIVE_ARM.

NOTES
Figure 17: Zoomed View
4. In the MOTIONS DEFINITIONS dialog box, click Run .
5. Close the MOTION DEFINITIONS dialog box, and Click Done-

Return > Yes to exit Mechanism.
Task 8. Assemble the LINK with two connections.
1. Assemble the LINK with a Pin connection to the support arm, as

Figure 18: Assembling Link with a Pin
2. Click to add another connection. Set the Type to Cylinder

and select the surfaces, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Task 9. Run the Mechanism with interference checking.
1. Click Ok . Then Click Mechanism > Connect > Run >Yes .
2. Click Run Motion > Run . The mechanism should cycle through
one complete oscillation.
Figure 20: Running Motion
3. Click Close > Results > Playback . Click , and

select the LINK and the PEDESTAL.
4. Repaint the screen. In the RESULTS PLAYBACK dialog box, click

Play . Set the options in the ANIMATE dialog box, as shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Figure 21: Animate Dialog Box
5. Click . Notice that the Link interferes with the Pedestal

during portions of the oscillation.
Figure 22: Link Interferes
Note:
You may zoom, rotate, pan, and change model and datum
display while animation is running.
6. Click and close the ANIMATE dialog box.
7. Close the RESULTS PLAYBACK window and click Done-Return

> Yes to exit Mechanism.
8. Save the model and close all windows.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISES
The following exercises provide supplementary tools and techniques
related to this module’s goal. You may work on these as time allows.
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Fan

Mechanism
Task 1. Establish motion on the drive shaft with a connection and
driver.
1. Open MECHANISM.ASM.
2. Select F3_DRIVESHAFT part and redefine it.
3. Click to delete all constraints. Then click Connections to

expand the dialog box.
4. Create an axis alignment between the following two surfaces.
Figure 23: Aligning Axes
5. Satisfy the translation requirement by selecting the two surfaces, as


NOTES
Figure 24: Selecting Two Surfaces
6. Click OK to complete the redefinition.
Task 2. Add the second driver.
1. Click Mechanism > Model > Drivers > Add , and select the joint
axis, as shown in the following figure. Use Flip to make the
magenta direction arrow point inwards.
Figure 25: Selecting Joint Axes
2. Type [MAIN] as the name and click Profile .
3. Set the Specification to Velocity and type [108] as the value for
‘A’ using a Constant Magnitude.
4. Click Ok > Close .
Note:
We entered 108 deg/sec for the velocity and 10 seconds time
duration. Therefore we will have 108x10 = 3x360° of angular
motion.

NOTES
Task 3. Run the Mechanism.
1. Click Connect > Run >Yes.
2. Click Run Motion > Edit > Driver. Select the MAIN Driver and
click Add.
3. Click OK and Run. Notice the shaft now rotates during the
oscillation.
Figure 26: Shaft Rotates
Task 4. Run the Mechanism on the full assembly.
1. Exit mechanism and Resume the HUB, BLADES, and CAGE.
2. Redefine the HUB. Notice that it is simply assembled with typical

constraints to the SHAFT. Cancel the Redefine.
3. Type [ Mechanism] and click Run Motion > Run . Observe the
motion, then click Close.
4. Click Results > Playback . Set the same Two Parts interference
as before, and click Play.

NOTES
Figure 27: Oscillating Fan
Task 5. Optional: Output a movie.
1. Click Capture , and type a filename. Click Ok . The MPEG output

will take about 10 minutes to generate.
2. Use windows to find and play your movie file.
Displayed .
Note:
If you are having trouble with your mechanism, you can use
the saved one if you wish. Clear all memory, and open the
FINISHED_MECHANISM.ASM. Then enter mechanism
results playback and restore the FINISHED_FAN.PBK file.

NOTES
OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating an Animation

Task 1. Prepare for creating the animation. View the finished MPEG
movie.
1. Use windows to navigate to the

fund_design_320/20_mechnism_animation directory. Double-
click FINISHED_ANIMATION mpeg file to use your computers
default mpeg player. (Or, you may double-click the
MPEG_PLAYER.EXE file and use it to play the mpeg).
2. Close the Mpeg player and return to Pro/ENGINEER.
3. Open ANIMATION.ASM.
Figure 28: Animation Assembly
4. Click Applications > Animation .
5. Click > > OK. To display local coordinate

systems.
6. Create a saved view called [cage_blades ], as shown in the

following figure.

NOTES
Figure 29: Cage Blades View
7. Create a saved view called [ISO] as shown.
Figure 30: ISO View
8. Reorient approximately, as shown in the following figure and save

the view as [start].

NOTES
Figure 31: Reorienting View
Task 2. Initiate bodies and begin taking snapshots
1. Click . Click One Part Per Body .
2. Click the Ground body and click Edit .
3. Select the MAIN_BASE, SUPPORT_ARM, and MOTOR parts and

click Done Sel > Ok . Close the BODIES dialog box.
4. Click > to take the first snapshot.
5. Click and select the HOUSING_REAR part to set the current

Csys.
Task 3. Create a series of snapshots for the cage and blades.
1. Click , select the Cage part, and drag to a position

approximately as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 32: Creating Snapshots
2. Click to take the second snapshot.
3. Click and drag the first fin to the position, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 33: Position for Third Snapshot
4. Click to take the third snapshot.
5. Take the fourth snapshot, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 34: Fourth Snapshot
6. Take the fifth snapshot, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 35: Fifth Snapshot
7. The sixth snapshot is shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 36: Sixth Snapshot
8. The seventh snapshot is shown in the following figure.
Figure 37: Seventh Snapshot
9. Create the next snapshot, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 38: Eighth Snapshot
Task 4. Create a saved view for the linkage and take linkage snapshots.
1. Zoom as shown below and create a saved view called

[zoom_link].
2. Click Constraints > and select the connections shown in the

following figure to temporarily disable them.
Figure 39: Selecting Constraints to Disable
3. Click > and select the LINK to set the active Csys.
4. Click , drag the link, and create the ninth snapshot, as shown

NOTES
Figure 40: Ninth Snapshot
5. Click and drag to create the tenth snapshot, as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 41: Tenth Snapshot
6. Snapshot 11 is shown in the following figure. (Hint- you will have

to disable a constraint and re-select a Csys.)

NOTES
Figure 42: Eleventh Snapshot
7. Zoom and create the saved view [hub_covers], as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 43: Zooming in to Create a New Saved View
8. Click and select the REAR_COVER part to set the current

Csys.
9. Create Snapshot12 as shown.

NOTES
Figure 44: Twelfth Snapshot
10. Take Snapshot13 as shown in the following figure.
Figure 45: Thirteenth Snapshot
11. Take Snapshot14, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 46: Fourteenth Snapshot
12. Close the DRAG dialog box.
13. Click Utilities > Time Domain , and edit the End Time to [30]
seconds. Click OK .
14. Click to being Key Frame Sequence (KFS) creation.

NOTES
15. Click to add Snapshot1 to the KFS.
16. Select Snapshot2, type [1.0] as the time, and click .
17. Add the remaining Snapshots, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 47: Adding Snapshot to Key Frame Sequence
18. Click OK and then click to test the animation. Click Stop
when the moving timeline reaches 15 seconds.
19. Move the key frames for the cage and blades to be closer together
on the timeline, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 48: Adjusting Timeline
20. Click to test the animation again. Click Stop when the
moving timeline reaches 15 seconds.

NOTES
21. Select the KFS timeline as shown in the following figure.Click
> Edit KFS .
Figure 49: Selecting Timeline
22. Edit the times, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 50: Editing Times
Figure 51: Important Note
23. Add in Snapshots 13 – 1 in a mirror sequence from time 14 to time

23, as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 52: Adding Snapshots in a “Mirror” Sequence
24. Click Ok > to test the animation.
Task 5. Add views to the timeline.
1. Click Utilities > Time Domain to temporarily edit the End Time to
[12] seconds. Click OK .
2. Click , and select the named view START, set the time value
to [0.5] and click Apply .
3. Select the named view Cage_Blades , set the time value to [1.5]
and click Apply.
Note:
All saved views on the timeline in this exercise should have
their ‘After’ value set to ‘START’.
4. Click Close > to test the animation.
5. Click , select the Cage_Blades view, set the time value to

[4.5] and click Apply .

NOTES
6. Apply the Zoom _Link view to a time of [6.0].
7. Apply the Zoom _Link view to a time of [10.0]. Refer to the

figure below.
Figure 53: Studying the Timeline
9. Click Utilities > Time Domain to temporarily edit the End Time to
[20] seconds. Click OK .
10. Click , select the Hub_Covers view, set the time value to
[10.5] and click Apply > Close .
11. Click on the and select Zoom In . Then select a

window, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 54: Picking a Window
12. Click , select the Hub_Covers view, set the time value to
[13.5] and click Apply. Repeat for a value of [ 15.5].
13. Select the Zoom_Link view , set the time value to [16.5] and click
Apply .
Figure 55: Setting Time Value

NOTES
15. Select the Start view, set the time value to [19] and click Apply .
16. Click Utilities > Time Domain and edit the End Time to [30]
seconds. Click OK .
17. Add the Start view at a time value of [22.5].
18. Add the ISO view at a time value of [23.5].
19. Click on the and select Refit . Then Zoom In as

shown.
Figure 56: Zooming In after Refit
20. Click to test the animation.
Task 6. Add a driver to the timeline.
1. Click Animation > Driver > Main > Include .
2. Drag the Driver to the following location on the timeline.
Figure 57: Dragging Driver
Task 7. Create a body-body lock for the duration of the driver.
1. Click and select the F3_DRIVESHAFT as the Lead body.

NOTES
2. Select the HUB and the BLADES as Follower bodies, and click
Apply > Close .
3. Reposition the Body-Body lock on the timeline as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 58: Repositioning Body Lock
4. Add a final START view, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 59: Final Start View
6. Click to test the animation.
7. Click to play the animation. Setup the dialog box, as shown in


NOTES
Figure 60: Animate Dialog Box
8. Click to play the animation in a continuous loop.
9. After viewing the animation through a few cycles, click Capture

to export an MPEG movie. Type [Animation] as the filename,
accept all the defaults, and click Ok . The Mpeg will take about 10
minutes to generate.
Displayed .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• How to create a mechanism.

• How to animate a design.

Creating Photorealistic Images

In this module you learn to create photo-realistic images of solid
models using PhotoRender.
Objectives
• Define and set appropriate views.

• Define room and set its textures.
• Define and set appearances.
• Set lights.
• Render a scene using different options.
• Manipulate images.
Page 21-1
NOTES
CREATING PHOTOREALISTIC IMAGES

You can create photo-realistic images of Pro/ENGINEER models, parts or
assemblies, using PhotoRender. PhotoRender allows you to:
• Setup a scene.
• Render the scene.
• Manipulate the images.
PhotoRender Interface
All the functions needed to set a scene and to render it can be accessed
from the PhotoRender menu bar. You can also save and edit images, start
and shutdown the rendering process using this menu bar. To activate the
PhotoRender menu bar, click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender .
Figure 1: The PhotoRender Menu Bar
SETTING UP A SCENE
A scene involves an illuminated model assigned with appearances and an
environment. To create a scene, you need to:
• Set an appropriate perspective view .

• Set a room around the model.
• Define and assign appearances.
• Set the lights to illuminate the model.

NOTES
Wall with texture
Light
Floor with marble

texture
Mold assigned with
appearances The view to render
Figure 2: The Scene for the Mold Model
Setting up Views and Room

In real life, you always see an object with a background in perspective
view. To create a realistic rendering, you need to define a view in which
you would like to render the model and create an environment around it.
Setting and Saving Views

The PhotoRender menu bar helps you to set and save the views in which
you would like to render the model, without exiting the PhotoRender
mode. Pro/ENGINEER displays the model in trimetric view by default. To
add realism, render the model in a perspective view instead of the
trimetric. You can set perspective views using the PhotoRender menu bar.
Figure 3: The Trimetric and Perspective Views

C reat ing Photo real isti c Im age s Pag e 2 1-3
NOTES
Setting up Rooms
A room helps you to locate the model in an environment. It has six sides,
which are termed as Walls, Floor and Ceiling. Each side of the room can
be independently moved and positioned with respect to the model. All the
sides of a room can be mapped with different textures. These textures
determine the visual component of the scene around the model.
By default, a room is displayed in the wire frame mode and the Wall2 and
Floor is displayed with a grid. You can choose to display the room in a
shaded mode.
Figure 4: Room in Wireframe Display Mode

NOTES
Figure 5: Room in Shaded Display Mode
Defining and Setting Appearances

Appearances are a combination of a number of attributes that define the
look of a material like wood, steel, gold, rubber etc. These attributes
include color, shininess, reflections, transparency and maps etc. You can
modify these attributes to create appearances using the APPEARANCE
EDITOR dialog box.
Figure 6: Different Appearances.
To create complex appearances, PhotoRender allows you to assign

Texture, Bump and a Decal maps.

NOTES
Figure 7: Spheres with Different Maps Assigning Appearances
You can set appearances using the APPEARANCES dialog box. In part
mode you can assign appearances to selected surfaces or to the full part. In
assembly mode, you can assign an appearance to a component or to the
full assembly.
Setting up Lights
A good lighting scheme enhances the realism and visual appeal of a scene.
By default the PhotoRender illuminates the model with two lights,
Ambient and Direction light. To create a good rendering, you may create
appropriate lights, using the LIGHTS dialog box. The PhotoRender allows
you to create four types of lights:
• Point – A point light is like an incandescent light bulb, which emits

the light from its center in all the directions.
• Direction – A direction light emits parallel beam of light rays from an
infinite distance. It does not have a specific position.
• Spot – A spotlight is like a Point light whose rays are confined within
a cone.
Using the LIGHTS dialog box, you can switch on /off a light, delete a
light, or modify properties of a light.
You can define or modify the properties of a light, using the LIGHT
EDITOR dialog box. The LIGHT EDITOR dialog box locates a light with
respect to the model, enables it to cast shadows and manipulate the color.

NOTES
RENDERING A SCENE
You can render a scene after setting it up. The system calculates the
reflections, the highlights, transparency, shadows etc and creates an image
of the scene.
Figure 8: Rendered Scene
PhotoRender allows you to choose a number of options using RENDER

CONFIGURATION dialog box, to create different visual effects. Following
are some of the major options that you can set using RENDER
CONFIGURATION dialog box:
• Render Quality
• SelfShadows
• Reflections
• Render Room
• Reflect On Floor
• Shadows On Floor
• Geometric Texture Sharpen
• Manipulating Images

NOTES
PhotoRender allows you to manipulate images using the Image Editor.
Figure 9: Image Editor Window
Some of the major functions that you can perform using the Image Editor
are:
• Converting the image formats

• Resizing the Images
• Mirroring the Images
• Rotating the images.
• Creating a Decal
• Sharpening the images
• Stylizing the images

NOTES
Goal
In this laboratory you create photorealistic images of your
Pro/ENGINEER models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you explore the PhotoRender tools. You create lights and
room ambience for the finished fan assembly from the project.
Tools
Table 1: PhotoRender Icons
Icons Description
Modify lights
Modify perspective view
Render model
Modify Appearance
Modify room configuration
Modify rendering configuration options
Delete light
Create spotlight

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using PhotoRender

Task 1. Open the model and activate PhotoRender.

2. Open FAN_PHOTORENDER.ASM..
Figure 10: Finished Fan Assembly
3. Click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender .
Figure 11: PhotoRender Icon Bar
Task 2. A rectangular room controls the environment around the model.

The system provides a default room that you can modify to suit your
requirements. Open the ROOM EDITOR dialog box and familiarize
yourself with the room.
1. Click [Modify room configuration]. Notice the default

textures applied on the walls, floor and ceiling.

NOTES
Note:
You can change the room size using the thumb-wheels or the
text box.
2. Click Close when finished examining the dialog box.
Task 3. Appearances display a part in a specific material. You can

define your own appearances and assign them to the parts or to an
assembly. Familiarize yourself with the basics of creating and setting an
appearance.
1. Click [Modify appearance]. Notice that the Palette contains a

default appearance. You can add more appearances. You can also
assign the appearances using the APPEARANCES dialog box.
2. Click Add in the APPEARANCES dialog box. Notice that the

BASIC, ADVANCED and DETAIL tabs contain number of
attributes, which you can modify to create different appearances.
3. Close both the APPEARANCE EDITOR and APPEARANCES dialog

boxes.
Task 4. Pro/ENGINEER illuminates the model with default lights. You

can create specific lights to control the illumination of your model. Open
the LIGHTS dialog box and familiarize yourself with creation and
manipulation of lights.
1. Click [Modify lights]. Notice the two default lights in the

Lights dialog box. You can add the Point, Spot or Direction lights
using the pull-down menu or icons. You can also edit, delete, or
switch a light on or off.

NOTES
Switch On/Off the

selected light using
this button.
Create Point,
Direction and Spot
lights using these
buttons.
Figure 12: The Lights Dialog Box
Task 5. Create a new light.
1. Click [Create spotlight] in the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box.

Notice that you can manipulate the position, direction and spread
angle of the light in the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box.
2. Click OK to close the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box. Notice the

newly added light in the Lights dialog box.
3. Delete the spotlight. Click [Delete light] in the LIGHTS dialog

box.
4. Close the LIGHTS dialog box.
Task 6. Render the Model. When you render a model, the system
calculates the reflections and shadows in relation to the room,
appearances, and lights that you have set. By default, the system creates a
low quality preview rendering of your scene and displays it in the current
Pro/ENGINEER window.
1. Click [Render model]. Wait until the system renders the

model and displays the image in Pro/ENGINEER window. Notice
that the transparency and textures are not visible, even though the
attributes are enabled.

NOTES
Figure 13: The Initial Rendering
Task 7. There are many configuration options to control the rendering

output of your model. Change a few settings and render the model again.
1. Exit PhotoRender temporaril. Click [Close dialog box].
2. Click View > Model Setup > Color and Appearance .
3. Click Modify from Model then select the color used on the front
cover.
4. Select the ADVANCED tab and drag the Transparency slider to

50 % as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 14: Changing Transparency
5. Similarly, modify the rear cover material and make it 50%

transparent.
6. Click OK > Close .
7. Click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender .
8. Click [Modify rendering configuration options]. Set the

options as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15: Setting Options
9. Click Close and [Render model].
10. Wait for the system to render the model and display the image in
the Pro/ENGINEER window. Notice the transparency and the
reflections on the main body.

NOTES
Figure 16: Rendering with the Changed Options
Task 8. OPTIONAL: Change the Background display
1. The following two images are saved in current folder.
Figure 17: Fan Layout

NOTES
Figure 18: Scene to Experiment
2. Experiment with the Room Setup options to use these images as

backgrounds or wall textures.
Figure 19: Creating Backgrounds
3. Close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not Displayed .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• The basic capabilities of PhotoRender.

• How to create a photo-realistic image of a model using PhotoRender
functionality.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited - Appendix
Using PTC Help

You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER
information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed
information on selected topics.
Objectives
• Start PTC Help.

• Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.
• Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.
Page A-1
NOTES
PTC HELP OVERVIEW

PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into
Pro/ENGINEER.
PTC Help Features

PTC Help offers:
• A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searching

capability
• Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click of
the mouse
• Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software
• Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes
Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database ,
which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more
information, see the Technical Support Appendix.
USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP

Launching Help: Four Methods
There are four procedures for launching the help system.
1. Main Menu
This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete
with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system
speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system.
Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the
following figure.

Pag e A- 2 Append ix A
NOTES
Figure 1 Starting PTC Help
The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser

window.
Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help
In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree
structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access sub-
topics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions,
explanations, and tips.

Usin g PT C Help Pag e A- 3
NOTES
2. Context-Sensitive Help
1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.
2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window

about which you want an explanation.
3. A browser window opens that explains the topic.
4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the

toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon
functionality.
Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help
5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See
Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that
may be of immediate interest.

NOTES
6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.
Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics
3. Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager
1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. Click any menu command from the menu manager.
3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links

that explain the menu command.
4. Click the topic you want to read.
5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu

manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list
of two useful topics.

NOTES
Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager
4. Vertical Menu Commands
1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP

window appears.
Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager

NOTES
PTC HELP MODULES

There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents:
Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and
Using Additional Modules.
Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System
Refer to the following list to find a particular module in the table of

contents:
Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help

Appendix
PTC Global Services: Technical Support

PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance
to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we
also offer Web-based assistance to fit your individual needs by
providing 24 hour / 7 day availability.
PTC Global Services is committed to continually improving customer
service. Through our Quality Monitoring Program we have
demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO
9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.
Objectives
• Open a Technical Support Call.

• Register for on-line Technical Support.
• Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base.
• Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.
Page B-1
NOTES
FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE

Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to
www.ptc.com/support/support.htm.
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail
Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.com with copen as the e-mail subject.
Please use the following format (or download the template from
www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm):
FNAME: First Name

LNAME: Last Name
CALLCENTER: U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or
Tokyo
PHONE: NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN
CONFIG_ID: NNNNNN
PRODUCT: X
MODULE: XX
PRIORITY: X
DESC_BEGIN:
description starts
description continues
description ends
DESC_END

Pag e B- 2 Append ix B
NOTES
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone

Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for
your Local Technical Support Center).
The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following
information when logging a call:
• Your PTC software Configuration ID

• Your name and telephone number
• The PTC product (module) name
• Priority of the issue
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web

You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical
Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL
LOGGER
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support

To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the
instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm.
When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical
Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party
vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure
Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.

Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n Pag e B- 3
NOTES
Routing Your Technical Support Calls
Call
Customer question
Telephone Call Web Call
Tech SupportEngineer Call is automatically created

creates a call in the database in the database
Investigation Call Back and Investigation
Support Engineer
solves issue or
reports it
to Development (SPR)
SPR
Software Performance Report
SPR fixed from Development
Software Performance Report (SPR)
SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer
Update CD to customer

NOTES
Technical Support Call Priorities

• Extremely Critical – Work stopped
• Critical – Work severely impacted
• Urgent – Work impacted
• Not Critical
• General Information
Software Performance Report Priorities

• Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a work
stoppage.
• High – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a
practical alternative technique is not available.
• Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a
practical alternative technique is available.
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT

Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online , to open the
registration form and enter your Configuration ID.
To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About

Pro/ENGINEER .
Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your

personal data. Please write down your username and password for future
reference.

NOTES
ONLINE SERVICES
After you have registered, you will have full access to all Online Tools.
You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online
Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs
(SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the
Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified
automatically.
Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and

electronic order of software and manuals are available.
The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software
updates for any PTC product.
FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE

The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents.
Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs),
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer up-
to-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and
Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.

NOTES
Terminology used by Technical Support

TAN – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that
may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue.
TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue
working.
TPI – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information

about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to
document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer
calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.
Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including

screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.
FAQ – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most

commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support
database.

NOTES
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION

To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to
www.ptc.com/support.
1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications >

Knowledge Base Monitor .
2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get
information.
3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can
help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.
Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up

NOTES
CONTACT INFORMATION
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic
Services.
These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
Web:
• www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support)
• www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)
E-mail:
• cs_ptc@ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data)

• cs-webmaster@ptc.com (for comments or suggestions about
the Customer Service Web site)
FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):
• ftp.ptc.com
Technical Support Customer Feedback Line

The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service
concerns that are not technical product issues.
E-mail:
• cs-feedback@ptc.com
Telephone:
• www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm

NOTES
Telephone
For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted
in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone
and Fax Information sections below.
PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North

America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone
access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local
languages.
North America Phone Information

Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management,
and Documentation Requests):
Within the United States and Canada:
• 800-477-6435
Outside the United States and Canada:
• 781-370-5332
• 781-370-5513
Maintenance:
• 888-782-3774
Education:
• 888-782-3773

Pag e B-10 Append ix B
NOTES
Europe Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Austria 0800 29 7542

Belgium 0800-15-241 (French)
0800-72567 (Dutch)
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117092
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 0180-2245132
49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of
Germany)
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Israel 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew)
177-150-21-34 (English only)
Italy 800-79-05-33
Luxembourg 0800-23-50
Netherlands 0800022-4519
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
South Africa 0800-991068
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 0800-55-38-33 (French)
0800-83-75-58 (Italian)
0800-552428 (German)
United Kingdom 0800-318677
License Management Phone Numbers:
Belgium 0800-75376
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117-092
Eastern Europe 44 1252 817 078

Cu s to m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t io n Pag e B-1 1
NOTES
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-0
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Italy 39 (0) 39-65651
Netherlands 0800-022-0543
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
Russia 44 1252 817 078
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44
United Kingdom 0800-31-8677
Education Services Phone Numbers:
Benelux 31-73-644-2705
France 33-1-69-33-65-50
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-325
Italy 39-039-65-65-652
39-039-6565-1
Spain/Portugal 34-91-452-01-00
Sweden 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo)
46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby)
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-820-00-80
United Kingdom 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK)
44-1252-817-140
Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Australia 1800-553-565
China* 10800-650-8185 (international toll free)
108-657 (manual toll free)
Hong Kong 800-933309
India* 000-6517

Pag e B-12 Append ix B
NOTES
Indonesia 001-803-65-7250
7-2-48-55-00-35
Japan 120-20-9023
Malaysia 1-800-80-1026
New Zealand 0800-44-4376
Philippines 1800-1-651-0176
Singapore 65-830-9899
South Korea 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free)
080-3469-001 (domestic toll free)
Taiwan 0080-65-1256 (international toll free)
080-013069 (domestic toll free)
Thailand 001-800-65-6213
*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with
the respective string:
China MTF8309729
India MTF8309752
The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support
Center.
License Management Phone Numbers
Japan 81 (0) 3-3346-8280

Hong Kong (852) 2802-8982
Education Services Phone Numbers
Australia 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney)

61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne)
China 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou)
86-21-62785080 (Shanghai)
86-10-65908699 (Beijing)
Hong Kong 852-28028982
India 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore)
91-11-6474701 (New Delhi)
91-226513152 (Mumbai)

Cu s to m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t io n Pag e B-1 3
NOTES
Japan 81-3-3346-8268
Malaysia 03-754 8198
Singapore 65-8309866
South Korea 82-2-3469-1080
Taiwan 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei)
886-4-3103311 (Taichung)
886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
Up-to-Date + Worldwide = Maximum
Information ISO 9000 Productivity
Certification with
Quality Control
PTC
System
Products

$SSHQGL[
8VLQJWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
,QWKLVPRGXOH\RXOHDUQKRZWRFRPSOHWHD3UR),&,(1&<
(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQW
2EMHFWLYHV
$IWHUFRPSOHWLQJWKLVPRGXOH\RXZLOOEHDEOHWR
• 6WDUW3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUDQGORJLQ
• &RPSOHWHDVVLJQHGDVVHVVPHQWV
• 9LHZ\RXUDVVHVVPHQWUHVXOWV
3DJH&
127(6
7(&+12/2*<%$6('/($51,1*#37&
37&7HFKQRORJ\EDVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQV7%/6DUHLQWHQGHGWR
FRPSOHPHQWRXULQVWUXFWRUOHGWUDLQLQJ7%/6DUHDQLPSRUWDQWDGMXQFWWR
WUDGLWLRQDOLQVWUXFWRUOHGWUDLQLQJEHFDXVH
• 7KHSUHYDOHQFHRI³YLUWXDOWHDPV´LQPRVWFRPSDQLHVKDVOHGWR
GLVWULEXWHGZRUNJURXSVWKDWUHTXLUH³MXVWLQWLPH´WUDLQLQJ²
XVXDOO\LQPRUHWKDQRQHORFDWLRQVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
• (PSOR\HHVH[SHFWKLJKTXDOLW\³HOHDUQLQJ´WREHDYDLODEOHDORQJ
ZLWKPRVWDGYDQFHGSURGXFWGHVLJQWRROVVXFKDV3UR(1*,1((5
• (PSOR\HHVH[SHFWDQGQHHGRSSRUWXQLWLHVWROHDUQQHZVNLOOVERWK
WRPDLQWDLQH[LVWLQJSURILFLHQFLHVDQGDOVRIRUSURIHVVLRQDO
JURZWK
• 7LPHFRQVWUDLQWVZKLFKDUHRIWHQPRUHUHVWULFWLYHWKDQEXGJHWDU\
OLPLWDWLRQVRIWHQGLFWDWHZKHWKHURQHFDQSDUWLFLSDWHLQWUDLQLQJ
RSSRUWXQLWLHV7KHDELOLW\WRSDUWLFLSDWHLQWUDLQLQJGXULQJ
XQFRQYHQWLRQDOKRXUVDQGIURPWKHXVHU¶VGHVNWRSFDQEHDPDMRU
EHQHILW
,QWRGD\
VZHEHQDEOHGHFRQRP\PRVWSURGXFWGHYHORSPHQWFRPSDQLHV
ZDQWWRWDNHDGYDQWDJHRIQHZWHFKQRORJ\WRLQFUHDVHSURGXFWLYLW\DQG
UHVSRQGWRG\QDPLFPDUNHWFRQGLWLRQV6LPXOWDQHRXVO\ZRUNIRUFH
WUDLQLQJPXVWUHPDLQFXUUHQWZLWKWKHQHZWHFKQRORJ\37&7HFKQRORJ\
EDVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQVDUHGHVLJQWRKHOS\RXDFKLHYHWKLVJRDO
7KH37&7%/6SURGXFWSRUWIROLRFRQVLVWVRIWKUHHNH\FRPSRQHQWV
• 3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
• 3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ:HE/HVVRQV
• 3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJ:HE&RXUVHV
3UR),&,(1&<(9$/8$725
%\XVLQJ37&¶V3UHFLVLRQ/HDUQLQJPHWKRGRORJ\GXULQJWKHFODVV\RXFDQ
DVVHVV\RXUFRPSUHKHQVLRQRIWKHFRXUVHPDWHULDOVZLWKWKH
3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVGHVLJQHGWRDGGUHVVDJURZLQJGHPDQG
IURPRXUFXVWRPHUVIRUDWRROWKDWFDQDFFXUDWHO\DVVHVVWKHVNLOOVRIWKH
37&SURGXFWXVHUV:HIRXQGWKDWERWKXVHUVDQGWKHLUPDQDJHUVZDQWWR
PHDVXUHSURILFLHQF\

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUHQDEOHVXVHUVWRXQGHUVWDQGZKHUHWKH\FDQ
LPSURYHWKHLURZQDELOLWLHV,WKHOSVPDQDJHUVXQGHUVWDQGKRZWKH\FDQ
RSWLPL]HWHDPGHYHORSPHQWDQGDOVRPD[LPL]HWKHLUWUDLQLQJEXGJHW
UHWXUQRQLQYHVWPHQW52,
$66(660(17&5,7(5,$
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRULVGHVLJQHGWRIDLUO\DQGDFFXUDWHO\DVVHVV
WKHXVHUV¶VNLOOV2XUDVVHVVPHQWPHWKRGRORJ\PHHWVRUH[FHHGVLQGXVWU\
VWDQGDUGVIRUREMHFWLYHDVVHVVPHQWWRROV
7KH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUGHYHORSPHQWSURFHVVLVEDVHGRQWKH
IROORZLQJ
• 7KHTXHVWLRQVDQGSHUIRUPDQFHSUREOHPH[HUFLVHVDUHUHODWHGGLUHFWO\
WRWKHVRIWZDUHIHDWXUHVDQGIXQFWLRQV
• 7KHDVVHVVPHQWJUDGLQJDOJRULWKPLVDXWRPDWHGWKHUHLVQRVXEMHFWLYH
FRPSRQHQWWRWKHJUDGLQJSURFHVV
• $QREMHFWLYHWKLUGSDUW\UHYLHZDQGDSSURYDOSURFHVVIROORZLQJVWULFW
JXLGHOLQHVIRUHPSOR\HHHYDOXDWLRQ
$OHWWHUIURPDWKLUGSDUW\ODZILUPGHOLYHULQJWKHLURSLQLRQRQWKHH[WHQW
WRZKLFKWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUFRPSOLHVZLWK8QLWHG6WDWHV(TXDO
2SSRUWXQLW\(PSOR\PHQWODZVDQGUHJXODWLRQVLVDYDLODEOHRQRXUZHE
VLWH0RUHLQIRUPDWLRQLVDYDLODEOHIURPWKH7%/6JDWHZD\SDJH7KH
7%/6JDWHZD\SDJHLVGLVSOD\HGZKHQ\RXORJLQWR3UR),&,(1&<
(YDOXDWRU
)RUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQSOHDVHYLVLW
www.ptc.com/services/edserv/proficiency.htm

3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
127(6
/$%25$725<35$&7,&$/
*RDO
,QWKLVODERUDWRU\\RXVWDUW3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUFRPSOHWHDQ
DVVHVVPHQWDQGYLHZWKHUHVXOWV
0HWKRG
,Q([HUFLVH\RXWDNHDQ(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQWDQGYLHZWKHUHVXOWV
(;(5&,6(&RPSOHWLQJ(YDOXDWRU$VVHVVPHQWV
7DVN /RJRQWR7%/6
,QWKHEURZVHUW\SH>http://www-ed.ptc.com/Evaluator/@
DGGUHVVDUHD
7KH7HFKQRORJ\%DVHG/HDUQLQJ6ROXWLRQV7%/6JDWHZD\SDJH

GLVSOD\V
)LJXUH7%/6*DWHZD\3DJH

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
6HOHFWWKH7%/6/RJRQ LFRQ
$WWKHQH[WVFUHHQW\SHWKH8VHU1DPH DQG3DVVZRUG SURYLGHG

E\\RXULQVWUXFWRULQWKHDSSURSULDWHILHOGVDQGWKHQFOLFNWKH
/RJRQ LFRQ
7DVN 7DNHWKH3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUH[DP
<RXUXVHULQIRUPDWLRQLVGLVSOD\HGDWWKHWRSRIWKHVFUHHQ6FUROO
GRZQWRWKHVHFWLRQODEHOHG3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRU
$VVHVVPHQWV
)LJXUH7DNLQJDQ([DP
6HOHFW6$03/((;$0IURPWKHGURSGRZQOLVWDQGFOLFNWKH
7DNH([DP LFRQ
$WWKHERWWRPRIWKH86(5$*5((0(17VFUHHQFOLFN$JUHH 7KH

ILUVWPXOWLSOHFKRLFHTXHVWLRQGLVSOD\V
3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
127(6
7RDQVZHUDTXHVWLRQVHOHFWWKHFLUFOHQH[WWRWKHGHVLUHGDQVZHU
DQGWKHQFOLFNWKH6XEPLWIRU*UDGLQJ LFRQ
$QVZHUDOOWKHPXOWLSOHFKRLFHTXHVWLRQVLQWKHVDPHIDVKLRQ
7DVN 'RZQORDGWKHSHUIRUPDQFHEDVHGWHVW
6HOHFWWKH*RWR3HUIRUPDQFH%DVHG4XL]]HV OLQN
5HYLHZWKHGUDZLQJRIWKHVKDIW1RWHWKHOHQJWKRIWKHVKDIWLV
UHTXLUHGWREH250
7DVN /RDGWKHVKDIWSDUWLQWR(9$/8$725IRUJUDGLQJ
,Q3UR),&,(1&<(9$/8$725FOLFNWKH%URZVH LFRQDQG

ORFDWH0$67(5B6+$)7357 IURP\RXUZRUNLQJGLUHFWRU\
&OLFNWKH6XEPLWIRU*UDGLQJ LFRQ
7DVN &RPSOHWHWKH(9$/8$725WHVW
&OLFNWKH)LQLVK7HVW LFRQWRFRPSOHWHWKH(9$/8$725H[DP
7DVN 9LHZWKHUHVXOWV
$VFUHHQGLVSOD\VWKHUHVXOWVRIWKHH[DP,WSURYLGHV\RXURYHUDOO
VFRUHDQGDWDEOHRIWKHUHVXOWVIRUHDFKVHFWLRQDQGVXEVHFWLRQ$
VHFWLRQFRQWDLQVTXHVWLRQVRQDFRUHWRSLFVXFKDV0RGHOLQJRU
'UDZLQJ$VXEVHFWLRQFRQWDLQVTXHVWLRQVRQVXEWRSLFVVXFKDV
5HODWLRQVRUURXQGIHDWXUHV
7KHQH[WVHFWLRQOLVWVHYHU\TXHVWLRQLQWKHH[DP$JUHHQ
FKHFNPDUNLQGLFDWHVDFRUUHFWDQVZHU$UHG;LQGLFDWHVDQ
LQFRUUHFWDQVZHU
7RFORVHWKH7%/6FOLFNWKH LFRQ

3DJ H & $SSHQG L[ &
127(6
02'8/(6800$5<
,QWKLVPRGXOH\RXOHDUQHGWKDW
• +RZWRWDNHD3UR),&,(1&<(YDOXDWRUDVVHVVPHQW
• +RZWRYLHZWKHUHVXOWVRIDFRPSOHWHGH[DP

3 UR ) ,& , (1 & < ( 9 $/ 8 $7 25 3DJ H &
INDEX
Appearances, 21-5 Family Tables, 5-2
Image Manipulation, 21-7 Advantages of using, 5-3
Scene Rendering, 21-7 Assembly, 5-7
Setting up lights, 21-6 Creating, 5-4
Assemblies General structure, 5-3
Components Generics, 5-4
Repeating placement, 8-7 Instance Accelerator Files, 5-12
Replacing manually, 8-6 Instance Index Files, 5-12
Creating features in, 6-4 Instances, 5-5
Exploded Views, 8-7 Modifying, 5-8
Modifying, 8-2 Options, 5-12
Replacing components, 8-4 Testing Instances, 5-6
Repositioning components, 8-3 Fillets
Subassemblies, 8-2 Elliptical, 1-5
using with Family Tables, 8-4 Geometric Entities, 1-2
Assembly Conic entities, 1-2
Connections Types, 20-3 Conic sections, 1-3
Connections vs. Constraints, 20-3 Creating axes normal to sketch plane, 1-2
Dragging Components, 20-4 Elliptical fillets, 1-5
Motion, 20-4 Sketcher points, 1-4
Automatic Assembly, 10-10 Splines, 1-6
Controlling Interdependencies Geometry
Copy Geom Features, 13-8 Developing with Rounds, 2-12
Object-Specific Reference Control, 13-6 Helical Sweeps, 3-9
Reference Control Settings, 13-7 Inheritance Features, 5-12
Curves Capabilities, 5-13
see also Surfaces, 4-9 Creating, 5-13
Design Animation Using, 5-13
Capabilities, 20-10 Instance Accelerator
Introduction, 20-9 see also Family Tables, 5-12
Keyframe Sequences, 20-10 ISDX
Manager, 20-12 see also Surfaces, 4-8
Mechanism Re-use, 20-12 Layouts, 10-6
Tools, 20-11 Global information, 10-8
Design Intent, 10-12 Local Groups, 7-2
Drafts Breaking Dependencies, 7-4
Available types, 2-4 Manipulating, 7-2
Creating, 2-3 Patterning Features, 7-2
Creating Neutral Curve, 2-5 Ungrouping, 7-4
Creating Neutral Plane, 2-4 Map Parts
Guidelines for using, 2-2 Constructing, 12-2
Drivers Subassembly Level, 12-5
Geometric, 20-6 Surfaces, 12-4
Joint Axis, 20-5 Using Model Geometry, 12-3
Selecting, 20-5 Mechanism
Exploded Views, 8-7 Implementing, 20-6

IN D E X Pag e- 1
In Assemblies, 20-3 Diagnosing Cause, 18-3
Motion Simulation, 20-4 Fixing Failure, 18-3
Overview, 20-2 Resolve Mode, 18-2
Mechanism Design Rounds
With Cam/Slot Connections, 20-8 Advanced, 2-9
Without Cam/Slot Connections, 20-6 Cross-sections, 2-10
Model Design Geometry, 2-12
Creating surfaces, 4-2 Selecting References, 2-7
Parallel Modeling, 4-7 Sets, 2-10
Parent/Child Relationship Setting extents, 2-8
Defining, 13-2 Setting radius, 2-8
Hierarchy, 13-6 Simple, 2-6
Listing References, 13-5 Transitions, 2-9
Parts Shrinkwrap
Creating intersections, 6-2 Associative, 9-22
Merging and Cutting, 6-2 Creating, 9-22, 9-23
Mirrored, 6-3 Merge Solid, 9-20
Patterns, 6-6 Surface Subset, 9-19
Assembly mode, 6-11 Types, 9-17
Dimension, 6-7 Simplified Representations, 9-2
Tables, 6-7 Creating, 9-5
Types, 6-6 Customized Reps, 9-5
Photorender, 21-2 Skeletons, 10-5
Interface, 21-2 Controlling, 11-5
Setting a scene, 21-2 Creating, 11-4
Setting up rooms, 21-4 Definition, 11-2
Setting views, 21-3 Modeling with, 11-5
Pro/Program Properties, 11-5
Example, 19-3 Relating Assembly Components, 11-4
Interchanging Components, 19-7 Uses, 11-2
Lower Level Program, 19-7 With Mapped Geometry, 12-2
Manipulating Features, 19-10 Splines
Program Creating, 1-6
Assembly Design Process, 19-6 Creating Normal-to-Original, 3-3
Editing, 19-9 STYLE, 4-6
Making Changes, 19-8 Concepts, 4-6
Part Design Process, 19-2 Surfaces, 4-2
Running, 19-9 Blends, Transitions, 4-11
Structure, 19-2 Capped Ends, 4-4
Reference Tools Changing displays, 4-2
Global Reference Viewer, 13-5 Creating 2-D, 3-D curves, 4-8
Info Pull-Down Menu, 13-4 Creating curves on surface, 4-9
Model Tree, 13-4 Creating freeform, 4-10
References Creating merged, 4-4
Creating Dependencies, 13-2 Creating styling models, 4-10
Existing, 13-4 Designing, 4-5
External, 13-2 Open Ends, 4-4
Regeneration Failure Part Mode, 4-2
Examples, 18-4 Reverse Styling, 4-12
Replace, 1-7 see also STYLE, 4-6
Dimensions, 1-8 Solid features, 4-5
Sketched entities, 1-7 Swept Blends, 3-2
Resolve Additional trajectories, 3-4

Pag e- 2 IN D E X
Creating splines, 3-2
Orienting Cross-sections, 3-8
Variable Section, 3-3, 3-7
Text
Dimensions, 1-8
Top-Down Design, 10-2
Assembly Skeletons, 10-5
Assembly Structure Definition, 10-2
Automatic assembly, 10-10
Copying reference geometry, 10-5
Creating parts without geometry, 10-4
Design intent, 10-2, 10-5, 10-12
Layouts, 10-6
UDF
see also User-Defined Features, 7-5
User-Defined Features, 7-5
Creating, 7-5
Creating in assemblies, 7-8
Placing in models, 7-7

IN D E X Pag e- 3

Pro Engineer 3.20 Tutorial

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Pro Engineer 3.20 Tutorial

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PTC Global Services

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Order Number DT-781-320-EN

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Education Services Registration in North America

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

• Internal and external user groups

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator Exam Results

Class Evaluation Form Topics

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Class Evaluation Form Topics

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Advanced Sketching and Geometry 1-1

Drafts and Rounds 2-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Creating Advanced Geometry 3-1

Surface Creation and Style Feature 4-1

Family Tables and Inheritance Features 5-1

Advanced Part Tools and Patterns 6-1

Local Groups and User-Defined Features 7-1

Advanced Assembly Tools 8-1

Simplified Representations & Shrinkwrap 9-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Top-Down Design and Layouts 10-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Designing with Skeletons 11-1

Skeletons with Mapped Geometry 12-1

Managing References 13-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Project Part II: Skeleton Design 15-1

Project Part III: Creating Components 16-1

Project Part IV: Completing the Assembly 17-1

Resolving Failures 18-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Mechanism & Design Animation 20-1

Creating Photorealistic Images 21-1

Using PTC Help A-1

PTC Global Services: Technical Support B-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Using the Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator C-1

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Advanced Sketching and Geometry

• Create ellipses, conics, axis points, and fillets.

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

DEFINING ADVANCED GEOMETRY SKETCHING

Advanced sketching options include:

Creating an Axis Normal to the Sketching Plane

Sketching Conic Entities

Entering Parameter Values

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

Figure 1: Definition of RHO

• .05 to <.5:Elliptical round

Constraining Conic Sections

• The positions of the two endpoints determined by dimensions or

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -